e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
DSR-5016P
DSR-5009P
Digital Video Recorder
with Multiplexer Function
About this manual
Before installing and using this unit,
please read this manual carefully.
Be sure to keep it handy for later reference.
z Refer to the included CD-ROM for the German, French, Spanish and Italian “INSTRUCTION MANUAL”.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
PRECAUTION
For EU Users
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR OTHER MOISTURE.
To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.
If the power supply cord (AC power cord) of this
appliance is damaged, it must be replaced. Return to a
SANYO Authorised Service Centre for replacement of the
cord.
Your SANYO product is designed and
manufactured with high quality materials
and components which can be recycled
and reused.
This symbol means that electrical and
electronic equipment, at their end-of-life,
should be disposed of separately from
your household waste.
Please dispose of this equipment at your local community
waste collection/recycling centre.
In the European Union there are separate collection
systems for used electrical and electronic products.
Please help us to conserve the environment we live in!
Location
For safe operation and satisfactory performance of your
unit, keep the following in mind when selecting a place for
its installation:
Shield it from direct sunlight and keep it away from sources
of intense heat.
Avoid dusty or humid places.
Avoid places with insufficient ventilation for proper heat
dissipation. Do not block the ventilation holes at the top and
bottom of the unit. Do not place the unit on a carpet
because this will block the ventilation holes.
Install the unit in a horizontal position only.
Avoid locations subject to strong vibrations.
Avoid moving the unit between cold and hot locations.
Do not place the unit directly on top of a monitor TV, as this
may cause playback or recording problems.
Avoiding Electrical Shock and Fire
Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.
Do not pull on the power cord when disconnecting it from
an AC wall outlet. Grasp it by the plug.
If any liquid is spilled on the unit, unplug the power cord
immediately and have the unit inspected at a factoryauthorised service centre.
Do not place anything directly on top of this unit.
SERVICE
This unit is a precision instruments and if treated with care,
will provide years of satisfactory performance. However, in
the event of a problem, the owner is advised not to attempt
to make repairs or open the cabinet. Servicing should
always be referred to your dealer or Sanyo Authorized
Service Centre.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Discard used batteries according to the manufacture’s
instructions.
English
1
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
INTRODUCTION
Main features
Accessories
„ The digital video recorder records video from
monitoring cameras to its internal hard disk,
and it can display real video being monitored
in four, six, nine or 16 screens. Recorded video
can also be played back with multiple screens.
Check that you have all the parts shown below.
Power cord
The DSR-5009P can only display split screen video in four,
six or nine screens.
„ In addition to the two internal hard disks,
expansion units can be added for four hard
disks. The hard disks can also be used for
mirroring.
Core clamp
4 large, 2 small
For: DVR power cord (large)
LAN cable (large)
Main Monitor output
cable (large)
Alarm input and Sensor
alarm output cable (large)
RS-485 cable (small)
S-VIDEO output cable
(small)
„ Complete range of recording and playback
functions
z Simultaneous recording and playback of video at a
maximum 100 frames per second.
z Timer recording allows recordings to be made at different
times each day.
z Alarm recording allows the actions of intruders to be recorded.
z Zoom allows a certain section of monitored and playback
video to be magnified.
z The video from specific cameras can be masked using a
black pattern to prevent it being monitored.
z Motion sensing can be used with each camera. Alarms can
be set up to record moving images.
z ROI allows recordings to be made with different picture
quality for each area on the screen.
Power cord tie
z Instruction Manual
(DVR/Network)
z Quick Guide
z CD-ROM Manual
„ Search function allows instant display of the
desired recording. (JP.35)
z Alarm log search allows efficient searching of large
volumes of alarms.
z Search in order of alarm occurrence.
z Search by thumbnail using alarm search.
z Search by date/time.
z Search within the archive area.
z Search for intruder motion using motion detection search.
Symbols used in this manual
„ Four-level user level function allows
restriction of users for data and equipment
management. (JP.110)
Information describing operation methods or
how to get the most out of functions.
Information describing the correct use of the
digital video recorder.
„ Complete with audiovisual connections.
z Allows multi image output to monitor 2.
z Features a dual-system audio input and single-system audio
output, and allows the switching of the output channel.
z The front panel of the unit is equipped with VIDEO OUT
(same as MAIN MONITOR output terminal on the rear
panel) and AUDIO OUT terminals (same as the audio
output terminal on the rear panel) to easily connect to
commercially-available VCRs and DVD recorders.
z The output image from the S-VIDEO terminal is the same
as the main monitor image.
(JP.xx) indicates the page to be referred to.
Copyright
z This manual and software are copyrighted by Sanyo
Electric Co., Ltd.
z Brand and product names used in this manual are the
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
„ Expandable and can be connected to a PC.
Except for personal use, copyright law prohibits the use of
recorded copyrighted images without the permission of the
copyright holder.
z Recorded video can be copied to a CompactFlash card.
Connect a recommended recordable CD drive or DVD
drive to enable copying of recordings to a CD-R/RW or
DVD+R/+RW.
z A built-in LAN terminal provides support for network
control, thus facilitating live monitoring, playback, searches
and menu settings.
z Information on alarms and device malfunctions as well as
alarm images can be sent by e-mail.
z Dome cameras can be controlled by button operations on
the digital video recorder.
2
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
1 BEFORE USE ................................................ 7
3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS ...... 13
Notes on handling the internal HDD .............. 7
Notes on installation locations ....................... 7
The HDD and cooling fan are consumable
components. .................................................. 7
Important recordings ...................................... 7
Protection of the HDD .................................... 7
Backup battery ............................................... 8
Basic connections ........................................ 13
Connecting the RS-232C terminal ............... 13
Connecting RS-485 control terminals .......... 14
Connecting to a 2ND RS485/422 terminal ... 15
Connecting a LAN terminal .......................... 16
Connecting an amplifier ............................... 16
Connecting alarm input terminals ................. 16
Connecting SENSOR ALARM OUT
terminals ....................................................... 17
Connecting control terminals ........................ 17
Connecting the power cord .......................... 17
2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS ........ 9
Front panel ..................................................... 9
Rear panel ................................................... 11
OPERATION
1 PREPARING FOR USE ............................... 18
4 PLAY ............................................................ 31
Operation display ......................................... 18
Changing the display position of
the operation display area ............................ 19
Changing the language ................................ 19
Setting the time ............................................ 20
Hard disk archive area ................................. 21
Playing video on a full screen ...................... 31
Fast-forward and fast-rewind playback ........ 31
Changing the playback speed ...................... 31
Magnifying the playback video ..................... 32
Viewing still images ...................................... 33
Frame advance (forward/reverse) ................ 33
Playing video on multiple screens ................ 33
2 MONITORING VIDEO
FROM A CAMERA ...................................... 22
5 SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO ..... 35
Viewing on a full screen ............................... 22
Viewing on quad screens ............................. 23
Viewing on multi 9 or multi 16 screens ........ 24
Enlarging video ............................................ 24
Automatic camera selection ......................... 25
Viewing on monitor 2 ................................... 26
Alarm log search .......................................... 36
Alarm search ................................................ 37
Alarm thumbnail search ............................... 40
Time/date search ......................................... 42
Searching within the archive area ................ 44
Motion detection search ............................... 45
3 RECORDING ............................................... 29
6 SAVING (COPYING)
RECORDED VIDEO .................................... 49
Normal recording ......................................... 29
Timer recording ............................................ 29
Alarm recording ............................................ 30
Pre-alarm recording ..................................... 30
English
Copying video to the hard disk’s
archive area ................................................. 50
Copying to a CompactFlash card or
Microdrive ..................................................... 51
Copying to a CD-R/RW or DVD+R/+RW ..... 54
Viewing images on a PC .............................. 57
3
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
SETTINGS
3 GENERAL SET .......................................... 106
MENU CONFIGURATION AND
OPERATIONS .................................................. 58
1 INITIAL SET ................................................ 61
Configuration ................................................ 61
Setting the language .................................... 62
Setting the time ............................................ 62
Setting the summer time .............................. 62
External clock setting ................................... 63
Detecting connected cameras ..................... 64
Setting camera titles .................................... 65
Setting holidays ............................................ 66
Setting time periods ..................................... 67
OPERATION
Configuration .............................................. 106
Setting data display .................................... 107
Setting display for video loss ...................... 108
Setting the buzzer ...................................... 109
Setting the security lock ............................. 110
Setting RS-232C and RS-485 .................... 115
Hard disk initialization and mirroring .......... 117
Expanding (Replacing) and
initializing the hard disk .............................. 119
Network settings ......................................... 120
Making network control settings ................. 123
Basic menu operations ................................ 58
Resetting menu items .................................. 59
Sub-menu configuration ............................... 60
4 SCREEN SET ............................................ 126
SETTINGS
Setting quad and multi 9/16 display ........... 126
Setting the interval and monitors
for automatic screen selection ................... 128
Setting masks ............................................. 130
Setting the color level ................................. 132
2 RECORD SET ............................................. 71
Configuration ................................................ 71
Normal recording easy setup ....................... 72
Displaying the recording areas .................... 77
Changing recording areas ............................ 78
Setting overwrite permission ........................ 79
Setting recording conditions ......................... 80
Setting auto deleting .................................... 82
Setting normal recording .............................. 83
Setting program recording ........................... 85
Timer settings .............................................. 87
Setting alarm recording ................................ 93
Setting the motion sensors .......................... 99
Setting alarm operation and display ........... 102
Canceling an alarm .................................... 105
5 POWER LOSS/USED TIME ...................... 133
7 COPY MENU SETTINGS .......................... 135
Saving menu settings ................................. 135
Loading menu settings ............................... 136
NETWORK
CONTROL
6 INITIALIZATION LOG ............................... 134
8 ADVANCED MENU SET ........................... 138
3 OPERATION PANEL FUNCTIONS AND
RESTRICTIONS ........................................ 159
1 GETTING PREPARED .............................. 153
Operations possible with PC control .......... 153
Digital video recorder network settings ...... 153
NETWORK
SETTINGS
NETWORK CONTROL
NETWORK
OPERATION
Configuration .............................................. 138
Setting ROI ................................................. 139
Setting alarm notification ............................ 144
Camera control settings ............................. 145
Making PPP settings .................................. 147
Time zone/NTP setting ............................... 149
Operation panel .......................................... 159
Camera operation panel ............................. 160
2 NETWORK CONTROL .............................. 156
OTHER
Controlling from a PC ................................. 156
Disconnecting ............................................ 157
Messages displayed when connected ....... 157
4
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 5 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
CONTENTS
NETWORK OPERATION
1 RECORDING IMAGES .............................. 162
3 SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO ... 169
Normal recording ....................................... 162
Timer recording .......................................... 162
Alarm recording .......................................... 162
Pre-alarm recording ................................... 162
Basic operation .......................................... 169
Search menu .............................................. 169
1. ALARM LOG SEARCH .......................... 170
2. ALARM SEARCH ................................... 171
3. ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH ............. 171
4. TIME/DATE SEARCH ............................ 172
5. ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH .................... 172
6. MOTION DETECTION SEARCH ........... 173
2 WATCHING IMAGES ................................ 163
The various ways of displaying
live images ................................................. 163
Performing operations in play mode .......... 164
Adjusting the image and audio ................... 165
Screen display items .................................. 166
Downloading live images to a PC .............. 167
4 SAVING (COPYING)
RECORDED VIDEO .................................. 174
Copying to the archive area ....................... 174
Downloading to a PC ................................. 175
NETWORK SETTINGS
1 SETTINGS ................................................. 177
5 SCREEN SET ............................................ 196
Making menu selections ............................ 177
Menu structure ........................................... 178
1. SEQUENCE SET ................................... 196
2. MASK SET ............................................. 197
2 INITIAL SET .............................................. 179
6 POWER LOSS/USED TIME ...................... 198
1. CLOCK SET ........................................... 179
2. SUMMER TIME SET/EXT.
CLOCK SET ........................................... 179
3. HOLIDAY SET ....................................... 180
1. POWER LOSS/USED TIME .................. 198
7 INITIALIZATION LOG ............................... 199
INITIALIZATION LOG ................................ 199
3 RECORD SET ........................................... 181
8 COPY MENU SETTINGS .......................... 200
1. RECORDING AREA SET ...................... 181
2. RECORDING CONDITIONS SET ......... 182
3. NORMAL REC MODE SET ................... 183
4. PROGRAM REC SET ............................ 184
5. TIMER SET ............................................ 185
6. ALARM REC MODE SET ...................... 186
SAVING MENU SETTINGS ....................... 200
LOADING MENU SETTINGS .................... 200
9 ADVANCED MENU SET ........................... 201
1. ALARM NOTICE SET ............................ 201
2. CAMERA CONTROL SET ..................... 202
3. PPP SET ................................................ 202
4. NTP SET ................................................ 203
4 GENERAL SET ......................................... 189
1. DISPLAY SET ........................................ 189
2. BUZZER SET ......................................... 189
3. SECURITY LOCK SET .......................... 190
4. USER ID SET ........................................ 191
5. RS-232C/RS-485 SET ........................... 192
6. HDD SET ............................................... 192
7. NETWORK SET ..................................... 193
8. NETWORK CONTROL SET .................. 194
English
5
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
CONTENTS
3 Specifications ........................................... 213
Operating environment .............................. 205
Installing DVR Viewer2 .............................. 205
Opening and closing DVR Viewer2 ............ 206
Menu structure ........................................... 207
Opening files .............................................. 207
Viewing images .......................................... 208
Printing images .......................................... 210
Specifications ............................................. 213
Dimensions ................................................ 214
UL disclaimer statement ............................. 214
Table of recording rates and times ............. 215
Table of recording rate settings .................. 217
Table of pre-alarm recording times ............ 218
Terminal board specifications .................... 219
2 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS ............... 211
4 MENU SETTING SEQUENCE ................... 221
RS-485 specifications ................................ 211
RS-232C specifications .............................. 211
DVR/VCR command table ......................... 212
OPERATION
1 DVR VIEWER2 .......................................... 205
INTRODUCTION
OTHER
INDEX .............................................................. 224
SETTINGS
NETWORK
CONTROL
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
6
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 7 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
BEFORE USE
Notes on handling the internal HDD
Notes on installation locations
This digital video recorder uses an internal HDD.
Be sure to observe the following points carefully when
operating, setting-up, or servicing the digital video recorder.
Avoid subjecting the HDD to sudden impact or vibration. In
addition, avoid using it in dusty locations or near magnetic
objects. The following precautions should be observed in
order to prevent the loss of recorded data:
z Do not subject the digital video recorder to sudden impact.
z Do not use the digital video recorder on a vibrating or
unstable surface.
z Do not disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet
during recording or playback.
z Do not use the digital video recorder in areas with extreme
temperature changes (i.e., 10ºC or more per hour).
z Condensation may occur if the digital video recorder is
moved to an area with a significantly different temperature
or high humidity. If the digital video recorder is used with
condensation inside, operating problems may occur.
z Do not install the digital video recorder inside motor
vehicles, trains, or other areas with constant vibration.
z The digital video recorder has ventilation holes on its left,
rear, and bottom panels. Ensure that these holes are not
blocked after installation.
z Do not use the digital video recorder in a bookshelf, box, or
any other area with poor ventilation.
z This digital video recorder is designed for use in a
horizontal orientation, and vertical setup may result in
malfunction.
z When installing the digital video recorder in a rack, ensure
that a gap of at least 5 cm at the back and sides and 1 cm
at the top and bottom is provided.
„ Do not subject the digital video recorder to
sudden impact or vibration.
If the digital video recorder is subjected to sudden impact or
vibration, it may damage the hard disk or cause corruption of
the data stored within it.
z Do not move the digital video recorder while the power is
turned on. Always ensure that the power is turned off
before removing the digital video recorder from or placing it
in a rack.
z When transporting the digital video recorder, pack it
securely using the specified materials. In addition, choose
a method of transportation that minimizes vibration.
z When placing the digital video recorder on the floor or
another similar surface, attach the specified pads to its
base and place it down gently.
„ Do not move the digital video recorder for 30
seconds after turning off the power.
After the power is turned off, the disk inside the HDD
continues to spin for a brief period due to inertia and the
heads are in an unstable condition.
During this period, the digital video recorder is even more
susceptible to damage from sudden impact and vibration than
when it is turned on. Make sure that the digital video recorder
is not subjected to even gentle vibration for at least 30
seconds after turning off the power.
The HDD and cooling fan are consumable
components.
„ Do not operate the digital video recorder when
condensation has formed on it.
If used in an ambient temperature of 25ºC, the HDD should
generally be replaced after two years, and the cooling fan
after three years. These figures are intended as a general
guideline only and should not be taken as a guarantee of
component performance.
The ERROR indicator flashes if a problem occurs with the
HDD or fan. (JP.17)
If the digital video recorder is operated in this type of
condition, there is a possibility that it may become
permanently damaged.
If the temperature around the digital video recorder changes
suddenly, wait for it to stabilize before operating the digital
video recorder.
„ Notes on replacing the HDD
Important recordings
Be sure to follow the correct procedure when replacing the
HDD.
z HDDs that have been removed from their packing may not
operate correctly if they are subjected to sudden impact or
vibration. It is recommended that you place the HDD on a
soft, level surface with the printed circuit board facing
upward after it has been unpacked.
z Take care to avoid subjecting the HDD to sudden impact or
vibration when removing and tightening screws as part of
the HDD replacement procedure.
Tighten all screws securely to ensure that they do not
loosen.
z The HDD is sensitive to static electricity; accordingly, you
should take the appropriate precautions to prevent the
buildup of static charges.
z Always perform test recording in advance to confirm
whether the playback of the digital video recorder is
normal.
z Note that Sanyo accepts no responsibility for losses
occurring as a result of recording or playback problems
caused by malfunction of this digital video recorder or any
connected devices.
z As a precaution against malfunction or accidents, it is
advisable to periodically back up important recordings or to
perform mirroring.
Protection of the HDD
The HDD is checked automatically when the power is turned
on. If an abnormality is detected, the ERROR indicator begins
to flash. To initialize the HDD or to save images stored on it,
contact the dealer from whom this digital video recorder was
purchased.
„ Handling a detached HDD unit
If transporting or storing the HDD unit in a detached condition,
be sure to first of all pack it using the specified materials.
In addition, choose a method of transportation that minimizes
vibration.
English
7
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 8 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
BEFORE USE
Backup battery
INTRODUCTION
The digital video recorder comes with a built-in lithium battery.
If power is supplied continuously for at least 48 hours after
setting the date and time, the clock continues to operate
normally for up to 30 days without a supply of power.
When disposing of this digital video recorder, contact the
dealer from whom it was purchased for information on how to
dispose of the lithium battery.
OPERATION
SETTINGS
NETWORK
CONTROL
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
8
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 9 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
DSR-5016P
1
2
3
4
5
12
13
11
16
19
MENU
17 18
20
21
EXIT/OSD
28
SHUTTLE
PLAY/STOP
C
POWER
6
FULL
AUDIO
1
ERROR
2
LOCK
4
3
5
ALARM
6
7
FUNC.
8
QUAD
MULTI
PRESET
MON 2
AUTO PAN
PLUS
SEQUENCE
TOUR
MENU
ENTER
AF
ZOOM
SEARCH
STILL
AR
LE
JOG
EN
T
29
ER
CARD
IRIS
OUT
7
VIDEO
9
10
12
11
13
14
15
16
AUDIO
SEQUENCE
COPY SHUTTLE HOLD
REC/STOP
TIMER
FOCUS
USB
ALARM
MENU
RESET
EJECT
ZOOM/I/FO
8
9
10
14
Front panel
15
22
25
23
26
PAN
30
27 24
9. [CAMERA SELECT] buttons and indicators
When one or more cameras have been connected to the
VIDEO IN terminals on the digital video recorder’s rear panel
and the appropriate [CAMERA SELECT] button is pressed,
the corresponding indicator lights up and the video feed from
that camera is displayed on-screen.
z During quad, multi 9, or multi 16 screen display:
The indicators corresponding to the cameras being
displayed on the monitor light up.
z During video loss:
The indicator starts to flash.
z If an alarm occurs:
The indicator for the corresponding camera starts to flash.
1. POWER indicator
Lights up when the power is on.
2. FULL indicator (JP.81)
Flashes when the amount of available memory in the hard
disk’s recording area drops to the percentage specified using
menu settings.
In addition, recording stops automatically when no more
memory is available, and the FULL indicator switches to a
permanently lit condition.
The indicator can then be turned off by performing “AREA
FULL RESET”.
10. [AUDIO] button
Audio input channels connected to the rear panel AUDIO IN
terminal can be switched.
Each time this button is pressed, the channel changes in the
following order: 1+2, OFF, 1, 2.
3. ERROR indicator (JP.17)
This indicator flashes if the HDD or fan begins to malfunction.
4. LOCK indicator (JP.113)
Lights up when operations have been locked.
The LOCK indicator turns off when the lock condition is
cancelled.
11. [FUNC.] button
Activates dome camera operation mode. The operation of
other buttons changes. (JP.145) Use also for advanced
menu functions.
5. ALARM indicator
Flashes during alarm recording.
The ALARM indicator lights up during pre-alarm recording.
12. [QUAD] button and indicator (JP.23)
Displays video in quad screens. The indicator lights up while
in quad screen display.
The indicator turns off when using a different screen display
mode.
6. AUDIO OUT (RCA) terminal
Connect this terminal and VIDEO OUT terminal to a
commercially-available VCR or DVD recorder to enable
copying of recorded audio and video. (Same as the audio
output terminal on the rear panel)
13. [MULTI] button and indicator (JP.24)
Displays video in multi 9 or multi 16 screen display.
The indicator lights up while in multi 9 or multi 16 screen
display.
The indicator turns off when using a different screen display
mode.
The DSR-5009P can only display video in nine screens.
7. VIDEO OUT (RCA) terminal
Connects to a commercially-available VCR or DVD recorder
to enable copying of recorded video. (Same as the MAIN
MONITOR output terminal on the rear panel)
8. USB terminal (JP.54)
Connects to a recordable CD or DVD drive.
For compatibility, refer to the SANYO homepage.
http://www.sanyosecurity.com/
The rear panel and front panel USB terminals cannot be
connected to simultaneously.
14. [MON2] button and indicator (JP.26)
If the [MON2] button is pressed while a monitor is connected
to the MON2 output terminal on the rear panel, it is possible to
change the monitor 2 video. The [CAMERA SELECT],
[SEQUENCE], [QUAD], [MULTI] and [PLUS] buttons can be
used. The indicator lights up when this mode is selected.
15. [PLUS] button (JP.24)
Changes the video from a single camera to quad screen size
during multi 9, multi 16, full screen or quad screen display.
For DSR-5009P, this operation is available when in multi 9,
quad and full screen display.
English
9
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 10 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
1
2
3
4
5
12
13
11
19
16
MENU
17 18
20
21
EXIT/OSD
28
SHUTTLE
PLAY/STOP
C
POWER
AUDIO
1
ERROR
2
LOCK
4
3
5
ALARM
6
7
FUNC.
8
9
QUAD
MULTI
AUDIO
PRESET
MON 2
AUTO PAN
PLUS
SEQUENCE
TOUR
MENU
ENTER
AF
ZOOM
SEARCH
STILL
AR
LE
JOG
EN
T
29
ER
CARD
OPERATION
6
FULL
INTRODUCTION
DSR-5009P
IRIS
OUT
7
VIDEO
SEQUENCE
COPY SHUTTLE HOLD
REC/STOP
TIMER
FOCUS
USB
ALARM
MENU
RESET
EJECT
ZOOM/I/FO
8
9
10
14
15
22
25
23
26
PAN
30
27 24
17. [EXIT/OSD] button and indicator
z EXIT:
Exits the main menu or a sub-menu. When a menu is
displayed, the indicator turns off.
z OSD:
Each time the [OSD] button is pressed while the digital video
recorder is recording, playing, or stopped, the operation
display area changes position between the top and bottom of
the screen or becomes hidden; furthermore, the indicator
lights up whenever this information is being displayed.
25. [REC/STOP] button and indicator (JP.29)
Starts normal recording, and the indicator lights up during this
process.
Press this button for at least three seconds to stop recording
and turn off the indicator.
26. [TIMER] button and indicator (JP.29)
If the [TIMER] button is pressed while the recording is
stopped, timer recording standby mode is selected and
recording starts automatically at the set time. The indicator
lights up while in timer recording standby mode.
If the button is pressed during timer recording, this process is
stopped and the indicator turns off. Furthermore, if the
[TIMER] button is pressed when in timer recording standby
mode, timer recording is cancelled.
18. [PLAY/STOP] button and indicator (JP.31)
When the [PLAY/STOP] button is pressed, the video from the
recording area is played and the indicator lights up. When
pressed during playback, this button stops the digital video
recorder.
21. [STILL] button and indicator (JP.33)
When the [STILL] button is pressed during playback, the
current frame is displayed as a still image and the indicator
lights up. Press this button again to cancel.
29. CompactFlash card slot (JP.51)
This slot is used to house a CompactFlash card or Microdrive.
22. [SEQUENCE] button and indicator (JP.25)
Automatically switches the camera video during monitoring.
When this button is pressed, the indicator begins flashing and
the display is changed automatically. The [CAMERA
SELECT] button indicator lights in accordance with screen
changes.
30. [MENU RESET] button (JP.59)
Restores displayed menus to default menu settings.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
28. Jog dial (inside) and shuttle dial (outside)
z During playback:
Use the jog dial to change the playback speed.
Use the shuttle dial to perform fast-forward or fast-reverse
playback.
z During menu display:
Use the jog dial to move the cursor and to change setting
values. Use the shuttle dial to confirm settings.
20. [SEARCH] button and indicator (JP.36)
When the [SEARCH] button is pressed while the digital video
recorder is recording or stopped, the search menu is
displayed and the indicator lights up. Press this button again
to close the search menu.
NETWORK
OPERATION
27. [ALARM] button (JP.40)
When an [ALARM] button is pressed during playback or still,
the digital video recorder skips to the next earlier or next later
alarm.
19. [ZOOM] button and indicator (JP.32)
When the [ZOOM] button is pressed during playback or
monitoring of camera video on a full screen, a portion of the
playback video is magnified and the indicator lights.
NETWORK
CONTROL
24. [SHUTTLE HOLD] button and indicator (JP.31)
Locks shuttle dial operation for a constant speed during
playback or slow playback.
The indicator lights up while the shuttle dial is locked.
SETTINGS
16. [MENU] button and indicator
Displays the menu screens (i.e., setting screens), and the
indicator lights up while any of these screens is being
displayed.
OTHER
23. [COPY] button and indicator (JP.50)
Copies recorded video to the HDD’s archive area,
CompactFlash card, Microdrive, CD-R/RW, or DVD+R/+RW.
The indicator lights up during the copy process.
10
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 11 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
DSR-5016P
The number of terminals for the DSR-5009P may differ. For more details, see below.
1
4
5
MAIN
MON2
6
S-VIDEO
SCSI
7
8
1-AUDIO-2
IN
9
10
AUDIO OUT
MIC IN
AC IN
ALARM IN
MONITOR OUT
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12 21
11
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IN
22
3
USB
ALL
RESET
1
2
3
LAN
4
15
16
17
18
2ND
RS-485/422 REMOTE
A B C R1 R2
C
19
CONTROL
13
20
11. ALARM IN terminals (1 to 16)
Connects to an externally installed alarm switch. Operate the
alarm switch for alarm recording.
The DSR-5009P has nine terminals.
1. SCSI terminal (option board)
Used to add a RAID unit by SCSI connection. Cannot be used
together with an expansion unit. Only a RAID unit can be
used.
Please contact the dealer for details.
When handling and connecting, be sure to read the instruction
manual included with the option board.
Pin
2. VIDEO IN terminals
Connects to video cameras.
The DSR-5009P has nine terminals.
3. VIDEO OUT terminals
Connects to a monitor to view camera images.
The DSR-5009P has nine terminals.
4. MAIN MONITOR output terminal
Connects to the main monitor.
5. MON2 output terminal (digital output)
Connects to monitor 2.
6. S-VIDEO output terminal
Connects to a high-quality device.
The same image is output to the main monitor.
7. AUDIO1 IN terminal
Used to connect to an audio amplifier. A microphone or
wireless device can then be connected to the amplifier. Use
with AUDIO2 IN terminal to record and play back audio from
two locations.
8. AUDIO2 IN terminal
Connects to an audio amplifier in the same manner as
AUDIO1 IN terminal.
AUDIO OUT terminal
10. MIC IN terminal
Connects to a microphone.
The MIC IN terminal is given priority over the AUDIO1/2 IN
terminal.
English
SENSOR
ALARM OUT
DO NOT CONNECT TO PHONE LINE
Rear panel
9.
RS-232C
EXCEPT SANYO SSP
EXTERNAL STRAGE UNIT
14
RS-485
A SANYO SSP B
RS-485
TERMINATE
OFF ON
L
FUL
HIVE
ARC FULL
OUT
NING
WAR OUT
REC
NON RESET
RM
ALA OUT
RM
ALA ER IN
TIM
EXT K OUT
C
CLO CK IN
CLO
OUT
11
Signal
C
Ground
ALARM IN 1
Alarm input No. 1
ALARM IN 2
Alarm input No. 2
ALARM IN 3
Alarm input No. 3
ALARM IN 4
Alarm input No. 4
ALARM IN 5
Alarm input No. 5
ALARM IN 6
Alarm input No. 6
ALARM IN 7
Alarm input No. 7
ALARM IN 8
Alarm input No. 8
ALARM IN 9
Alarm input No. 9
ALARM IN 10
Alarm input No. 10
ALARM IN 11
Alarm input No. 11
ALARM IN 12
Alarm input No. 12
ALARM IN 13
Alarm input No. 13
ALARM IN 14
Alarm input No. 14
ALARM IN 15
Alarm input No. 15
ALARM IN 16
Alarm input No. 16
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 12 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
12. SENSOR ALARM OUT terminals
The terminals are used when motion sensors have been set
(JP.99) to output an alarm signal to a connected device upon
detection of motion.
The DSR-5009P has nine terminals.
Pin
Signal
INTRODUCTION
Pin
13. Control terminals
Signal
2ND RS485/422 A
Control terminal (A)
2ND RS485/422 B
Control terminal (B)
C
Ground
Ground
REMOTE R1
Remote input 1
SENSOR ALARM OUT 1
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 1
REMOTE R2
Remote input 2
CLOCK IN
Clock adjust input terminal
SENSOR ALARM OUT 2
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 2
CLOCK OUT
Clock adjust output terminal
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 3
EXT TIMER IN
External timer input terminal
SENSOR ALARM OUT 3
ALARM OUT
Alarm output terminal
Cancels alarm
OPERATION
C
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 4
NON REC OUT
Non-recording output
SENSOR ALARM OUT 5
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 5
WARNING OUT
HDD or FAN error warning output
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 6
FULL
SENSOR ALARM OUT 6
Capacity warning output for
recording area
ARCHIVE FULL
SENSOR ALARM OUT 7
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 7
Capacity warning output for archive
area
C
Ground
SENSOR ALARM OUT 8
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 8
SENSOR ALARM OUT 9
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 9
SENSOR ALARM OUT 10
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 10
SENSOR ALARM OUT 11
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 11
SENSOR ALARM OUT 12
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 12
SETTINGS
SENSOR ALARM OUT 4
ALARM RESET
14. [ALL RESET] button
When the [ALL RESET] button is pressed, the digital video
recorder is reset and the time is returned to its default setting.
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 14
SENSOR ALARM OUT 15
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 15
17. LAN terminal (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
Connect to switching hubs, routers and PCs.
SENSOR ALARM OUT 16
Output of an alarm signal for
Camera No. 16
18. RS-485 termination switch
Used when connecting multiple devices from the RS-485
control connectors.
NETWORK
OPERATION
SENSOR ALARM OUT 14
16. USB terminal
Connects to a recordable CD or DVD drive. For compatibility,
refer to the SANYO homepage.
http://www.sanyosecurity.com/
The rear panel and front panel USB terminals cannot be
connected to simultaneously.
Output of an alarm signal for
SENSOR ALARM OUT 13
Camera No. 13
NETWORK
CONTROL
15. Expansion unit connection terminal
Used to expand the hard disk. Cannot be used together with
RAID unit.
Please contact the dealer for details. When handling and
connecting, be sure to read the instruction manual included
wtih the external storage unit.
19. RS-485 control connectors (A) (B)
Connects to a system controller or dome cameras.
21. AC power socket (AC IN)
Insert the supplied power cord securely into this socket.
22. Power cord holder
Secure the power card to the holder using the power cord tie
(accessory) as shown in the illustration.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
20. RS-232C terminal
Connects to a modem.
OTHER
12
English
e05_l8hbd_xe_7.fm Page 13 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 12:12 PM
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
This section describes how to connect the digital video recorder to video cameras and other devices. Be sure to read the instruction
manuals for each connected device.
z Improper connections may result in malfunction or smoke emission.
z A separate power supply is required for operation of each camera.
z Manage power for all expansion units with a single power source. Otherwise, data may be lost.
Basic connections
DSR-5016P
Only nine cameras can be connected to the DSR-5009P.
The following diagram shows the connections for cameras, monitors, a microphone, a PC and a system controller.
Cameras
(sold separately)
1 - 16
Monitor
Monitor 2
(sold separately) (sold separately)
01
02
03
04
* If monitor 2 is not synchronized
with the connected cameras,
vertical picture instability may
occur upon the switching of
camera video.
Video input
terminal
Video input
terminal
*3
*4
MAIN
MON2
S-VIDEO
SCSI
1-AUDIO-2
IN
AUDIO OUT
MIC IN
AC IN
ALARM IN
MONITOR OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Microphone
(commerciallyavailable)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IN
USB
ALL
RESET
1
2
3
4
LAN
RS-485
TERMINATE
OFF ON
RS-485
A SANYO SSP B
RS-232C
2ND
RS-485/422 REMOTE
L
FUL
HIVE
ARC FULL
OUT
NING
WAR OUT
REC
NON RESET
RM
ALA OUT
RM
ALA ER IN
TIM
EXT K OUT
C
CLO CK IN
CLO
OUT
SENSOR
ALARM OUT
A B C R1 R2
C
EXCEPT SANYO SSP
DO NOT CONNECT TO PHONE LINE
EXTERNAL STRAGE UNIT
The RS-485 connector is
connected to A or B according to
the type of cable.
*1
*2
1-4
PC
(commercially-available)
HDD expansion unit
(sold separately)
*1
*2
*3
*4
120 V – 240 V AC
(50/60 Hz)
System controller
(sold separately)
Wrap the LAN cable once around the core clamp (large) before attaching it.
Wrap the RS-485 cable twice around the core clamp (small) before attaching it.
Wrap the Main Monitor output cable once around the core clamp (large) before attaching it.
Wrap the S-VIDEO output cable once around the core clamp (small) before attaching it.
Pin
number
Connecting the RS-232C terminal
The RS-232C terminal is used to connect to a PC or a phone
line for use with a modem. Perform the settings in the <RS232C/RS-485 SET> screen. (JP.115)
RS-232C Pin locations
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
Pin
number
English
CONTROL
Signal
Operation
Signal direction
1
DCD
Carrier Detect
From PC to digital video
recorder
2
RXD
Receive Data
From PC to digital video
recorder
13
Signal
Operation
Signal direction
3
TXD
Transmit Data
From digital video
recorder to PC
4
DTR
–
From digital video
recorder to PC
5
GND
Ground
–
6
DSR
–
From PC to digital video
recorder
7
RTS
Request to
Send
From digital video
recorder to PC
8
CTS
Clear to Send
From PC to digital video
recorder
9
RI
Ring Indicator
From PC to digital video
recorder
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 14 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
RJ-11 Pin locations
INTRODUCTION
PPP (dial-up) connection
Make the following connections to use a phone line to connect
to an Internet service provider.
1
6
RS-232C
OPERATION
Serial cable
z Do not connect to phone line.
Modem
Internet
Connector A signal
Connector B signal
1
Not used
Not used
2
Not used
Not used
3
A
B
4
B
A
5
Not used
Not used
6
Not used
Not used
SETTINGS
Connecting RS-485 control terminals
Pin
number
A: Non-inverting driver output/receiver input
B: lnverting driver output/receiver input
A system controller or another DVR can be connected to the
RS-485 control terminal. Perform settings in the <RS-232C/
RS-485 SET> screen (JP.115) when connecting system
controller.
Connection
\
System controller
RS-485
A SANYO SSP B
-485
INATE
ON
R
1
2
To other
connector A
OUT
To other
connector A
Straight type cable
Crossed type cable
Straight type:
Not used
Not used
Not used
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
1
2
3
4
5
6
OTHER
z Connect as shown above and set to full screen in the
<CAMERA CONTROL SET> screen to control camera with
the digital video recorder.
z Control a camera by directly entering the camera address
with the system controller regardless of the <CAMERA
CONTROL SET> screen settings when the cameras and
the system controller are connected as shown above.
Not used
Crossed type:
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Cable types
1
2
3
4
5
6
NETWORK
OPERATION
DO NOT CONNECT TO PHONE LINE
IN
NETWORK
CONTROL
The digital video recorder supports both straight type and
crossed type connection cables.
When using a straight type connection cable, connect the RS485 connector pin A to the pin A socket, or pin B to the pin B
socket.
When using a crossed type connection cable, connect the RS485 connector pin A to the pin B socket, or pin B to the pin A
socket.
Control a connected SANYO camera with an RS-485 control
terminal using a system controller or the digital video recorder
itself. To control a camera equipped with an RS-485 control
terminal, perform settings in the <CAMERA CONTROL SET>
screen (JP.145).
z Perform settings in the <RS-232C/RS-485 SET> screen
when a system controller is connected (JP.115).
14
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 15 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Connecting to a 2ND RS485/422
terminal
RS-485 termination switch settings
When connecting multiple devices, it is necessary to make
termination settings on both end devices.
z Set the RS-485 termination switch of both end devices to
ON.
z Be sure to set the RS-485 termination switches of all
devices in between (devices other than the first and last
devices) to OFF.
Connect camera to the 2ND RS485/422 terminal with a
twisted-pair cable and perform settings in the <CAMERA
CONTROL SET> screen (JP.145) to control the camera with
the connected system controller or with the digital video
recorder.
System controller
z If the termination settings are not correctly made, the
incorrect data is transmitted to each device.
Example:
System controller
1
2
IN
OUT
ON
OFF
Termination
switch
Other companies’ cameras
z Connect as shown above and set to full screen in the
<CAMERA CONTROL SET> screen to control camera with
the digital video recorder.
z If connected as shown above, settings must be made in
<CAMERA CONTROL SET> screen.
z Connect other companies’ cameras to the 2ND RS-485/
422 terminals.
RS-485
TERMINATE
OFF
ON
Digital video recorder
RS-485
TERMINATE
OFF ON
RS485
Termination
switch
Operation
1
Connect as above.
Connect SSP dome cameras to VIDEO IN 1 and 2.
2
Time Lapse VCR
ON
Termination
switch
3
OFF
English
15
Set the camera numbers and protocols
in the <CAMERA CONTROL SET>
screen. (JP.145)
Operate the dome cameras with the
front panel buttons. (JP.147)
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 16 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Connecting an amplifier
Connect to a PC for control of the digital video recorder over a
network with a switch or connect to the Internet.
INTRODUCTION
Connecting a LAN terminal
Connect an amplifier to use a microphone or external
speakers with the digital video recorder. AUDIO 1 IN terminal
and AUDIO 2 IN terminal can be used together to record and
play back audio from two locations.
LAN connection
To enable control of the digital video recorder over a network,
connect to the switch via Ethernet cable or make a similar
connection.
Use a straight type Ethernet cable.
Audio
output terminal
PC
OPERATION
Audio input
terminal
Amplifier
(sold separately)
LAN
1-AUDIO-2
IN
AUDIO OUT
Ethernet cable
(straight type cable)
SETTINGS
Switch
Internet connection
z The input audio channel connected to the AUDIO IN
terminal on the rear panel can be switched with the
[AUDIO] button. Each time this button is pressed, the
channel changes in the following order: 1+2, OFF, 1, 2.
Connecting alarm input terminals
LAN
When using external alarms (i.e., intruder sensors), connect
external switches to the ALARM IN terminals.
Internet
Ethernet cable
(straight type cable)
Router, ADSL
modem, etc.
Connect external
switches to ALARM IN
terminals.
1
NETWORK
OPERATION
16
NETWORK
CONTROL
Connect to the Internet via a router or similar device.
When connecting to a router, use a straight type Ethernet
cable.
To connect to an ADSL modem and other devices, be sure to
read the instruction manuals for each connected device.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
*
16
English
OTHER
Only terminals 1 to 9 are available on the DSR-5009P.
* Wrap the Alarm input cable and the Sensor alarm output
cable once around the core clamp (large) before attaching it.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 17 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Connecting SENSOR ALARM OUT
terminals
Connecting the power cord
1
The SENSOR ALARM OUT terminals are used to relay alarm
signals whenever one of the digital video recorder’s motion
sensors is triggered. Normally in an open condition, a terminal
adopts a low condition when a sensor for the corresponding
camera number has been triggered.
1K
After all other connections are made,
make sure the voltage is 120 V-240 V AC
and then insert the power plug into the
wall outlet.
There is no power switch. The display indicators flash, and
after a few moments, the monitor screen displays the camera
video.
Rated value of terminals
z Maximum current: 25 mA
z Maximum voltage: 25 V
120 V-240 V AC
(50/60 Hz)
*
Connecting control terminals
The connections for a remote control circuit are shown below.
This digital video recorder can be remotely controlled when a
remote-control circuit similar to that shown here is connected
to the remote-input control terminals.
* Attach the core clamp
(large) to the power cord.
z When turning the power on for the first time
“PLEASE SET THE CLOCK” is displayed on the monitor
screen. Set the clock. (JP.20)
z If the clock is already set
The operation display area is displayed.
REMOTE
C R1 R2
Operation
display area
01-01-05 00:00:00
EN A
0
02
R1
R2
(When operated (When combined
independently) with R2 FUNC key)
SW 1 :Camera 1:INDEX+
SW 17 :REC/STOP
SW 2 :Camera 2:INDEX-
SW 18 :PLAY/STOP
SW 3 :Camera 3:AUTO FOCUS
SW 19 :STILL
SW 4 :Camera 4 :Automatic selection display
SW 20 :SEARCH
SW 5 :Camera 5:Monitor2
SW 21 :SHIFT (Doubles with R1)
SW 6 :Camera 6:Plus display
SW 22 :PLAY
SW 7 :Camera 7:QUAD
SW 23 :REC
SW 8 :Camera 8:MULTI
SW 24 :MENU
SW 9 :Camera 9:MENU RESET
SW 25 :MENU EXIT(EXIT)
SW 10 :Camera 10:Not used
SW 26 : +
SW 11 :Camera 11:PAN left
SW 27 : -
SW 12 :Camera 12:PAN right
SW 28 : +
SW 13 :Camera 13:TILT down
SW 29 : -
SW 14 :Camera 14:TILT up
SW 30 :ZOOM
SW 15 :Camera 15:ZOOM wide
SW 31 :COPY
SW 16 :Camera 16:ZOOM tele
SW 32 :TIMER
z If the ERROR indicator starts flashing
The digital video recorder has a self-diagnostic function to
find malfunctions. If a malfunction occurs while the power
is on, the ERROR indicator flashes in a cycle to indicate
the malfunction.
If the ERROR indicator flashes, contact a Sanyo service
center.
When flashing at 4Hz (Four times per second):
The hard disk is checked automatically when the power is
turned on. The POWER indicator flashing indicates that a
malfunction has been found on the hard disk and the hard
disk must be replaced or initialized. If you need to save
video stored on the disk, contact a Sanyo service center.
When flashing at 1Hz (Once per second):
A fan malfunction has occurred.
z The power cord’s ground terminal is not provided for
enhanced safety; rather, it is used to reduce the level of
interference when the digital video recorder is connected to
analog devices.
If a large amount of noise is generated when the digital
video recorder is connected to analog devices, connect
this terminal to the building earth ground.
z Use a resistance of 1/10 ohms or more and with a D
ranking (Precision within ±0.5%).
z The remote control cable should be no more than 5 m long.
* The DSR-5009P can operate up to nine cameras.
English
17
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 18 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
PREPARING FOR USE
When the power is turned on, the operation display is shown
at the top of the monitor screen. This area indicates the date,
time, picture quality and other information needed for
operation.
Operation
display area
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
0
01-01-05 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000000
(3)
(4)
(5)(6)
NO
Normal
Enhanced
FI
Fine
SF
Super Fine
(7)
: Fast-forward playback
: Fast-rewind playback
: Slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
z Although operations such as playback, copying and data
transfer are possible while recording, this unit gives priority
to recording, and other operations may be delayed as a
result.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z During simultaneous recording and playback, the display
indicates playback ( ).
NETWORK
OPERATION
z The digital video recorder uses the date and time to
manage recording and playback points. Accordingly, if the
time has not been set correctly, it is not possible to
effectively search for video data.
NETWORK
CONTROL
(8)
* The above is an example display. This is not the default.
(1) Date display (JP.20)
Be sure to specify the correct date using menu settings.
(2) Time display (JP.20)
Make sure to specify the time using menu settings. Recording
is not possible until the time is set.
(3) Operation symbol display
Displays the current operation, such as recording or playback.
SETTINGS
(6) Audio recording display
“A” is displayed when audio is being recorded. “A” is displayed
when audio is being played back if audio is recorded. When
the [AUDIO] button is pressed, the audio channel (OFF/A1/
A2/A12) is displayed.
(7) Alarm display and alarm count display (JP.93)
When an alarm is set using the “ALARM REC MODE SET”
menu item, the following information is displayed.
z When alarm recording is set;
“ALARM” and the alarm number are displayed in stand-by
mode.
“ALARM” flashes during alarm recording.
z When pre-alarm recording is in progress;
“PRE” and the alarm number are displayed in stand-by
mode.
When an alarm occurs, “PRE” disappears and “ALARM”
and the alarm number are displayed.
z When performing playback from the archive area;
“ARCHIV” and the backup number are displayed.
(8) Camera title display
The camera number or camera title is displayed. Also, when
an alarm occurs the camera number and alarm “EA”, “SA”, or
“ES” are displayed.
z When an external alarm signal is activated;
“EA” flashes to the left of the camera number.
z When a motion sensor alarm signal is activated;
“SA” flashes to the left of the camera number.
z When an external alarm signal and motion sensor signal
are activated;
“ES” flashes to the left of the camera number.
01-01-05 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000000
02
REC: Recording
EXT: External timer recording
: Normal playback
: Reverse playback
: Still
Basic
OPERATION
(2)
BA
‹EN
02
(1)
INTRODUCTION
(5) Picture quality display (JP.83, P.94)
Displays the quality of the video that can be recorded on the
hard disk. Set to “EN” (Enhanced) by default setting.
Operation display
(4) Remaining memory in recording area (JP.80)
It is displayed while recording.
Displays the remaining area memory as a percentage when
overwriting in the recording area is not permitted. If
overwriting is permitted, “REPEAT” is displayed.
OTHER
18
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 19 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
PREPARING FOR USE
[MENU] button
[EXIT/OSD] button
Changing the display position of the
operation display area
1
Changing the language
The language displayed on the monitor can be changed.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
Item
EXIT/OSD
LANGUAGE
Each time the [EXIT/OSD] button is pressed, the operation
display moves to a different location or is hidden.
Top (default setting)
Bottom
01-01-05 00:00:00
01
1
EN A1
03
Sets the language to French.
DEUTSCH
Sets the language to German.
ESPAÑOL
Sets the language to Spanish.
Press the [MENU] button.
02
MENU
01-01-05 00:00:00
FRANCAIS
Description
Sets the language to English.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Hidden
Operation
display area
Setting
‹ENGLISH
EN A1
04
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
2
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
<INITIAL SET>
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET
2.CAMERA DETECT
3.TITLE SET
4.HOLIDAY SET
5.TIME PERIOD SET
MOVE:JOG
English
19
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 20 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
3
PREPARING FOR USE
Turn the jog dial to select
“1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Setting the time
(Default setting: 01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00)
Be sure to set the correct date and time as these settings are
used during playback and searching.
The <LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA> screen is
displayed.
Example: Setting 8:30 on 26 October, 2005.
1
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
MENU
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ENGLISH” flashes.
2
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select the language
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
MOVE:JOG
3
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select
“1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA> screen is
displayed.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
NETWORK
OPERATION
<REGL.LANGUE>
FRANCAIS
<REGL.HORLOGE>
01-01-2005 SAM 00:00:00
<HEURE D^ETE>
MODE
:
MARCHE
SEMAINE MOIS HEURE
ON DER-DIM
03
02:00
OFF DER-DIM
10
02:00
<REGL.HORLOGE EXTERNE>
REGL.DE L^HEURE
01:00
NETWORK
CONTROL
<INITIAL SET>
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET
2.CAMERA DETECT
3.TITLE SET
4.HOLIDAY SET
5.TIME PERIOD SET
The language is selected and the cursor moves to the next
item.
6
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SETTINGS
MOVE:JOG
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
5
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
OPERATION
4
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
OTHER
20
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 21 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
4
PREPARING FOR USE
Turn the jog dial to select “01” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Hard disk recording areas
B Archive area
“01” flashes (indicating the day).
20%
20
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA> [KEY]
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
5
80%
A Recording
area
[A] Recording area
Recording
mode
Turn the jog dial to select “26” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The day is set to “26” and the month “01” flashes.
Normal
recording
Manual
When monitoring, recording is
performed by pressing the [REC/
STOP] button.
Timer
recording
Automatic
Recording is carried out in
accordance with timer settings.
Alarm
recording
Recording is carried out when alarm
recording is set to “ENABLED”.
Alarm images are recorded in
Automatic response to either the operation of a
switch connected to an ALARM IN
terminal or to the detection of an
intruder via motion sensors.
Pre-alarm
recording
When pre-alarm recording is set to
“ON”, it is possible to record video
Automatic from before the occurrence of an
alarm based on the corresponding
settings.
26-01-2005 WED 00:00:00
6
Use the same procedure to set the
month (10), year (2005), hour (08) and
minute (30).
When the minutes are set, the cursor moves to the next item.
26-10-2005 WED 08:30:00
[B] Archive area
z The day of the week is set automatically.
z The clock stops during date and time settings.
z The clock starts counting from 00 seconds.
7
Recording
mode
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
Copy
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
Hard disk archive area
Hard disk recorder
external hard disk
capacity display
[A] Recording area
[B] Archive area
English
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
EXTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
Recording method
This area is used to store important
video data copied from the normal
Manual
recording area and/or alarm
or
recording area. Changes can be
Automatic
made to the recording area to
determine the capacity. (1% - 99% )
z If the memory allocations for the hard disk recording areas
are changed after recording, all stored recordings are
deleted and the hard disk is initialized; accordingly, special
care should be taken. (JP.77)
z The total hard disk capacity displayed on the menu screen
may differ from the actual hard disk capacity.
The hard disk contains a recording area and an archive area.
Refer to P.77 for operations.
Hard disk recorder internal
hard disk capacity display
Recording method
1500GB
500GB
1000GB
80 %
20 %
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
21
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 22 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
[MULTI] button
[ZOOM] button
INTRODUCTION
[SEQUENCE] button
Shuttle dial
OPERATION
[PLUS] button
[CAMERA SELECT] button
Jog dial
[MON2] button
[QUAD] button
2
Viewing on a full screen
Example: Selecting Camera 2
z Turn the jog dial to move the zoom frame to the left or right.
SETTINGS
1
Move the zoom frame to the area to be
magnified.
Press the No. 2 [CAMERA SELECT]
button.
The CAMERA SELECT indicator lights up and video from
Camera 2 is displayed on a full screen.
z Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial to
move the zoom frame vertically.
NETWORK
CONTROL
Move the zoom frame to the area to be magnified.
02
Viewing enlarged live images
NETWORK
OPERATION
1
Press the [ZOOM] button during
monitoring of camera video.
Press the button corresponding to the camera for which video
is being magnified.
The ZOOM indicator lights up and a blue zoom frame appears
in the center of the screen.
3
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
ZOOM
NETWORK
SETTINGS
The area enclosed by the zoom frame is magnified (by a
factor of 2).
OTHER
02
22
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 23 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
4
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
Press the [ZOOM] button to return to
normal magnification.
Viewing on quad screens
Images from multiple connected cameras can be displayed
simultaneously.
Magnification is cancelled and the display returns to the
normal screen.
The ZOOM indicator turns off.
1
ZOOM
Press the [QUAD] button.
The QUAD indicator lights up and video from four separate
cameras is displayed simultaneously.
Video from Camera No. 1 through Camera No. 4 is initially
displayed.
QUAD
02
01
02
03
04
z Magnified video has a slightly coarser appearance when
compared with normal video.
2
z Images cannot be enlarged in multi-screen format.
To view video from other cameras,
press the [QUAD] button again.
Each time this button is pressed, the four images on the quad
screen change, in order of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-12 and 1316 (default setting).
On the DSR-5009P, the images change in order of cameras
No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.
QUAD
3
05
06
07
08
To return to full screen display, press a
[CAMERA SELECT] button.
-
On the DSR-5009P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
English
23
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 24 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
1
Enlarging video
INTRODUCTION
Viewing on multi 9 or multi 16 screens
Enlarges the video from a single camera to quad screen size
during multi 9 or multi 16 screen display. (enlarged video)
In addition, video can also be enlarged during full screen and
quad screen displays.
For DSR-5009P, this operation is available when in multi 9,
quad and full screen display.
Press the [MULTI] button.
The MULTI indicator lights up and video from 16 separate
cameras is displayed simultaneously. Press the [MULTI]
button again to display multi 9 screens.
The DSR-5009P can only display video from nine cameras.
Example: Enlarging video during multi 9 screen display
MULTI
02
03
06
02
07
03
08
09 04 10
05
11
1206
13
15
08
16
01
05
04
1
MULTI
14
07
OPERATION
01
Press the [PLUS] button during multi 9
screen display.
The PLUS indicator lights up and the video from one camera
is enlarged.
09
PLUS
2
To return to full screen display, press a
[CAMERA SELECT] button.
2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
03
06
02
07
SETTINGS
z In the case of both quad and multi 9/16 screen display, you
can change the positions in which video from the various
cameras is displayed. (JP.126)
08
09
Press a [CAMERA SELECT] button.
The video from the selected camera is enlarged.
01
On the DSR-5009P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
04
02
07
02
03
05
06
08
09
NETWORK
OPERATION
3
NETWORK
CONTROL
-
Press the [MULTI] button during plus
screen display to change display.
MULTI
03
02
07
08
08
09
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Press the [PLUS] button to return to the
screen from before enlarging video.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
4
04
06
02
07
03
PLUS
OTHER
24
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 25 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
Automatic camera selection
Setting automatic quad-screen selection
1
Setting automatic full screen selection
The camera video on a full screen can be changed
automatically based on the camera number.
1
Press the [QUAD] button.
The QUAD indicator lights up and video from four separate
cameras is displayed simultaneously.
Press the [SEQUENCE] button.
QUAD
The SEQUENCE indicator flashes and the displayed video
changes automatically based on the camera number.
The current camera number indicator lights sequentially.
01-01-05 00:00:00
2
EN A
01
01-01-05 00:00:00
ENA
03
01-01-05 00:00:00
02
03
04
Press the [SEQUENCE] button.
The four images on the quad screen automatically change in
order of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-12 and 13-16.
On the DSR-5009P, the video changes automatically in order
of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.
ENA
02
01-01-05 00:00:00
01
ENA
04
z It is possible to specify the cameras for which automatic
selection is to be carried out. (JP.68)
02
01
2
Press the [SEQUENCE] button to end
automatic selection.
04
03
Automatic selection ends and the display returns to the
normal screen.
z Pressing a [CAMERA SELECT] button, the [QUAD] button,
the [MULTI] button or [PLUS] button also ends automatic
selection.
08
07
12
11
15
3
16
Press the [SEQUENCE] button to return
to normal quad-screen display.
Automatic selection ends and the display returns to the
normal quad-screen.
Even if the [CAMERA SELECT], [QUAD], [MULTI], or [PLUS]
button are pressed, the display returns to quad screens.
z Automatic selection cannot be used with playback video.
English
25
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 26 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
Viewing on monitor 2
2
When a monitor is connected to the MON2 output terminal on
the rear panel of the digital video recorder, this monitor can be
used to view video in quad screen or multi screen format or
automatically scroll through video from all cameras
independent of the display on the main monitor. In addition, it
is also possible to display video on monitor 2 automatically
from any camera for which an alarm has occurred. By default,
automatic full screen selection is performed.
Use the [MON2] button to change the monitor 2 setting.
Press the [QUAD] button.
The video from cameras No. 1 through 4 is displayed in quad
screen on monitor 2.
Monitor 2
01-01-05
OPERATION
z The playback image cannot be viewed on Monitor 2.
1
INTRODUCTION
Viewing on a quad screen
Main monitor
00:00:00
Press the [MON2] button.
03
The MON2 indicator lights up.
01
06
04
07
08
SETTINGS
MON2
09
QUAD
01
02
03
04
3
z Monitor 2 is not available while a menu screen is being
displayed, search menu is being operated or camera is
being controlled.
To view video from another camera,
press the [QUAD] button again.
Example: Selecting Camera 4
QUAD
Press the No. 4 [CAMERA SELECT]
button.
The video from Camera No. 4 is displayed in full screen on
monitor 2.
Monitor 2
01-01-05
Main monitor
06
07
08
To return to full screen display, press a
[CAMERA SELECT] button.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
4
05
NETWORK
OPERATION
Each time this button is pressed, the four images on the quad
screen change, in order of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-12 and 1316.
On the DSR-5009P, the images change in order of cameras
No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.
Viewing on a full screen
2
NETWORK
CONTROL
[MON2] button
00:00:00
-
03
04
07
On the DSR-5009P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
06
08
OTHER
01
09
26
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 27 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
Viewing on multi 9 or multi 16 screens
2
Setting automatic full screen selection
2
Press the [MULTI] button.
The video from the cameras is displayed in multi 9 screens on
monitor 2. Press the [MULTI] button again to display multi 16
screens.
The DSR-5009P can only display video from nine cameras.
Main monitor
Monitor 2
01-01-05
Press the [SEQUENCE] button.
The video displayed on monitor 2 changes automatically.
Press the [SEQUENCE] button once again to cancel
automatic selection.
Even if the [CAMERA SELECT], [QUAD], [MULTI], or [PLUS]
button are pressed, automatic selection is cancelled.
Monitor 2
00:00:00
01-01-05
03
Main monitor
00:00:00
03
01
06
01
04
07
08
04
MULTI
01-01-05
01
02
03
04
05
06
MULTI
07
08
13
14
09
15
16
z In the case of both quad and multi 9/16 screen display, you
can change the positions in which video from the various
cameras is displayed. (JP.126)
On the DSR-5009P, display positions can be changed on
quad and multi 9 screens.
3
To return to full screen display, press a
[CAMERA SELECT] button.
-
On the DSR-5009P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
z Enlarging video can be displayed on monitor 2.
English
06
09
27
00:00:00
07
08
09
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 28 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA
2
Displaying alarm video in full screen format
2
Press the [QUAD] button.
The video from the cameras is displayed in quad screen on
monitor 2.
INTRODUCTION
Setting automatic quad-screen selection
Set “MON.2 DISPLAY” from the
<ALARM OPERATION SET> screen to
“ON”. (JP.103)
When an alarm occurs, the corresponding video is displayed
in full screen on monitor 2.
01-01-05
OPERATION
Main monitor
Monitor 2
01-01-05
00:00:00
03
01
04
3
06
07
08
09
The MON2 indicator turns off.
MON2
QUAD
02
03
04
NETWORK
CONTROL
01
Press the [SEQUENCE] button.
NETWORK
OPERATION
The four images of the quad screen on monitor 2
automatically change in order of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-12
and 13-16.
On the DSR-5009P, the video changes automatically in order
of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.
Monitor 2
02
01
04
03
NETWORK
SETTINGS
08
07
12
11
15
4
Press the [MON2] button to end the
monitor 2 setting procedure.
SETTINGS
04
3
00:00:00
16
Press the [SEQUENCE] button to return
to normal quad-screen display.
Automatic selection ends and normal quad-screen display
returns.
OTHER
28
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 29 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
RECORDING
FULL indicator
[REC/STOP] button
Normal recording
Timer recording
Use the following procedure to record monitored video for a
preset length of time.
Use the following procedure to record monitored video.
z Be sure to set the time when using the digital video
recorder for the first time. Recording is not possible until
the time is set. (JP.20)
1
z Be sure to set the time when using the digital video
recorder for the first time. Recording is not possible until
the time is set. (JP.20)
Press the [REC/STOP] button.
1
2
The REC/STOP indicator lights up, “REC” (i.e., the recording
symbol) appears in the operation display and recording starts.
REC/STOP
[TIMER] button
Recording symbol
01-01-05 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A
Set timer recording. (JP.87)
Press the [TIMER] button.
The TIMER indicator lights up and the digital video recorder
enters timer recording standby mode.
0
TIMER
01-01-05 00:00:00
EN A
0
02
02
z At the time specified for the start of timer recording, the
REC/STOP indicator lights up, “REC” (i.e., the recording
symbol) appears in the operation display and recording
starts.
z At the time specified for the end of timer recording, the
REC/STOP indicator turns off and recording ends. The
TIMER indicator remains lit. If the [TIMER] button is
pressed, the TIMER indicator turns off.
z When recording for the first time, the default settings are
used. (JP.83)
z When “OVERWRITE” on the <RECORDING
CONDITIONS SET> screen is set to “OFF” and the space
remaining in the recording area becomes insufficient, the
FULL indicator begins to flash. If recording is continued
beyond this point, the recording area becomes full and
recording stops. Perform AREA FULL RESET to enable
recording. (JP.79)
z Playback is possible even while recording. (JP.18)
2
z When “OVERWRITE” on the <RECORDING
CONDITIONS SET> screen is set to “OFF” and the space
remaining in the recording area becomes insufficient, the
FULL indicator begins to flash. If recording is continued
beyond this point, the recording area becomes full and
recording stops. Perform AREA FULL RESET to enable
recording. (JP.79)
z Playback is possible even while recording.
Press and hold the [REC/STOP] button
for approximately 3 seconds to end
normal recording.
“REC” disappears from the operation display and recording
ends.
REC/STOP
3
Press the [TIMER] button to end timer
recording before the end time.
The TIMER indicator turns off and recording ends.
TIMER
English
29
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 30 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
RECORDING
INTRODUCTION
FULL indicator
Set alarm recording. (JP.93)
When an alarm signal is detected
z When an alarm signal is detected, “ALARM” flashes in the
operation display and alarm recording starts (indicated by
“REC”.)
z Whenever an alarm occurs, the number of alarms
indicated in the operation display is incremented.
01-01-05 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000001
Pre-alarm recording
Use the following procedure to record video immediately
before the occurrence of an alarm.
1
Counts the number of
alarms.
Displays up to
9999999.
After 9999999, the
counter returns to
0000000 and
resumes counting
from 1.
2
If an alarm is detected
Pre-alarm recording is automatically ended and alarm
recording starts.
z “PRE” disappears from the operation display and “ALARM”
begins to flash.
z If an alarm occurs during normal recording or timer
recording, recording ends.
z A maximum of 1,000,000 alarm recordings can be made
on one hard disk. The number of maximum recordings can
be increased to 6,000,000 by expanding the optional hard
disk. However, the maximum number of recordings is
affected by set recording conditions. Be sure to check the
menu settings and display content.
01-01-05 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000001
NETWORK
OPERATION
3
Set pre-alarm recording. (JP.96)
“PRE” appears in the operation display. Pre-alarm recording
starts (without the “REC” symbol being displayed).
NETWORK
CONTROL
02
SETTINGS
z When “OVERWRITE” on the <RECORDING
CONDITIONS SET> screen is set to “OFF” and the space
remaining in the recording area becomes insufficient, the
FULL indicator begins to flash. If recording is continued
beyond this point, the recording area becomes full and
recording stops. Perform AREA FULL RESET to enable
recording. (JP.79)
Use the following procedure to record alarm video when an
alarm signal is detected.
1
2
OPERATION
Alarm recording
02
End alarm recording.
z Be sure to set the time when using the digital video
recorder for the first time. Recording is not possible until
the time is set. (JP.20)
z When alarm recording total exceeds 1,000,000 and
“OVERWRITE” on the <RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
screen (JP.80) is set to “ON”, older recordings are
overwritten even if the hard disk has remaining memory
capacity.
Alarm recording is not performed when “OFF” is set.
30
English
OTHER
z When recording for the first time, the default settings are
used. The image quality and recording rate can be
changed. (JP.97)
z When “OVERWRITE” on the <RECORDING
CONDITIONS SET> screen is set to “OFF” and the space
remaining in the recording area becomes insufficient, the
FULL indicator begins to flash. If recording is continued
beyond this point, the recording area becomes full and
recording stops. Perform AREA FULL RESET to enable
recording. (JP.79)
NETWORK
SETTINGS
When the alarm duration has expired (default setting: 20
seconds), both “REC” and “ALARM” stop flashing on the
operation display and recording stops.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 31 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
PLAY
Use the following procedure to play normal or timer recording video stored in the hard disk.
[MULTI] button
POWER indicator
[QUAD] button
[PLAY/STOP] button
[ZOOM] button
Shuttle dial
[PLUS] button
[STILL] button
[SHUTTLE HOLD] button
[CAMERA SELECT] button
Playing video on a full screen
1
Fast-forward and fast-rewind
playback
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button for
the camera to play and then press the
[PLAY/STOP] button.
1
The PLAY/STOP indicator lights up and
appears in the
operation display. Normal or timer recording video is played
back. To view video from another camera, press the
[CAMERA SELECT] button of the desired camera.
PLAY/STOP
Operation
display area
01-01-05 00:00:00
Turn the shuttle dial to use fast-forward and fast-rewind
playback.
When turned clockwise,
appears in the operation display
and fast-forward playback begins.
When turned counter-clockwise,
appears in the operation
display and fast-rewind playback begins.
Fast-forward and fast-rewind speed increase the more the
shuttle dial is turned.
Return the shuttle dial to continue normal playback.
z Video playback begins at the playback point where the
previous recording ended.
z If the playback point has been reset, video playback begins
from the earliest recording.
z If playback is stopped, the playback point is reset and
playback resumes from that point when the [PLAY/STOP]
button is next pressed.
z When playback ends, the operating display automatically
indicates that playback is paused ( ) and the STILL
indicator lights up.
z Press the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button while either
or
is
displayed to fix the speed of fast-forward or fast-rewind
playback without having to hold the shuttle dial.
Press the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button again to continue
normal playback.
Changing the playback speed
Starting fast-forward or slow playback
Press the [PLAY/STOP] button to end
playback.
(1) Performing fast-forward.
When the jog dial is turned clockwise, fastforward playback begins and
appears in
the operation display.
Fast-forward speed increases the more the
jog dial is turned clockwise and decreases
as it is returned.
Playback ends.
PLAY/STOP
„ Playing video near the point of recording
(2) Performing slow playback.
When the jog dial is turned counterclockwise, slow playback begins and
appears in the operation display.
Slow playback speed decreases the more
the jog dial is turned counter-clockwise and
increases as it is returned.
The digital video recorder priorities recording operations, and
as a result, video playback may pause temporarily.
English
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise or
counter-clockwise during video
playback.
EN A
02
2
Jog dial
31
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 32 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
PLAY
(3) Returning to normal playback.
Press the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button while
the SHUTTLE HOLD indicator is lit to
release the lock status.
is displayed in the operation display area
when the jog dial is turned.
1
INTRODUCTION
Magnifying the playback video
Press the [ZOOM] button during
playback.
Press the button corresponding to the camera for which video
is being magnified.
The ZOOM indicator lights up and a blue zoom frame appears
in the center of the screen.
z Audio is not played during fast-forward, fast-rewind, slow,
reverse-slow and reverse playback.
OPERATION
ZOOM
Using reverse playback, fast-rewind, and
reverse-slow playback
(1) Performing reverse playback.
Turn the shuttle dial slightly counterclockwise during playback to use reverse
playback at normal speed.
is displayed
in the operation display area.
SETTINGS
2
Move the zoom frame to the area to be
magnified.
z Turn the jog dial to move the zoom frame to the left or right.
z Press the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button while is displayed to
fix the reverse playback speed without having to hold the
shuttle dial.
z Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial to
move the zoom frame vertically.
(3) Performing reverse-slow playback.
While in reverse playback, turn the jog dial
clockwise to use reverse slow playback.
is displayed in the operation display
area.
Reverse slow playback speed decreases
the more the jog dial is turned clockwise
and increases as it is returned.
NETWORK
CONTROL
(2) Performing fast-rewind playback.
While in reverse playback, turn the jog dial
counter-clockwise to use fast rewind.
is
displayed in the operation display area.
Fast-rewind speed increases the more the
jog dial is turned counter-clockwise and
decreases as it is returned.
Move the zoom frame to the area to be magnified.
NETWORK
OPERATION
3
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The area enclosed by the zoom frame is magnified (by a
factor of 2).
NETWORK
SETTINGS
(4) Returning to normal playback.
Press the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button while
the SHUTTLE HOLD indicator is lit to
release the lock status. is displayed in
the operation display area when the jog dial
is turned.
OTHER
02
32
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 33 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
4
PLAY
Press the [ZOOM] button to return to
normal magnification.
Frame advance (forward/reverse)
1
Magnification is cancelled and the display returns to the
normal screen.
The ZOOM indicator turns off.
Turn the jog dial while playback is
paused.
Clockwise: The still image is moved forward by one frame or
field.
Counter-clockwise: The still image is moved back by one
frame or field.
ZOOM
01-01-05 00:00:00
EN A
02
02
z Magnified video has a slightly coarser appearance when
compared with normal video.
z If normal, fast-forward or fast-rewind playback is performed
either for playback during alarm recording or for continuous
playback from the normal recording area and alarm
recording area, the image may appear to pause in certain
cases.
z Images cannot be enlarged in multi-screen format.
z If a [CAMERA SELECT] button is pressed or playback is
stopped, magnification is cancelled.
Viewing still images
Pause playback and display still images.
1
z The jog dial can be turned to increase the speed of frame
advance.
Press the [STILL] button during
playback.
Playing video on multiple screens
The STILL indicator lights up and playback video is paused.
appears in the operation display.
STILL
01-01-05 00:00:00
When recording video from a number of different cameras, the
following procedures can be used to play the recorded video
in multi-screen format.
EN A
Playing video on quad screens
1
The QUAD indicator lights up and video from four separate
cameras is displayed simultaneously.
02
2
Press the [QUAD] button during
playback.
Press the [STILL] button again to
resume normal playback.
QUAD
Normal playback is resumes.
STILL
English
33
01
02
03
04
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 34 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
2
PLAY
To view video from other cameras,
press the [QUAD] button again.
1
Each time this button is pressed, the four images on the quad
screen change, in order of cameras No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-12 and 1316.
On the DSR-5009P, the images change in order of cameras
No. 1-4, 5-8, 9-3, etc.
INTRODUCTION
Playing enlarged video
Press the [PLUS] button during playing
video on full, quad, multi 9 or multi 16
screens.
On the DSR-5009P, press the button on full, quad or multi 9
screens.
The PLUS indicator lights up and one camera image is enlarged.
QUAD
OPERATION
PLUS
05
06
07
2
To return to full screen display, press a
[CAMERA SELECT] button.
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
03
06
02
07
08
09
Press a [CAMERA SELECT] button.
SETTINGS
3
08
01
Example: Select Camera No. 2.
The selected camera image is enlarged.
On the DSR-5009P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
01
1
04
Press the [MULTI] button during
playback.
07
The MULTI indicator lights up and video from 16 separate
cameras is displayed simultaneously. Press the [MULTI]
button again to display multi 9 screens.
The DSR-5009P can only display video from nine cameras.
3
05
06
08
09
Press the [MULTI] button during plus
screen display to change display.
03
02
03
06
02
07
03
08
09 04 10
05
11
1206
13
15
08
16
01
01
05
04
02
07
14
07
04
07
08
06
02
MULTI
03
NETWORK
OPERATION
MULTI
MULTI
08
09
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
On the DSR-5009P, pressing the [MULTI] button does not
change the display.
09
4
To return to full screen display, press a
[CAMERA SELECT] button.
-
5
On the DSR-5009P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
Press the [PLUS] button during plus
screen display to leave the enlarged
camera image as is and to switch to
monitoring video (live image) for other
camera numbers.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
2
02
03
NETWORK
CONTROL
Playing video on multi 9 or multi 16 screens
02
PLUS
z In the case of both quad and multi 9/16 screen display, you
can change the positions in which playback video from the
various cameras is displayed. (JP.126)
z When playing back all videos, “PLUS” is displayed for
channels that are played back in enlarging video.
34
English
OTHER
Press the [PLUS] button to return to the
screen from before enlarging video.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 35 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
[FUNC.] button
[SEARCH] button
Shuttle dial
Jog dial
[CAMERA SELECT] button
[ALARM] button
Video stored in the recording area or archive area can be
located by searching and then played back. Use one of six
search methods to locate the required video.
Archive area
(3) ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH (JP.40)
Search and play back
alarm video using a
thumbnail list. Search also
by alarm or camera
0000028
0000027
number.
0000026
0011
Recording area
(2)
(3)
(4)
->
->
->
->
->
->
(5)
(6)
MOVE:JOG
01-01-05
0000021
0000020
RECORDING END :
CHANNEL : 01
SEARCH
:
DATE
TIME
25-10-05 12:32
PREVIEW ->
VIEW
->
30-10-05 19:00
CHANGE:JOG
SET:SHUTTLE
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
< ALARM LOG SEARCH > TERM : MONTH
1 5 10 15 20 25 30
20-10
20-10
20-10
20-10
16:15
17:15
18:15
19:15
01
01
01
01
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
(6) MOTION DETECTION SEARCH (JP.45)
Search and play back video of moving objects detected by
motion sensors.
SRARCH:ALARM
(2) ALARM SEARCH (JP.37)
Search and play back
< ALARM SEARCH >
alarm video from the
NO DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
recording list. Search also
0000028 10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
by alarm or camera
0000027 10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
number.
0000026 10-05 18:55 03
English
0000022
(5) ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH (JP.44)
Playback video that has
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
been stored in the archive
NO DATE START CH
CAPACITY
area. Search also by
0000001 20-10 14:15 01
TOTAL - 800MB
archive or camera number.
0000002 20-10 15:15 01
USED 105MB
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
0000023
SELECT:SHUTTLE
z During playback, use the shuttle dial, jog dial or operation
buttons to perform operations, such as to pause or fastforward playback.
(1) ALARM LOG SEARCH (JP.36)
Search with reduced
alarm image time.
0000024
(4) TIME/DATE SEARCH (JP.42)
Search and play back
< TIME/DATE SEARCH >
recorded video by date
RECORDING TOP :
24-10-05 18:00
and time.
<SEARCH> screen
(1)
SEARCH
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
0000025
10-05 18:52
10-05 22:05
10-05 21:59
10-05 21:33
10-05 21:25
MOVE:JOG
< MOTION
SEARCH FROM
START
END
DETECTION SEARCH >
: ALARM
: 12-09-03 09:25
: 20-10-03 15:50
CHANNEL
: --
START PREVIEW ->
MOVE:JOG
03
01
05
04
06
SELECT:SHUTTLE
35
SELECT:SHUTTLE
LEVEL:OFF
EXIT
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 36 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
4
Use the following procedure to perform an alarm search or
alarm thumbnail search by defining the period (month, week,
day or time) of the alarm recorded video.
1
Turn the jog dial to select “TERM” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The screen display changes to reflect the specified period.
Press the
or
[ALARM] button to change the month/
week/date/time.
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
< ALARM LOG SEARCH > TERM:DAY
01-01-05 00 06
12
18
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
2
SEARCH:ALARM
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Displays one day.
HOUR
Displays one hour.
Turn the jog dial to select the date, time
or minute and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
„ To confirm normal recording
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
< ALARM LOG SEARCH > TERM:DAY
01-01-05 00 06
12
18
The “TERM” setting flashes.
< ALARM LOG SEARCH > TERM:MONTH
1 5 10 15 20 25 30
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
SEARCH:ALARM
SEARCH:ALARM
NETWORK
SETTINGS
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
NETWORK
OPERATION
Press the [FUNC.] button to search for normal recording. A
blue mark is displayed at the top left of the screen, and
normally recorded parts are displayed in blue. (The search for
normal recording may take some time.)
To abort the search, turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
SEARCH:ALARM
01-01-05
DAY
The selected day (or hour or minutes) is indicated with a
yellow frame.
Alarm recording areas are indicated in red and areas with no
recordings in gray.
Reselecting the area cancels the original selected area.
< ALARM LOG SEARCH > TERM:MONTH
1 5 10 15 20 25 30
On the DSR-5009P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
3
Displays one week.
NETWORK
CONTROL
Camera
number
WEEK
5
The <ALARM LOG SEARCH> screen is displayed.
Date, day or time
01-01-05
Displays one month.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM LOG
SEARCH” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Description
‹MONTH
SETTINGS
MOVE:JOG
->
->
->
->
->
->
OPERATION
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
SEARCH
INTRODUCTION
Alarm log search
36
OTHER
z If “MONTH” is selected in step 4 above, each frame
represents one day. If “WEEK” is selected, four frames
represent one day. If “DAY” is selected, each frame
represent one hour. If “HOUR” is selected, each frame
represents two minutes.
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 37 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
6
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Turn the jog dial to select “SEARCH”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Alarm search
Use the following procedure to search and play back alarm
video. If pre-alarm video is being recorded, video from
immediately before the alarm can also be played back.
“ALARM” flashes.
< ALARM LOG SEARCH > TERM:DAY
01-01-05 00 06
12
18
1
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
SEARCH
SEARCH:ALARM
7
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM” or
“THUMBNAIL” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
->
->
->
->
->
->
Now perform alarm search (JP.37) or alarm thumbnail search
(JP.40).
MOVE:JOG
2
‹ALARM
THUMBNAIL
Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM
SEARCH” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <ALARM SEARCH> screen is displayed.
This screen lists the eight most recent alarm recordings.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Description
(1)
The <ALARM SEARCH> screen (JP.37)
is displayed and the search results are
displayed in a list.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
The <ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH>
screen (JP.40) is displayed and the
search results are displayed in a list.
(2)
(3)
(4)
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
(1) NO:
Indicates the alarm number.
(2) DATE/TIME:
Indicates the date and time at which the alarm video was
recorded.
(3) CH:
Indicates the alarm video’s channel (or camera number).
(4) TOTAL ALARMS:
Indicates the total number of alarm video recordings.
(5) SEARCH:
Search by specifying an alarm number. (JP.38)
(6) CHANNEL:
Search by specifying a camera number. (JP.39)
(7) Preview:
Displays the selected alarm video.
English
37
(5)
(6)
(7)
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 38 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Turn the jog dial to select the video for
playback from the list.
A preview of the selected alarm video is displayed in the
preview screen. In this case, the video at the time the alarm
occurred is displayed.
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
In the search screen, press the [FUNC.]
button and select “SEARCH”.
FUNC.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
z To display the next or previous recording
Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise
accordingly.
z Press the
[ALARM] button to display the next eight
recordings, and
for the previous eight recordings.
2
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The selected recording is played back on multi 16 screens.
Playback is also available for another camera image being
recorded simultaneously.
On the DSR-5009P, the recording is played back on multi 9
screens.
01-01-05 00:00:00
3
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Numbers can be entered
with the camera number
1-9 buttons or the [QUAD]
button (0).
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z When searching by specifying a camera number, playback
is performed on a full screen.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
NETWORK
OPERATION
02
Turn the jog dial and shuttle dial to
select an alarm number.
Turn the shuttle dial to move through the field and turn the jog
dial to select individual numbers (0 through 9).
EN A ALARM 0000028
SA 01
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
CONTROL
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
SETTINGS
The “SEARCH” input field flashes.
z To end search mode
Press the [SEARCH] button. The SEARCH indicator turns
off.
4
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
OPERATION
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
1
INTRODUCTION
Entering an alarm number to search for an
alarm video
„ To view pre-alarm video
After beginning playback of an alarm video identified by an
alarm search, use the shuttle dial to reverse playback.
OTHER
38
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 39 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
4
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Entering a camera number to search for an
alarm video
The alarm video with the specified number is displayed in the
preview screen.
Image numbers before the selected number are displayed in a
list on the left of the screen.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
5
1
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :-10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
FUNC.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
Press the [FUNC.] button.
The cursor moves to the list.
FUNC.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
6
2
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :-10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
Turn the jog dial to select the alarm
video for playback and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
01-01-05 00:00:00
3
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button for
the camera number to search.
The alarm video with the specified number is displayed in the
preview screen.
EN A ALARM 0000028
SA 01
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 01
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 02
CHANNEL :
10-05 18:55 03
10-05 18:52 03
10-05 22:05 01
10-05 21:59 05
10-05 21:33 04
10-05 21:25 06
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
The “CHANNEL” input field flashes.
The selected recording is played back on multi 16 screens.
Playback is also available for another camera image being
recorded simultaneously.
On the DSR-5009P, the recording is played back on multi 9
screens.
-
z When searching by specifying a camera number, playback
is performed on a full screen.
English
In the search screen, press the [FUNC.]
button and select “CHANNEL” with the
jog dial.
39
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 07
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 07
CHANNEL : 7
10-05 18:55 07
10-05 18:52 07
10-05 22:05 07
10-05 21:59 07
10-05 21:33 07
10-05 21:25 07
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 40 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
4
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Press the [FUNC.] button.
FUNC.
5
Use the following procedure to select alarm videos in the
recording area from a thumbnail list.
< ALARM SEARCH >
DATE TIME CH TOTAL ALARMS :0000028
10-05 19:15 07
SEARCH :0000028
10-05 18:57 07
CHANNEL : 7
10-05 18:55 07
10-05 18:52 07
10-05 22:05 07
10-05 21:59 07
10-05 21:33 07
10-05 21:25 07
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
1
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
SEARCH
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
Turn the jog dial to select the alarm
video for playback and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
EN A ALARM 0000000
MOVE:JOG
2
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM
THUMBNAIL SEARCH” and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
To view alarm video before or after the current
playback
Press the [ALARM] button during
playback.
0000028
01 0000027
02 0000026
0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
NETWORK
CONTROL
This screen lists the nine most recent alarm recordings.
An alarm number and camera number are indicated together
with each alarm recording, and the number of the currently
selected recording flashes.
02
1
->
->
->
->
->
->
SETTINGS
01-01-05 00:00:00
OPERATION
NO
0000028
0000027
0000026
0000025
0000024
0000023
0000022
0000021
INTRODUCTION
Alarm thumbnail search
The cursor moves to the list.
03
0011
ALARM
01-01-05 00:00:00
EN A ALARM 0000000
NETWORK
OPERATION
02
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z Each time the
button is pressed, playback skips to the
preceding alarm video.
z Each time the
button is pressed, playback skips to the
subsequent alarm video.
OTHER
z When playback is performed after an alarm search, the
frame at the start and end of each alarm recording is
paused.
Press the [ALARM] button to play the previous or next
recording.
z Use the front-panel buttons, the shuttle dial and the jog dial
to perform operations such as pause and fast-forward.
40
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 41 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Turn the jog dial to select the video for
playback.
Search by entering an alarm number
1
The alarm number for the selected video flashes.
In the search screen, press the [FUNC.]
button.
The “SEARCH” and “CHANNEL” input fields are displayed.
0000028
01 0000027
02 0000026
0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
FUNC.
03
0011
0000028
2
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
01 0000027
02 0000026
03
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :--
3
0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
Select alarm number by turning the jog
dial and shuttle dial.
Move the unit place with the shuttle dial and select numbers 09 with the jog dial.
EN A ALARM 0000028
03
04 0000024
0000028
The selected recording is played back on multi 16 screens.
Playback is also available for another camera image being
recorded simultaneously.
On the DSR-5009P, the recording is played back on multi 9
screens.
02
0000025
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
SA 01
03
The “SEARCH” input field flashes.
z To end search mode
Press the [SEARCH] button. The SEARCH indicator turns
off.
01-01-05 00:00:00
02 0000026
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :--
z To display the next or previous recording
Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise
accordingly.
z Press the
[ALARM] button to display the next nine
recordings, and
for the previous nine recordings.
4
01 0000027
0000028
01 0000027
02 0000026
03
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :--
Numbers can be entered
with the camera number
1-9 buttons or the
[QUAD] button (0).
z In the same way as for alarm searching, only alarm
recordings can be played back. Press the [ALARM] button
to play the previous or next recording.
4
0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The specified number alarm is searched for and thumbnails
are displayed.
Press the [FUNC.] button to cancel SEARCH and CHANNEL
input fields.
z When searching by specifying a camera number, playback
is performed on a full screen. (JP.42)
0000028
01 0000027
02 0000026
03
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :-0011
English
41
0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 42 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
1
Search and play back video in the recording area (normal
recording, timer recording, alarm recording) by specifying
camera number, date, or time.
Example: To search for a recording from camera 5 from
8:30 pm on 26 October, 2005
In the search screen, press the [FUNC.]
button and select “CHANNEL” with the
jog dial.
1
FUNC.
01 0000027
02 0000026
03
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :-0000025
04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
SEARCH
2
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
MOVE:JOG
01 0000027
02 0000026
03
2
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :-04 0000024
05 0000023
06
0000022
07 0000021
08 0000020
09
Turn the jog dial to select “TIME/DATE
SEARCH” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <TIME/DATE SEARCH> screen is displayed.
(1)
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button for
the camera number to search.
(3)
(5)
(2)
(4)
(6)
< TIME/DATE SEARCH >
RECORDING TOP :
24-10-05 18:00
RECORDING END :
30-10-05 19:00
CHANNEL : 01
SEARCH
:
DATE
TIME
25-10-05 12:32
PREVIEW ->
VIEW
->
CHANGE:JOG
07 0000027
07 0000026
SEARCH :0000028
CHANNEL :-7
0011
4
07 0000024
07 0000023
07
0000022
07 0000021
07 0000020
07
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
(1) RECORDING TOP:
Indicates the date/time of the earliest video recording.
(2) RECORDING END:
Indicates the date/time of the most recent video recording.
(3) CHANNEL:
Input a camera number to search.
(4) SEARCH:
Input date and time to search.
(5) PREVIEW:
Select this option and turn the shuttle dial clockwise to display
the preview screen.
(6) VIEW:
Select this option and turn the shuttle dial clockwise to play
the recording.
07
0000025
SET:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
OPERATION
The specified camera number alarm is searched for and
thumbnails are displayed.
Press the [FUNC.] button to cancel SEARCH and CHANNEL
input fields.
0000028
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
CONTROL
3
0000025
->
->
->
->
->
->
SETTINGS
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
The “CHANNEL” input field flashes.
0000028
OPERATION
0000028
INTRODUCTION
Time/date search
Search by entering a camera number
OTHER
42
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 43 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
6
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise while
“CHANNEL” is selected.
“SEARCHING” is displayed and then the preview screen for
the date and time settings is displayed.
The “CHANNEL” input field flashes.
< TIME/DATE SEARCH >
RECORDING TOP :
24-10-05 18:00
RECORDING END :
30-10-05 19:00
CHANNEL : -SEARCH
:
DATE
TIME
25-10-05 12:32
PREVIEW ->
VIEW
->
CHANGE:JOG
4
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
< TIME/DATE SEARCH >
RECORDING TOP :
24-10-05 18:00
RECORDING END :
30-10-05 19:00
CHANNEL : 05
SEARCH
:
DATE
TIME
26-10-05 20:30
PREVIEW ->
VIEW
->
[KEY]
CHANGE:JOG
SET:SHUTTLE
SET:SHUTTLE
z If no recording exists for the specified time
The closest recording to the specified time is displayed.
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] 5 button.
The cursor moves to “DATE TIME”.
z To end search mode
Press the [SEARCH] button to end search mode. The
SEARCH indicator turns off.
< TIME/DATE SEARCH >
RECORDING TOP :
24-10-05 18:00
RECORDING END :
30-10-05 19:00
CHANNEL : 05
SEARCH
:
DATE
TIME
25-10-05 12:32
PREVIEW ->
VIEW
->
CHANGE:JOG
5
7
The selected recording is played back on the full screen.
SET:SHUTTLE
Specify the date and time.
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn the jog dial to “26”
(day).
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn the jog dial to “10”
(month).
(3) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn the jog dial to “05”
(year).
(4) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and turn the jog dial to “20”
(hour).
(5) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, turn the jog dial to “30”
(minutes) and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise again.
The cursor moves to “PREVIEW”
Date and time for
searching
26-10-05
20 : 30
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5)
z The retrieved recording can be displayed on the full screen
without displaying the preview screen by entering the date
and time and then selecting “VIEW”.
z If “CHANNEL” is set to “- -” and playback is started, the
recording is displayed on the multi 16 screens (on multi 9
screens for the DSR-5009P).
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button to view on a full
screen.
< TIME/DATE SEARCH >
RECORDING TOP :
24-10-05 18:00
RECORDING END :
30-10-05 19:00
CHANNEL : 05
SEARCH
:
DATE
TIME
26-10-05 20:30
PREVIEW ->
VIEW
->
CHANGE:JOG
SET:SHUTTLE
z Also use the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9 button, or the
[QUAD] button (0) to input.
English
Turn the jog dial to select “VIEW” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
43
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 44 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
3
Use the following procedure to playback video that has been
stored in the archive area.
1
The selected image is displayed on the preview screen.
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
2
MOVE:JOG
->
->
->
->
->
->
z To display the next or previous screen
Turn the jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise
accordingly.
z Press the
[ALARM] button to display the next eight
recordings, and
for the previous eight recordings.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
z Up to eight recordings can be displayed in the <ARCHIVE
AREA SEARCH> screen.
z To end search mode
Press the [SEARCH] button. The SEARCH indicator turns
off.
z Search also by entering the camera number.
Turn the jog dial to select “ARCHIVE
AREA SEARCH” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
(1)
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
DATE START CH
CAPACITY
20-10 14:15 01
TOTAL - 800MB
20-10 15:15 01
USED - 105MB
20-10 16:15 01
20-10 17:15 01
20-10 18:15 01
20-10 19:15 01
MOVE:JOG
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The selected recording is played back on the full screen.
(5)
(6)
NETWORK
OPERATION
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
(3)
4
(4)
NETWORK
CONTROL
The <ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH> screen is displayed.
This screen lists the eight most recent recordings in the order
in which archiving was performed.
(2)
SELECT:SHUTTLE
SETTINGS
MOVE:JOG
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
DATE START CH
CAPACITY
20-10 14:15 01
TOTAL - 800MB
20-10 15:15 01
USED - 105MB
20-10 16:15 01
20-10 17:15 01
20-10 18:15 01
20-10 19:15 01
OPERATION
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
SEARCH
Turn the jog dial to select the video for
playback from the list.
INTRODUCTION
Searching within the archive area
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
SETTINGS
(1) NO:
Indicates the archive number.
(2) DATE:
Indicates the date of the recording.
(3) START:
Indicates the start time for the recording.
(4) CH:
Indicates the camera number for the stored recording.
(5) TOTAL:
Indicates the total capacity of the archive area.
(6) USED:
Indicates the amount of the archive area that has been used.
OTHER
44
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 45 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
4
Entering an archive number to search for an
alarm video
1
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Data with the specified archive numbers are searched for and
displayed in a list.
In the search screen, press the [FUNC.]
button and select “SEARCH”.
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
The cursor moves to “SEARCH”.
FUNC.
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
DATE START CH
20-10 14:15 01 SEARCH :
20-10 15:15 01 CHANNEL :
20-10 16:15 01
20-10 17:15 01
20-10 18:15 01
20-10 19:15 01
0000028
--
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
DATE START CH
20-10 14:15 01 SEARCH :
20-10 15:15 01 CHANNEL :
20-10 16:15 01
20-10 17:15 01
20-10 18:15 01
20-10 19:15 01
MOVE:JOG
0000028
--
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Motion detection search
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
By setting the motion sensor for normal, timer or alarm
recordings, variations from normal images as a result of the
presence of an intruder or the like can be detected, and the
corresponding video can be played back.
z When the cursor is positioned on “SEARCH”, turn the jog
dial to move the cursor to “CHANNEL”.
2
z When a camera number is specified, searching can only be
performed for that camera.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The “SEARCH” input field flashes.
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
1
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
DATE START CH
20-10 14:15 01 SEARCH :
20-10 15:15 01 CHANNEL :
20-10 16:15 01
20-10 17:15 01
20-10 18:15 01
20-10 19:15 01
MOVE:JOG
3
0000028
--
The SEARCH indicator lights up and the <SEARCH> screen
is displayed.
SEARCH
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial and shuttle dial to
select an archive number.
Turn the shuttle dial to move through the field and turn the jog
dial to select a individual numbers (0 through 9).
NO
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
< ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH >
DATE START CH
20-10 14:15 01 SEARCH :
20-10 15:15 01 CHANNEL :
20-10 16:15 01
20-10 17:15 01
20-10 18:15 01
20-10 19:15 01
MOVE:JOG
Press the [SEARCH] button while the
digital video recorder is recording or
stopped.
<SEARCH>
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
MOVE:JOG
2
0000028
--
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “MOTION
DETECTION SEARCH” and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <MOTION DETECTION SEARCH> screen is displayed.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
z Also use 1-9 on the [CAMERA SELECT] button or the
[QUAD] button (0) to input.
< MOTION
SEARCH FROM
START
END
DETECTION SEARCH >
: ALARM
: 12-09-03 09:25
: 20-10-03 15:50
CHANNEL
: --
START PREVIEW ->
MOVE:JOG
English
->
->
->
->
->
->
45
SELECT:SHUTTLE
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 46 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
6
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The screen changes and the preview screen for the selected
camera number is displayed.
< MOTION
SEARCH FROM
START
END
DETECTION SEARCH >
: ALARM
: 12-09-03 09:25
: 20-10-03 15:50
CHANNEL
: --
< MOTION DETECTION SEARCH >
SEARCH FROM : NORMAL
/ CHANNEL : --
(1)
(2)
START PREVIEW ->
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹ALARM
Searches alarm recording area.
Searches normal and alarm recording
areas.
ARCHIVE*1
Search the archive area.
*1 “ARCHIVE” can only be selected when “MODE” in
“ARCHIVE AREA” in the <RECORDING CONDITIONS
SET> screen is set to “AUTO ALARM COPY”. (JP.81)
4
z Press the [SEARCH] button to end search mode. The
SEARCH indicator turns off.
Setting the motion sensor for searching
< MOTION
SEARCH FROM
START
END
DETECTION SEARCH >
: NORMAL
: 12-09-03 09:25
: 20-10-03 15:50
CHANNEL
: --
1
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Press a [CAMERA SELECT] button and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
< MOTION DETECTION SEARCH >
SEARCH FROM : NORMAL
/ CHANNEL : --
The cursor moves to “START PREVIEW”.
< MOTION
SEARCH FROM
START
END
DETECTION SEARCH >
: NORMAL
: 12-09-03 09:25
: 20-10-03 15:50
CHANNEL
: --
START :
12-09-03 10:00
END :
20-10-03 15:50
MOTION SENSOR ->
PREVIEW
->
VIEW
->
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
SETTINGS
-
Set the
start date
and time.
NETWORK
OPERATION
(1) Turn the jog dial to set the start date and time for motion
sensing (i.e., 10 AM on the same day) and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The recording for the selected time is displayed in the
preview screen. The cursor moves to “END”.
START PREVIEW ->
MOVE:JOG
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise while
video is being displayed on the preview
screen.
NETWORK
CONTROL
Turn the jog dial to select the “SEARCH
FROM” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise twice.
The camera number input field flashes.
5
SELECT:SHUTTLE
SETTINGS
Searches normal recording area.
ALARM &
NORMAL
(5)
(1) START:
The date and time of the first screen of the selected recording
is displayed.
(2) END:
The last date and time of the selected recording is displayed.
(3) MOTION SENSOR:
The motion sensor setting screen is displayed.
(4) PREVIEW:
Displays the selected start image.
(5) VIEW:
Plays the selected recording on the full screen.
Description
NORMAL
(3)
START :
12-09-03 09:25
END :
20-10-03 15:50
MOTION SENSOR ->
PREVIEW
->
VIEW
->
MOVE:JOG
OPERATION
(4)
Setting
INTRODUCTION
“SEARCH FROM” input field flashes.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
START PREVIEW ->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
OTHER
MOVE:JOG
46
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 47 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
(3) Turn the jog dial to set the end date and time for motion
sensing (i.e., 8 PM on the same day) and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “MOTION SENSOR”.
(5) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The yellow areas change to gray.
< MOTION DETECTION SEARCH >
SEARCH FROM : NORMAL
/ CHANNEL : --
Set the
end date
and time.
2
START :
12-09-03 10:00
END :
12-09-03 20:00
MOTION SENSOR ->
PREVIEW
->
VIEW
->
MOVE:JOG
LEVEL:OFF
3
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
EXIT
Turn the jog dial to select “LEVEL” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
The motion sensor setting screen is displayed.
Use the following procedure to set to detect a given range with
the motion sensor.
(1) Turn the jog dial to move the starting position to the
desired detection range and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“ ” changes to a yellow “„”.
LEVEL:OFF
4
EXIT
Turn the jog dial to select sensitivity
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
After the sensitivity level is set, the cursor moves to “EXIT”.
LEVEL:OFF
EXIT
(2) Turn the jog dial to move left and right.
(3) Press the [FUNC.] button.
Cursor movements can be changed from left and right to
up and down.
LEVEL:OFF
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
FUNC.
‹OFF
1 to 10
5
LEVEL:OFF
EXIT
Description
Motion sensing is not performed.
Motion sensing is performed. Lower
numbers correspond to higher levels of
sensitivity.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The display returns to the <MOTION DETECTION SEARCH>
screen.
EXIT
(4) Turn the jog dial to move up and down.
< MOTION DETECTION SEARCH >
SEARCH FROM : NORMAL
/ CHANNEL : -START :
12-09-03 10:00
END :
12-09-03 20:00
MOTION SENSOR ->
PREVIEW
->
VIEW
->
MOVE:JOG
English
47
SELECT:SHUTTLE
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 48 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
6
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Turn the jog dial to select “PREVIEW”.
INTRODUCTION
< MOTION DETECTION SEARCH >
SEARCH FROM : NORMAL
/ CHANNEL : --
7
OPERATION
START :
12-09-03 10:00
END :
12-09-03 20:00
MOTION SENSOR ->
PREVIEW
->
VIEW
->
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Each time the shuttle dial is turned clockwise, a different
motion sensor screen is displayed on the preview screen.
< MOTION DETECTION SEARCH >
SEARCH FROM : ALARM
/ CHANNEL : --
SETTINGS
START :
12-09-03 10:00
END :
12-09-03 20:00
MOTION SENSOR ->
PREVIEW
->
VIEW
->
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
„ If “NOT FOUND!” is displayed
NETWORK
CONTROL
Set the motion sensor again.
Viewing video detected by the motion sensor
8
Turn the jog dial to select “VIEW” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Normal playback begins for the specified recording.
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z If “- -” is specified for “CHANNEL”, the videos are displayed
on multi 16 screens (on multi 9 screens for the DSR5009P). If “01” to “16” (“01” to “09” for the DSR-5009P) is
specified for “CHANNEL”, playback can be performed for
only the specified camera number.
In such a case, the title information, date information and/
or time information may not be displayed completely.
z To playback a recording from a different camera, stop the
current playback and then repeat the setting process from
the beginning.
OTHER
48
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 49 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
Use the procedures described below to copy important normal, timer or alarm recordings to the digital video recorder’s archive area,
a CompactFlash card, a Microdrive, a CD-R/RW or a DVD+R/+RW.
Copying video to the hard disk’s archive area (JP.50)
Copy
Archive
area
Recording area
Copying video to a CompactFlash card or Microdrive (JP.51)
If audio is recorded, audio can also be copied.
Automatic copy
Archive
area
CF card
Microdrive
Recording area
Copying video to a CD-R/RW or DVD+R/+RW (JP.54)
If audio is recorded, audio can also be copied. (One video only)
Automatic copy
Archive
area
USB
External recordable
CD/DVD drive
Recording area
z Copied data is stored as continuous still images.
z If the archive area does not have sufficient memory to copy
video, only the video recordable to the archive area is
copied. After copying important images to external media
or a computer (JP.51), delete the archive area data using
“AREA FULL RESET” in “ARCHIVE AREA” of
“2.RECORDING AREA SET” in the “2. RECORD SET”
settings sub-menu. (JP.79)
English
49
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 50 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
4
Turn the jog dial to select “UNIT” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Copying video to the hard disk’s
archive area
The cursor moves to “HOW MANY”.
[PLAY/STOP] button
[STILL] button
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA
UNIT
: TIME
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 00:00:00
COPY START
->
Shuttle dial
OPERATION
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
Jog dial
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
[COPY] button
‹PICTURES
Example: Copying 10 seconds of video
Play video to be copied.
TIME
5
Press the [STILL] button when the frame
to be copied is displayed.
The specified duration after the specified
location is copied (time:minutes:seconds).
Set the time.
z Images from all cameras cannot be copied simultaneously.
Use the [CAMERA SELECT] button to select the camera
whose video is to be copied.
Press the [COPY] button.
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
COPY
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
OPERATION
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA
UNIT
: TIME
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 00:00:10
COPY START
->
The COPY indicator lights up and the copy setting screen is
displayed.
“ARCHIVE AREA” is displayed for “COPY TO”.
NETWORK
CONTROL
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“00” (hour) flashes.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “00” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“00” (minutes) flashes.
(3) Turn the jog dial to select “00” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“00” (seconds) flashes.
(4) Turn the jog dial to select “10” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “COPY START”.
STILL
3
The specified number of images after the
specified location are copied.
SETTINGS
1
2
Description
NETWORK
SETTINGS
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
OTHER
50
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 51 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
6
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Copying to a CompactFlash card or
Microdrive
Copying to the archive area begins.
The message “COPY TO ARCHIVE AREA !” is displayed onscreen during the copy procedure.
Use the following procedure to copy recording area or archive
area video to a CompactFlash card or Microdrive.
The procedure is the same for copying to a CompactFlash
card and Microdrive. (The maximum supported capacity for a
Microdrive or CompactFlash card is 2 GB.)
COPY TO ARCHIVE AREA ! < 56% >
[PLAY/STOP] button
[STILL] button
Shuttle dial
When copying is completed, “COPY FINISHED !” is
displayed.
Jog dial
[COPY] button
COPY FINISHED ! < 100% >
Example: Copying 20 images
1
Insert a CompactFlash card.
Insertion method
„ To cancel copying
Removal method
(1)
Press the [COPY] button.
(2)
COPY CANCELED ! < 0% >
Rear
surface
(3)
(2)
(3)
(1) Open the cover.
(2) Ensuring that it is correctly
oriented, insert the
CompactFlash card into
the CompactFlash card
slot.
(3) Fold down the lever.
2
3
Play video to be copied on a full screen.
Press the [STILL] button when the frame
to be copied is displayed.
STILL
English
51
(1)
(1) Raise the lever.
(2) Push in the lever.
(3) Remove the
CompactFlash card.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 52 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
6
4
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
7
Press the [COPY] button.
INTRODUCTION
The COPY indicator lights up and the copy setting screen is
displayed.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“PICTURES” flashes.
COPY
COPY TO : COMPACT FLASH
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
OPERATION
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
5
8
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ARCHIVE AREA” flashes.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise while
“PICTURES” is flashing.
The cursor moves to “HOW MANY”.
SETTINGS
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
COPY TO : COMPACT FLASH
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “COMPACT
FLASH” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
NETWORK
CONTROL
6
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
The cursor moves to “UNIT”.
‹PICTURES
The specified number of images after the
specified location are copied.
TIME
The specified duration after the specified
location is copied (TIME:minutes:seconds).
MAXIMUM
The maximum number of images allowable
in the copy destination is copied or all the
data from the copy source is copied.
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
z If audio is recorded, “ON” or “OFF” can be set for “AUDIO”.
9
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“1” flashes.
COPY TO : COMPACT FLASH
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z Up to 40,000 images can be copied in a single operation.
When specifying the number of images using “TIME”,
copying ends after 40,000 images are copied.
z Alarm recordings can only be copied one event at a time.
NETWORK
OPERATION
COPY TO : COMPACT FLASH
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
Description
OTHER
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
52
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 53 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
10 Turn the jog dial to select “20” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
z If the CompactFlash card becomes full during the copying
process, the message “CARD FULL!” is displayed and
copying ends. Press any button to return to the normal
screen. Copying should now be repeated using a new
CompactFlash card. If the CompactFlash card becomes
full and copying ends, all data copied at the time the
process ended is saved on the CompactFlash card.
The cursor moves to “COPY START”.
COPY TO : COMPACT FLASH
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 20
COPY START
->
Viewing images copied to a CompactFlash card
on a PC
11 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The copy data and the capacity of the copy destination are
checked.
When images are copied to a CompactFlash card, the
following folders are created and images are saved within
them.
CompactFlash card
SANYO
CHECKING DATA SIZE ! < 56% >
(1)
MM-DD-YY.99
IMG00001
(2)
(3)
00000001.JP2
↓
00000200.JP2
The available space and write capacity are checked.
IMG00002
↓
↓
⋅
⋅
⋅
COPY TO
: COMPACT FLASH
TYPE
: ----FREE AREA
: 200MB
DATA SIZE
: 130MB
IMG00200
00000201.JP2
↓
00000400.JP2
00039801.JP2
↓
COPY START
00040000.JP2
->
SOUND
The available space and write capacity are displayed and the
cursor moves to “COPY START”.
J2KCOREX.dll
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Viewer2.exe
SOUND.MP3
IJL15.dll
Viewer2.ini
Copying begins. The message “COPY TO COMPACT FLASH
!” is displayed on-screen during the copy procedure.
(1) A folder with the name “SANYO” is created inside the root
directory.
(2) Within this folder, folders are created based on the date
of copied images.
(3) Within each date folder, sub-directories are created in
sequence starting with “IMG00001”.
Each directory can hold up to 200 individual images.
COPY TO COMPACT FLASH ! < 56% >
When copying is completed, “COPY FINISHED !” is
displayed.
z To view recorded images on a PC, double-click
“Viewer2.exe” to open the viewer and open the saved
folder (date).
COPY FINISHED ! < 100% >
„ To cancel copying
Press the [COPY] button.
COPY CANCELED ! < 0% >
English
53
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 54 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
4
Press the [COPY] button.
INTRODUCTION
Copying to a CD-R/RW or DVD+R/
+RW
The COPY indicator lights up and the copy setting screen is
displayed.
Use the following procedure to copy recording area or archive
area video to a CD-R/RW or DVD+R/+RW.
COPY
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
[PLAY/STOP] button
[STILL] button
Shuttle dial
OPERATION
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
Jog dial
5
Turn the jog dial to select “COPY TO”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ARCHIVE AREA” flashes.
[COPY] button
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
z For compatibility, refer to the SANYO homepage.
http://www.sanyosecurity.com/
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
Connect a recordable CD or DVD drive
and insert a disk.
6
USB
Turn the jog dial to select “DISC
WRITER” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to “UNIT”.
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
Play video to be copied on a full screen.
Press the [STILL] button when the frame
to be copied is displayed.
OTHER
2
3
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z The digital video recorder has one USB terminal on the
front and one on the back, but they cannot be used
simultaneously. Connect recordable drive to either
terminal. If both sides have devices connected, the front
terminal is prioritized.
NETWORK
OPERATION
COPY TO : DISC WRITER
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
NETWORK
CONTROL
1
SETTINGS
Example: Copying the maximum video to the copy
destination
STILL
54
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 55 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
6
7
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
9
Turn the jog dial to select “MAXIMUM”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The number of images flashes.
The cursor moves to “COPY START”.
COPY TO
: DISC WRITER
TYPE
: DVD+R
FREE AREA
: 5000MB
DATA SIZE
: 3526MB
COPY TO : DISC WRITER
UNIT
: MAXIMUM
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY :
COPY START
->
NO. OF COPY
COPY START
:
1
->
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
10 Turn the jog dial to set the number of
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹PICTURES
images to copy, and turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Description
The specified number of images after the
specified location are copied.
TIME
The specified duration after the specified
location is copied (TIME:minutes:seconds).
MAXIMUM
The maximum number of images allowable
in the copy destination is copied or all the
data from the copy source is copied.
The cursor appears on “COPY START”.
COPY TO
: DISC WRITER
TYPE
: DVD+R
FREE AREA
: 5000MB
DATA SIZE
: 3526MB
NO. OF COPY
COPY START
:
1
->
z If audio is recorded, “ON” or “OFF” can be set for “AUDIO”.
8
11 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Copying begins. The message “COMPOSING IMAGE DATA!”,
then “COPY TO DISC WRITER” is displayed on screen during
copying.
The copy data and the capacity of the copy destination are
checked.
CHECKING DATA SIZE ! < 56% >
COMPOSING IMAGE DATA ! < 56% >
The available space and write capacity are checked.
When copying is completed, “COPY FINISHED !” is displayed
and the tray opens.
COPY TO
: DISC WRITER
TYPE
: DVD+R
FREE AREA
: 5000MB
DATA SIZE
: 3526MB
COPY FINISHED ! < 100% >
NO. OF COPY
COPY START
:
1
->
NO. OF COPY :
1/2
COPY START
->
PLEASE SET A NEW DISC !
Free area write capacity is displayed and the cursor appears
on “NO. OF COPY”.
English
55
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 56 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
4
It is possible to format a CompactFlash card, Microdrive, CDRW or DVD+RW.
Turn the jog dial to select the “FORMAT/
ERASE” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “FORMAT/ERASE START”.
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Insert a CompactFlash card, CD-RW or
DVD+RW.
Setting
‹COMPACT
FLASH
Press the [COPY] button.
DISC WRITER
The COPY indicator lights up and the copy setting screen is
displayed.
COPY
5
Formats a CompactFlash card.
Formats a CD-RW or DVD+RW.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
<WARNING>
FORMAT
: COMPACT FLASH
VOLUME : 122MB
NETWORK
CONTROL
STORED DATA ON THE COMPACT FLASH
WILL BE ERASED !
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
FORMAT START
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
3
Description
SETTINGS
2
OPERATION
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
1
INTRODUCTION
Formatting a CompactFlash card, CD-RW or
DVD+RW
Turn the jog dial to select “FORMAT/
ERASE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
6
“COMPACT FLASH” flashes.
Turn the jog dial to select “FORMAT
START” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
NETWORK
OPERATION
COPY TO : ARCHIVE AREA
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: OFF
HOW MANY : 1
COPY START
->
->
FORMAT COMPACT FLASH !
FORMAT/ERASE : COMPACT FLASH
FORMAT/ERASE START ->
CHANGE:JOG SET:SHUTTLE
z Be sure to use CompactFlash cards that have been
formatted using FAT16. The digital video recorder does not
recognize FAT32 CompactFlash cards.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z “FORMAT/ERASE” cannot be selected when a disk writer
is not connected.
OTHER
56
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 57 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
6
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
Viewing images on a PC
Images copied to a CD-R/RW or DVD+R/+RW can be viewed
on a PC.
When images are copied to a CD-R/RW or DVD+R/+RW, the
following folders are created and images are saved within
them.
CD-R/RW or DVD+R/+RW
DCIM
_VIEWER
J2KCOREX.dll
IJL15.dll
Viewer2.exe
Viewer2.ini
YYMMDD99
IMG00001
(2)
(3)
(1)
00000001.JP2
00000002.JP2
00000003.JP2
↓
00000200.JP2
IMG00002
↓
↓
⋅
⋅
SOUND
00000201.JP2
00000202.JP2
00000203.JP2
↓
00000400.JP2
SOUND.mp3
(1) The folder “DCIM” is created.
(2) Within this folder, folders are created based on the date
(YY-MM-DD) of copied images.
(3) Within each date folder, sub-directories are created in
sequence starting with “IMG00001”.
Each sub-directory can hold up to 200 individual images.
z To view images on your PC, open the “YYMMDDXX” folder
using the dedicated viewer. To open the viewer, doubleclick “Viewer2.exe”.
(The dedicated viewer and JPEG2000 plug-in are
downloaded to the media with the images.)
English
57
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 58 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
MENU CONFIGURATION AND OPERATIONS
3
[MENU] button
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
[EXIT/OSD] button
The sub-menus appear.
The cursor is positioned on the first setting item.
Shuttle dial
MOVE:JOG
Jog dial
4
This section describes the menu configuration and the menu
items to be selected for each operation.
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
OPERATION
<RECORD SET>
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET
2.RECORDING AREA SET
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET
5.PROGRAM REC SET
6.TIMER SET
7.ALARM REC MODE SET
8.ALARM OPERATION SET
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select an item and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The setting screen is displayed. The cursor is positioned on
the first setting item.
1
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
MOVE:JOG
2
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
500GB
500GB
:
80 %
:
20 %
->
->
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
NETWORK
CONTROL
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
RECORDING AREA
AREA FULL RESET
ARCHIVE AREA
AREA FULL RESET
SETTINGS
Basic menu operations
„ To return to the previous menu
Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select a function.
Cursor
position
5
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
EXIT/OSD
z Menus can be opened even during the recording process.
z Menu settings cannot be changed during the recording
process. To make changes to menu settings, first stop
recording.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
SETTINGS
MOVE:JOG
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
NETWORK
OPERATION
Example: “2.RECORD SET”
The cursor moves.
OTHER
58
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 59 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
MENU CONFIGURATION AND OPERATIONS
Movement and confirmation in sub-menus and
setting screens
Use the jog dial and shuttle dial to move through the submenus and setting screens and to confirm the settings.
(2)
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
(1)
RECORDING AREA
AREA FULL RESET
ARCHIVE AREA
AREA FULL RESET
500GB
500GB
:
80 %
:
20 %
(3)
->
->
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
(1)
To move the cursor
Turn the jog dial.
up or down
(2)
To move the cursor
Turn the shuttle dial
right or to confirm
clockwise.
an item
(3)
To change a
setting value
Turn the jog dial.
Resetting menu items
Use the following procedure to restore only those items in the
displayed setting screen to their default values.
1
2
Open the menu screen containing the
items to be returned to default settings.
Press the [MENU RESET] button.
The displayed settings are restored to their default values.
SHUTTLE
C
LE
AR
EN
T
ER
CARD
MENU
RESET
EJECT
English
[MENU RESET] button
59
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 60 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
MENU CONFIGURATION AND OPERATIONS
MAIN MENU
MOVE:JOG
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
Sub-menus
<RECORD SET>
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET
2.RECORDING AREA SET
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET
5.PROGRAM REC SET
6.TIMER SET
7.ALARM REC MODE SET
8.ALARM OPERATION SET
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
OPERATION
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
Turn the jog dial to select the setting
item and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Sub-menu configuration
SELECT:SHUTTLE
The following settings can be made with the sub-menus.
Press the [MENU] button in any sub-menu to scroll through the sub-menus.
<INITIAL SET>
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET
2.CAMERA DETECT
3.TITLE SET
4.HOLIDAY SET
5.TIME PERIOD SET
MOVE:JOG
6. INITIALIZATION LOG (JP.134)
Displays a record of hard
< INITIALIZATION LOG >
disk initialization and
DATE
TIME AREA
ACTION
resetting of recording
----- --:-- ------- ( ------ )
areas.
----- --:-- ------- ( ------ )
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:--
-------------------------------------------
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
------------------------------------
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
USER
----------------------------------------------------------------
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-04.00
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SAVE MENUS TO CF
->
LOAD MENUS FROM CF
->
COPY USER ID SETTIGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE ^YES^ FOR ^AREA SETTINGS^,
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
SELECT:SHUTTLE
8. ADVANCED MENU SET (JP.138)
Sets the ROI setting, alarm
<ADVANCED MENU SET>
notification by e-mail
1.ROI SET
setting and camera control
2.ALARM NOTICE SET
settings.
3.CAMERA CONTROL SET
4.PPP SET
5.TIME ZONE/NTP SET
MOVE:JOG
60
->
->
->
->
->
OTHER
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<GENERAL SET>
1.DISPLAY SET
2.BUZZER SET
3.SECURITY LOCK SET
4.RS-232C/RS-485 SET
5.HDD SET
6.NETWORK SET
7.NETWORK CONTROL SET
NETWORK
OPERATION
-----------------------------
--:---:---:---:---:---:--
7. COPY MENU SETTINGS (JP.135)
Stores and loads menu
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
settings.
MOVE:JOG
4. SCREEN SET (JP.126)
Sets the camera display
position on quad and multi
9/16 screens, automatic
camera selection setting,
mask setting and color
level setting.
----- --:-- --------- --:-- --------- --:-- --------- --:-- --------- --:-- --------- --:-- ----USED TIME ->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
<RECORD SET>
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET
2.RECORDING AREA SET
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET
5.PROGRAM REC SET
6.TIMER SET
7.ALARM REC MODE SET
8.ALARM OPERATION SET
MOVE:JOG
3. GENERAL SET (JP.106)
Sets the monitor display
setting, buzzer setting,
security lock, RS-232C/
RS-485 settings, hard disk
initialization and mirroring
settings, network settings
and other settings.
->
->
->
->
->
NETWORK
CONTROL
2. RECORD SET (JP.71)
Sets the basic recording
settings, hard disk capacity
and recording area,
overwriting conditions,
image quality, recording
rate, timer and alarm
recording settings, and
alarm settings.
5. POWER LOSS/USED TIME (JP.133)
Displays the date and time
<POWER LOSS/USED TIME>
of power losses and the
POWER
LOSS
RECOVER
amount of hard disk
#001
03-02 00:05 03-02 06:37
usage.
----- --:-- ----- --:--
SETTINGS
1. INITIAL SET (JP.61)
Sets display language,
time, title, holiday, time
period and other settings.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 61 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
INITIAL SET
[MENU] button
MAIN MENU
[EXIT/OSD] button
[QUAD] button
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
[CAMERA SELECT] button
3. TITLE SET (JP.65)
Sets a unique title for each
camera so that these can
be displayed on-screen.
Configuration
The following settings can be made with <INITIAL SET>.
<INITIAL SET>
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET
2.CAMERA DETECT
3.TITLE SET
4.HOLIDAY SET
5.TIME PERIOD SET
MOVE:JOG
->
->
->
->
->
4. HOLIDAY SET (JP.66)
Sets specific dates as
holidays to enable the
same operation as on
Sundays.
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
<HOLIDAY
-----------------------------------------
SEQUENCE
MASK
MOTION/ROI SENSOR
<WARNING>
CAMERA DETECT
CONTINUE?
NO
English
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
SET>
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
-----------------------------------------
5. TIME PERIOD SET (JP.67)
Uses a pair of time periods
<TIME PERIOD SET>
to set a time band for
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
automatic camera
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00
selection and the switching
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00
of masking and motion
sensor operations.
SELECT TIME PERIOD
z More languages can be added. Contact the dealer for
details.
2. CAMERA DETECT (JP.64)
Automatically detects
cameras that are
connected.
<TITLE SET>
CAMERA NO.01 ________01
SELECT:SHUTTLE
1. LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET
Sets the language
displayed on the monitor.
(JP.19)
Sets the date and time
displayed on the normal
screen and summer time.
(JP.20, 62) Automatically
aligns the time of all digital
video recorders when
multiple recorders are
connected. (JP.63)
Jog dial
61
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
T-4
00:00
00:00
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 62 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
INITIAL SET
4
Sets the language displayed on the monitor. (JP.19)
Turn the jog dial to select “MODE”
under <SUMMER TIME SET>.
Setting the time
Setting the summer time
Set the start and end date and time for summer time.
Press the [MENU] button.
5
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“USE” flashes.
MENU
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
3
Turn the jog dial to select “USE” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
CONTROL
6
SETTINGS
2
OPERATION
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
Set the time and date of the digital video recorder. (JP.20)
1
INTRODUCTION
Setting the language
The cursor moves to the date/time at which to switch to
summer time.
Turn the jog dial to select
“1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA> screen is
displayed.
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
NETWORK
OPERATION
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹USE
Time is not automatically adjusted to
summer time.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
NO USE
Description
Time is automatically adjusted to summer
time.
OTHER
62
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 63 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
7
INITIAL SET
Set the date and time.
External clock setting
Example: Set the summer time to begin at
3 April, 2005, 02:00.
Set the summer time to end
30 October, 2005, 02:00.
The clock display jumps forward one hour from 3 April, 2005,
01:59 to 03:00.
The clock display jumps back one hour from 30 October,
2005, 01:59 to 01:00.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Use the following procedure to align the time of all digital
video recorders daily when multiple recorders are connected.
(Default setting: 01:00)
At the set time, all connected recorders are aligned to the
same time to a precision of seconds.
1
(4)
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03 02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10 02:00
(5)
(6)
(7)
CLOCK OUT
CLOCK IN
C
CLOCK OUT
C
C
To C terminal
To CLOCK IN
terminal
(8)
Summer time begins
(1) Week, (2) Day of the week, (3) Month, (4) Time
Summer time ends
(5) Week, (6) Day of the week, (7) Month, (8) Time
2
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“LST” for “ON” flashes.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select the week summer time begins
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “SUN” for “ON”.
(3) Turn the jog dial to select the day of the week summer
time begins and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “03”.
(4) Turn the jog dial to select the month summer time begins
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “02”.
(5) Turn the jog dial to select the hour summer time begins
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “00”.
(6) Turn the jog dial to select the minute summer time begins
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to the end date and time.
(7) Use the same procedure to set the date and time summer
time ends.
8
Connect the CLOCK OUT terminal on
the rear of the first digital video
recorder to the CLOCK IN of the second
recorder.
MENU
3
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
4
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Turn the jog dial to select
“1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA> screen is
displayed.
EXIT/OSD
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
English
63
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 64 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
5
INITIAL SET
Turn the jog dial to select “ADJUST.
TIME” under <EXT. CLOCK SET> and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
1
Turn the jog dial to select the time and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
OPERATION
Automatically detect connected cameras and adjust the
following settings depending on the presence or absence of
cameras.
z Program record set (JP.85)
All settings for programs No. 1-4 are set to “1FPS” for
channels with cameras connected and “OFF” for channels
with no cameras connected.
z Automatic screen selection time period and monitor
settings (JP.128)
All settings for time periods T1-4 are set to “1S” for
channels with cameras connected and “OFF” for channels
with no cameras connected.
z Setting masks (JP.130)
All settings for time period T1 - 4 including main monitor,
monitor 2, and network are set to “OFF” for each channel.
“01” flashes.
The default setting is “01:00”.
6
INTRODUCTION
Detecting connected cameras
Press the [MENU] button.
Example: Set to 05:00.
SETTINGS
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
05:00
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
NETWORK
CONTROL
7
2
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting procedure for the first digital video recorder is
ended and the display returns to the normal screen.
EXIT/OSD
Use the same procedure to set the time
on the second recorder.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.CAMERA
DETECT” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
<WARNING>
CAMERA DETECT
CONTINUE?
NO
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z Set the time to the same time of the first digital video
recorder.
z When using the CLOCK OUT/IN terminals to set the time,
use the same power source for each DVR unit. When
turning the power off, do so for all devices at the same
time. Otherwise, times will be out of sync.
NETWORK
OPERATION
8
3
z The minutes and seconds cannot be set for “ADJUST.
TIME”.
OTHER
64
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 65 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
4
INITIAL SET
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Example: Setting the title “HALL-1STFL” for Camera No. 3.
1
Connected cameras are automatically detected.
When detection is completed, the display returns to the
<INITIAL SET> screen.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
CAMERA DETECT !
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
5
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The display returns to the normal screen.
EXIT/OSD
3
Setting camera titles
Turn the jog dial to select “3.TITLE SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The title setting field is displayed on the monitoring screen.
The default setting is “-----01” (camera No.).
Use the following procedure to set a unique title for each
camera so that these titles can be displayed on-screen.
<TITLE SET>
z Titles can be up to 10 characters in length per camera.
The following characters can be used.
z Letters: A to Z
z Numbers: 0 to 9
z Symbols: - : . / * _ (space)
z Numbers can also be entered by using the [CAMERA
SELECT] buttons 1 through 9 or the [QUAD] button.
[CAMERA SELECT] Buttons
Characters that can be entered
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
QUAD
0
CAMERA NO.01 ________01
4
Press the No. 3 [CAMERA SELECT]
button.
The video from Camera No. 3 is displayed on-screen.
<TITLE SET>
CAMERA NO.03 ________03
5
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The first character position in the title flashes.
CAMERA NO.03 ________03
English
65
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 66 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
6
INITIAL SET
Turn the jog dial to select “H”.
<TITLE SET>
INTRODUCTION
Setting holidays
Characters change in the following sequence as the jog dial is
turned.
Use the following procedure to set specific dates as holidays
to enable the same timer recording operation for Sunday to be
used on those days.
Dates such as national holidays and company holidays should
be set as holidays when those dates are to have the same
security as Sundays.
[KEY]
CAMERA NO.03 H_______03
OPERATION
z Be sure to always switch “SET” to “ON” after completing
timer settings for Sunday. (JP.185)
A
Z
(space)
*
-
9
/
.
Settings for
Sunday
:
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The character is set and the cursor moves one position to the
right.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SETTINGS
7
0
Example: Setting 26 October as a holiday
1
CAMERA NO.03 H_______03
Press the [MENU] button.
MENU
z When changing a character in the title, move the cursor to
that character by turning the shuttle dial clockwise or
counter-clockwise and then re-enter the character.
9
Repeat the above steps to enter the
remaining characters.
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
NETWORK
OPERATION
8
2
Press [EXIT/OSD] button after all digits
are set.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
3
EXIT/OSD
<HOLIDAY
-----------------------------------------
SET>
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
-----------------------------------------
OTHER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Turn the jog dial to select “4.HOLIDAY
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <HOLIDAY SET> screen is displayed.
The default setting is “-----”.
66
NETWORK
CONTROL
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 67 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
4
INITIAL SET
Set the day and month for item 1.
Holiday setting
number
1. -----
Setting time periods
Use the following procedure to specify four different time
periods per day (for instance, early morning, morning,
lunchtime and evening) to set up automatic screen selection,
masking and motion sensor operations, and other operations.
Use TIME PERIOD A and TIME PERIOD B to make operation
settings. For example, it is possible to set TIME PERIOD A for
automatic screen selection and TIME PERIOD B for the
masking of monitor video using a gray pattern.
Month
Day
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“--” (day) flashes.
1. -----
Example: For DSR-5016P
„ Morning to lunchtime: 6:00 to 11:00
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “26” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“--” (month) flashes.
Cameras No. 2, 4, 5, 7, 10 and 16 are masked.
1. 26--(3) Turn the jog dial to select “10” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “2”.
1. 26-10
2. -----
5
6
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
„ Lunchtime: 11:00 to 13:00
Cameras No. 1, 4, 6, 11, 12, 13 and 14 are masked.
Use the same procedure to set other
holidays.
01
02
03
04
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
„ Lunchtime to evening: 13:00 to 20:00
Automatic selection is performed for Cameras No. 1, 5, 9 and
12.
z If a day is selected in February, April, June, September or
November that does not exist (see table below), this is
changed automatically to the last day of the month.
Month
Non-existent day
Day changed to
(last day of the
month)
2
30, 31
28 (29 on leap year)
4, 6, 9, 11
31
30
01
05
09
12
„ Evening to morning: 20:00 to 6:00
Automatic selection is performed for Cameras No. 1, 8 and
16.
01
08
16
English
67
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 68 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
INITIAL SET
The above examples are set as follows.
INTRODUCTION
Operations during the specified time periods
<TIME PERIOD SET> screen
z TIME PERIOD A
T-1=6:00, T-2=13:00, T-3=20:00, T-4=00:00
z TIME PERIOD B
T-1=6:00, T-2=11:00, T-3=13:00, T-4=00:00
z SEQUENCE
“TIME PERIOD A”
z MASK
“TIME PERIOD B”
The following menu settings must be made to enable
operation of the time periods. After completing these settings,
be sure to then carry out the timer setting.
„ Setting automatic selection of camera video
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET> screen
z T-1
All “OFF”
z T-2
“OFF” except cameras No. 1, 5, 9 and 12
z T-3
“OFF” except cameras No. 1, 8 and 16
OPERATION
Select the camera to be automatically selected to display
video and set the switching interval.
To do this, set “SEQUENCE SET” from the <SCREEN SET>
screen. (JP.128)
<MASK SET> screen
z T-1
“ON” for cameras No. 2, 4, 5, 7, 10 and 16.
z T-2
“ON” for cameras No. 1, 4, 6, 11, 12, 13 and 14.
z T-3
All “OFF”
SETTINGS
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
„ Masking camera video using a gray pattern
Use “MASK” from the <SCREEN SET> screen to specify
which cameras are to be displayed on the monitor and which
are not. (JP.130)
NETWORK
CONTROL
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
Set “MOTION SENSOR” from the <ALARM REC MODE
SET> screen. (JP.99)
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 15FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
NETWORK
OPERATION
„ Alarm recording using motion sensors
OTHER
68
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 69 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
INITIAL SET
4
Timer period settings
Example 1: Setting periods using TIME PERIOD A and
TIME PERIOD B
z TIME PERIOD A
T-1=6:00
T-2=11:30
T-3=13:30
T-4=18:00
z TIME PERIOD B
T-1=6:00
T-2=8:00
T-3=14:30
T-4=20:00
1
“00:” for T-1 flashes (indicating the hour).
<TIME PERIOD SET>
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
SELECT TIME PERIOD
SEQUENCE
MASK
MOTION/ROI SENSOR
<TIME PERIOD SET>
[KEY]
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
SELECT TIME PERIOD
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
5
Set the time for T-1.
(1) Turn the jog dial to select “06” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“:00” for T-1 flashes (indicating the minutes).
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“00:” for T-2 flashes (indicating the hour).
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
6
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “TIME
PERIOD A” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
Set the time for T-2.
(1) Turn the jog dial to select “11” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“:00” for T-2 flashes (indicating the minutes).
Turn the jog dial to select “1.INITIAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<TIME PERIOD SET>
[KEY]
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 06:00 11:00 00:00 00:00
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
The <INITIAL SET> screen is displayed.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “30” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“00:” for T-3 flashes (indicating the hour).
3
7
Turn the jog dial to select “5.TIME
PERIOD SET” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
8
The <TIME PERIOD SET> screen is displayed.
<TIME PERIOD SET>
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
SELECT TIME PERIOD
SEQUENCE
MASK
MOTION/ROI SENSOR
Use the same procedure to set the hour
and minutes for T-1 to T-4 in TIME
PERIOD B.
z Settings for T-1 through T-4 cannot be made in such a way
that they extend over two days (i.e., include midnight). If
“00:00” (midnight) must be set, this should be done using
T-1.
Any setting of “00:00” for T-2 through T-4 is skipped.
Example: T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
06:00
12:00
18:00
00:00
In the above example, T-4 (00:00) is skipped and T-3
operates between 18:00 and 06:00.
z Furthermore, when T-1 through T-4 are all set to “00:00”,
all but T-1 are ignored and T-1 operates from midnight to
midnight the next day.
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
For both TIME PERIOD A and TIME PERIOD B, all settings
are “00:00” by default setting.
English
Use the same procedure to set the hour
and minutes for T-3 and T-4.
69
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 70 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
INITIAL SET
INTRODUCTION
Timer period operations settings
Example 2: Setting time period operation as follows.
Automatic selection and monitor masking for “TIME
PERIOD A”. (default setting)
Motion sensing for “TIME PERIOD B”.
9
OPERATION
Turn the jog dial to select “MOTION/ROI
SENSOR” within “SELECT TIME
PERIOD” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“TIME PERIOD A” flashes.
<TIME PERIOD SET>
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 06:00 11:30 13:30 18:00
TIME PERIOD B 06:00 08:00 14:30 20:00
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
SETTINGS
SELECT TIME PERIOD
SEQUENCE
MASK
MOTION/ROI SENSOR
10 Turn the jog dial to select “TIME
PERIOD B” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “TIME PERIOD A”.
NETWORK
CONTROL
<TIME PERIOD SET>
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 06:00 11:30 13:30 18:00
TIME PERIOD B 06:00 08:00 14:30 20:00
SELECT TIME PERIOD
SEQUENCE
MASK
MOTION/ROI SENSOR
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD B
NETWORK
OPERATION
11 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z Automatic selection, masking, and motion sensors are all
set to “TIME PERIOD A” by default setting.
z For the above settings, “SEQUENCE” indicates automatic
screen selection period and monitor settings (JP.128),
“MASK” indicates mask settings (JP.130), and “MOTION/
ROI SENSOR” indicates motion sensor settings (JP.99)
and ROI settings (JP.139).
OTHER
70
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 71 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
FULL indicator
MAIN MENU
[EXIT/OSD] button
Shuttle dial
[FUNC.] button
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
[MENU] button
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
[CAMERA SELECT] button
The following settings can be made with <RECORD SET>.
MOVE:JOG
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE : 12.5 FPS ( 166H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
5. PROGRAM REC SET (JP.85)
Sets program recording for
cameras.
1. NORMAL REC EASY SET (JP.72)
Makes basic settings
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>
based on a number of
days or a recording rate.
RECORDING DURATION BASE
->
REC RATE BASE
->
2. RECORDING AREA SET (JP.77)
Displays the total capacity
<RECORDING AREA SET>
of the hard disk and sets
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
the ratio of the recording
INTERNAL HDD
:
area to the archive area.
EXTERNAL HDD
:
:
1200GB
500GB
700GB
80 %
:
20 %
6. TIMER SET (JP.87)
Makes timer settings so
that operations can be
started at a specified time
or on a specified day.
->
->
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
English
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
NORMAL REC :
57H
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
7. ALARM REC MODE SET (JP.93)
Sets alarm recording, pre<ALARM REC MODE SET>
alarm recording, and
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
motion sensors.
3. RECORDING CONDITIONS SET (JP.80)
Sets whether overwriting is
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
performed (by deleting old
RECORDING AREA
video) or recording is
OVERWRITE
: ON
stopped when the hard
ARCHIVE AREA
disk recording areas
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
become full. Also sets the
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1%
auto delete.
AUTO DELETE
<PROGRAM REC SET>
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
CAUTION !
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME
BEFORE SETUP
RECORDING AREA
AREA FULL RESET
ARCHIVE AREA
AREA FULL RESET
Jog dial
4. NORMAL REC MODE SET (JP.83)
Sets the picture quality,
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
audio recording, recording
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
rate, and program period.
Configuration
<RECORD SET>
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET
2.RECORDING AREA SET
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET
5.PROGRAM REC SET
6.TIMER SET
7.ALARM REC MODE SET
8.ALARM OPERATION SET
[TIMER] button
PICTURE QUALITY
PICTURE QUALITY SET
AUDIO RECORDING
ALARM INTERLEAVE
REC RATE: 12.5FPS,
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
REC RATE: ***** FPS,
ALARM TRIGGER
MOTION SENSOR
: OFF
71
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
: ENHANCED
->
: OFF
: ONLY
DURATION: 20SEC
: ***
DURATION: *****
: ALARM
->
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 72 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
3
Turn the jog dial to select “1.NORMAL
REC EASY SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
8. ALARM OPERATION SET (JP.102)
Makes settings for
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
operation and display upon
ALARM RETRIGGER
: OFF
detecting an alarm.
The <NORMAL REC EASY SET> screen is displayed.
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>
->
REC RATE BASE
->
Use the following procedure to make simple recording
settings. Two different setting methods may be used -- one
based on recording days, the other based on recording rate.
4
Turn the jog dial to select “RECORDING
DURATION BASE” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
SETTINGS
The <RECORDING DURATION BASE> screen is displayed.
The number of detected cameras is indicated by “NUMBER
OF CAMERAS”.
z When easy setup settings and individual settings are both
set, the most recent settings override previous settings.
z Easy setup settings are cancelled as a result of the
following operations.
(1) When the number of cameras detected using “CAMERA
DETECT” differs from the number of cameras previously
set in the digital video recorder.
(2) When menu settings are loaded from a CompactFlash
card.
(3) When a new easy setup setting is performed.
(4) When setting values are changed for normal recording or
timer recording.
(5) When the recording area is changed using the
<RECORDING AREA SET> screen.
(6) When the mirroring setting is changed using the <HDD
SET> screen.
(7) When replacing or expanding the hard disk.
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : -- DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NETWORK
CONTROL
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
:2
: ---- FPS/CAM
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
5
MENU
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“1” flashes.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
:2
: 30.000FPS/CAM
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NETWORK
OPERATION
z Confirm that the number of cameras connected to the
digital video recorder is the same as the number of
displayed recording cameras. If this is not the case, check
the wiring between cameras and the digital video recorder
and then perform “CAMERA DETECT”. (JP.64)
Setting based on recording days
2
OPERATION
CAUTION !
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME
BEFORE SETUP
Normal recording easy setup
1
RECORDING DURATION BASE
OTHER
72
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 73 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
6
RECORD SET
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the jog dial to select the
“RECORDING DURATION” setting and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ENHANCED” flashes.
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : ON
START 08:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
The cursor moves to “TIMER RECORDING (DLY)”.
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
:2
: 60.000FPS/CAM
:2
: 60.000FPS/CAM
11 Turn the jog dial to select the “PICTURE
7
QUALITY” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “AUDIO RECORDING”.
“OFF” flashes.
8
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : ON
START 08:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
:2
: 60.000FPS/CAM
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
To activate timer operation, turn the jog
dial to select “ON” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Setting
The cursor moves to “START”.
9
Basic
NORMAL
Normal
Enhanced
FINE
Fine
SUPER FINE
Super Fine
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
:2
: 60.000FPS/CAM
“OFF” flashes.
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : ON
START 08:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
Set the time for timer recording.
Example: Timer recording from 8 AM to 8 PM
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial
to select “08” (hour).
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial
to select “00” (minutes).
(3) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial
to select “20” (hour).
(4) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, turn the jog dial to select
“00” (minutes) and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise
again.
The cursor moves to “PICTURE QUALITY”.
English
Description
BASIC
‹ENHANCED
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : ON
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
:2
: 60.000FPS/CAM
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
73
:2
: 60.000FPS/CAM
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 74 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
13 Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
16 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Example: ON
EXIT/OSD
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : 1 DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : ON
START 08:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
z The recording rate is automatically calculated based on
recording settings and the number of connected cameras,
and this is indicated by “REC RATE”. All cameras record at
this rate. If a valid figure cannot be calculated, “ERROR!” is
displayed.
z When easy setup settings and individual settings are both
set, the most recent settings override previous settings.
z Easy setup settings cannot be used with program
recording or day-specific timer recording.
:2
: A60.000FPS/CAM
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Audio is recorded.
Setting based on recording rate
1
SETTINGS
ON
Description
Audio is not recorded.
OPERATION
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
‹OFF
INTRODUCTION
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
z Audio recording can only be specified when the recording
rate is 1 FPS or greater.
z When set to “ON”, the letter “A” (indicating that audio is
recorded) is displayed in front of the recording rate. As
both video and audio is stored in the recording area, the
recording capacity decreases.
MENU
14 Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
NETWORK
CONTROL
2
<WARNING>
REC RATE SETTING IN THE MENU WILL BE
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.
CHANGE:JOG
3
SET:SHUTTLE
15 Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
Turn the jog dial to select “1.NORMAL
REC EASY SETUP” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
OPERATION
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
The <NORMAL REC EASY SET> screen is displayed.
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>
RECORDING DURATION BASE
->
REC RATE BASE
->
RECORDING DURATION BASE
->
REC RATE BASE
->
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>
The display returns to the <NORMAL REC EASY SET>
screen.
CAUTION !
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME
BEFORE SETUP
OTHER
CAUTION !
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME
BEFORE SETUP
74
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 75 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
4
RECORD SET
Turn the jog dial to select “REC RATE
BASE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
[Settings] (“----” indicates default setting)
Setting
25, 16.67, 12.5, 8.333,
6.25, 5, 4.167, 3.571,
3.125, 2.778, 2.5, 2.273,
Recording is performed at the
1.923, 1.667, 1.471,
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
1.316, 1.19, 1.087, 1, 0.5,
0.333, 0.25, 0.2, 0.1, 0.05,
0.033
The <REC RATE BASE> screen is displayed.
The number of detected cameras is indicated by “NUMBER
OF CAMERAS”.
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: ---- FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
7
:1
: ---- DAYS
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
8
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
To activate timer operation, turn the jog
dial to select “ON” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
:25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : ON
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
:1
: 11 DAYS
Turn the jog dial to select the “REC
RATE” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “TIMER RECORDING (DLY)”.
Set the recording rate for each individual camera.
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
English
:1
: 11 DAYS
The cursor moves to “START”.
“25” flashes.
6
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
z Confirm that the number of cameras connected to the
digital video recorder is the same as the number of
displayed recording cameras. If this is not the case, check
the wiring between cameras and the digital video recorder
and then perform “CAMERA DETECT”. (JP.64)
5
Description
:1
: 11 DAYS
75
:1
: 11 DAYS
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 76 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
9
RECORD SET
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Set the time for timer recording.
“OFF” flashes.
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : ON
START 08:00
STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
OPERATION
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise. (JP.74)
:1
: 23 DAYS
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
“ENHANCED” flashes.
:1
:
23 DAYS
14 Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
:1
: 23 DAYS
<WARNING>
NETWORK
CONTROL
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : ON
START 08:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
SETTINGS
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : ON
START 00:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
:1
: 23 DAYS
13 Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : ON
START 08:00
STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
INTRODUCTION
Example: Timer recording from 8 AM to 8 PM
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial
to select “08” (hour).
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial
to select “00” (minutes).
(3) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise and then turn the jog dial
to select “20” (hour).
(4) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise, turn the jog dial to select
“00” (minutes) and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise
again.
The cursor moves to “PICTURE QUALITY”.
REC RATE SETTING IN THE MENU WILL BE
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.
11 Turn the jog dial to select the “PICTURE
The cursor moves to “AUDIO RECORDING”.
CHANGE:JOG
15 Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: 25 FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : ON
START 08:00 STOP 20:00
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The display returns to the <NORMAL REC EASY SET>
screen.
:1
: 23 DAYS
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>
RECORDING DURATION BASE
->
REC RATE BASE
->
NETWORK
SETTINGS
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
SET:SHUTTLE
NETWORK
OPERATION
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
QUALITY” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise. (JP.73)
CAUTION !
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME
BEFORE SETUP
OTHER
76
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 77 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
16 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
3
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Turn the jog dial to select
“2.RECORDING AREA SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <RECORDING AREA SET> screen is displayed.
EXIT/OSD
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
EXTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
z The recording duration is automatically calculated based
on recording settings and the number of connected
cameras, and this is indicated by “RECORDING
DURATION”. If a valid figure cannot be calculated,
“ERROR!” is displayed.
z When easy setup settings and individual settings are both
set, the most recent settings override previous settings.
z Easy setup settings cannot be used with program
recording or day-specific timer recording.
20 %
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
(1)
Displays the total
capacity of the hard disk.
(2)
Displays the internal
hard disk capacity.
Use the following procedures to confirm the hard disk’s total
recording capacity and also the allocation for each recording
area.
(3)
Displays the expansion
unit hard disk capacity.
1
(4)
Sets the capacity of the
recording areas.
(5)
Displays the capacity of
the archive area
Displaying the recording areas
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
1200GB
500GB
700GB
80 %
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Recording
area
Archive
area
z When the recording area allocation is changed, the hard
disk is initialized and all previous recordings are deleted. It
is important, therefore, to store recorded video on a PC or
some other storage media before modifying recording
areas.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
z The capacity of each hard disk can be checked using the
<HDD SET> screen. (JP.117, 119)
English
77
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 78 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
4
„ Default hard disk settings
“80%” flashes.
20%
20
A Recording
area
Hard disk recording areas
1200GB
500GB
700GB
80 %
20 %
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
Changing recording areas
5
„ Recording area allocations
The maximum allocation for the recording area is 99%.
The allocation for the archive area cannot be set manually.
When the recording area is modified, the archive area is
automatically reconfigured (minimum of 1%).
Turn the jog dial to set the
“RECORDING AREA” to “50” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
SETTINGS
The archive area is automatically set to 50%.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed. A message is
displayed indicating that the hard disk is to be initialized.
Example: Setting the recording area to 50%
<WARNING>
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
THIS CHANGE WILL INITIALIZE THE DISK.
ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED.
ARE YOU SURE ?
MENU
CHANGE:JOG
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
6
SET:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “YES”.
NETWORK
CONTROL
NO
2
OPERATION
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
EXTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
80%
1
INTRODUCTION
B Archive area
Turn the jog dial to select “RECORDING
AREA” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
<WARNING>
3
YES
Turn the jog dial to select
“2.RECORDING AREA SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
CHANGE:JOG
SET:SHUTTLE
z If the shuttle dial is turned clockwise with “NO” selected,
the <RECORDING AREA SET> screen is displayed. In
other words, the new settings are not applied.
1200GB
500GB
700GB
80 %
NETWORK
SETTINGS
The <RECORDING AREA SET> screen is displayed.
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
EXTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
NETWORK
OPERATION
THIS CHANGE WILL INITIALIZE THE DISK.
ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED.
ARE YOU SURE ?
20 %
OTHER
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
78
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 79 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
7
RECORD SET
3
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
After the hard disk is initialized, the <RECORD SET> screen
appears and the new recording capacity setting is applied.
Turn the jog dial to select
“2.RECORDING AREA SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <RECORDING AREA SET> screen is displayed.
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
EXTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
HDD INITIALIZING !
8
1200GB
500GB
700GB
80 %
20 %
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
4
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
Turn the jog dial to select “AREA FULL
RESET” under “RECORDING AREA”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
To perform “AREA FULL RESET” for the archive area, select
“AREA FULL RESET” under “ARCHIVE AREA”.
Setting overwrite permission
<WARNING>
When “OVERWRITE” is set to “OFF” for recording conditions
and the recording areas become full, recording is
automatically stopped. In this case, overwrite permission can
be used to overwrite previous recordings.
1
AREA FULL RESET
ARCHIVE AREA
ARE YOU SURE ?
Press the [MENU] button.
NO
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MOVE:JOG
MENU
2
5
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Recordings can now be made to the recording area.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
: 1200GB
INTERNAL HDD
:
500GB
EXTERNAL HDD
:
700GB
RECORDING AREA
:
80%
AREA FULL RESET
->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
20%
AREA FULL RESET
->
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
CAUTION : WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
6
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
English
79
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 80 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
4
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
Setting recording conditions
5
AUTO DELETE
: OFF
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Setting
Press the [MENU] button.
OFF
‹ON
MENU
Description
Recording is stopped when the normal
recording area becomes full.
Overwriting automatically starts from the
beginning of the recording area when it
becomes full.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“MANUAL COPY” flashes.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
: 1%
AUTO DELETE
: OFF
NETWORK
OPERATION
Turn the jog dial to select
“3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
REMAINING DISK WARNING
NETWORK
CONTROL
6
SETTINGS
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
3
: 1%
The cursor moves to “MODE” in “ARCHIVE AREA”.
Example: The recording areas and archive area are set so
as not to perform overwriting.
2
REMAINING DISK WARNING
OPERATION
Use the following procedure to set whether to overwrite the
old video with the new one or stop recording when the hard
disk recording area becomes full. In the latter case, the
remaining capacity is shown as a percentage on the operation
display. A setting can also be made so that the FULL indicator
flashes when the remaining capacity falls to a specific
percentage.
Also set to copy images to the archive area manually (JP.50)
or automatically copy only alarm recordings.
1
INTRODUCTION
“ON” flashes for “OVERWRITE” under “RECORDING AREA”.
z When “AREA FULL RESET” is performed for
“RECORDING AREA”, the recordings in the recording area
are overwritten.
z When “AREA FULL RESET” is performed for “ARCHIVE
AREA”, the recordings in the archive area are deleted.
The <RECORDING CONDITIONS SET> screen is displayed.
REMAINING DISK WARNING
: 1%
AUTO DELETE
: OFF
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
OTHER
80
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 81 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
7
RECORD SET
9
Turn the jog dial to select the mode
value and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“1%” flashes.
When “AUTO ALARM COPY” is selected, the <WARNING>
screen is displayed.
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
<WARNING>
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1 %
REC RATE SETTING IN THE MENU WILL BE
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.
ARCHIVE AREA INITIALIZE!
AUTO DELETE
: OFF
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
CHANGE:JOG
10 Turn the jog dial to select the
SET:SHUTTLE
“REMAINING DISK WARNING” setting
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
The remaining capacity can be set anywhere between 1%
(default setting) and 10%.
Description
‹MANUAL COPY Manually copy recording images (JP.50).
AUTO ALARM
COPY
Automatically copy alarm recordings to the
archive area.
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
When “AUTO ALARM COPY” is changed to “MANUAL
COPY” the following <WARNING> screen is displayed.
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1 %
<WARNING>
AUTO DELETE
: OFF
AREA FULL RESET
ARCHIVE AREA
11 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
MOVE:JOG
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
EXIT/OSD
If “MANUAL COPY” is unchanged, the cursor moves to
“REMAINING DISK WARNING”. Proceed to step 9.
8
The FULL indicator flashes when the remaining capacity for
the recording areas reaches the specified percentage value.
When the FULL indicator flashes or the recording areas
become full, use overwrite permission. (JP.79)
To initialize, select “YES” with the jog
dial and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
FULL indicator
To not initialize, select “NO” and turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Operation display
Remaining
capacity
display
01-01-05 00:00:00 REC 5% EN A ALARM 0000000
02
English
81
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 82 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
INTRODUCTION
Setting auto deleting
z The archive area cannot be automatically overwritten. Set
overwrite permission (JP.79) when the recording area is full.
z The recording rate automatically changes to 50FPS when
setting “AUTO ALARM COPY” for “ARCHIVE AREA”.
• When the alarm recording setting is 100 FPS for the
recording rate (JP.93)
• When the program setting total exceeds 50 FPS
Use the following procedure to set the storage period for
recorded data.
When the set period has expired, the corresponding data
cannot be played back.
1
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
OPERATION
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
SETTINGS
3
The <RECORDING CONDITIONS SET> screen is displayed.
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
:1%
AUTO DELETE
: OFF
Turn the jog dial to select “AUTO
DELETE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
REMAINING DISK WARNING
NETWORK
CONTROL
Turn the jog dial to select
“3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1 %
AUTO DELETE
: OFF
OTHER
82
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 83 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
5
RECORD SET
3
Turn the jog dial to select the storage
period for the data and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Set the storage period for recorded data to “OFF” or within the
range of “1 DAY - 99 DAYS” (full days).
Turn the jog dial to select “4.NORMAL
REC MODE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <NORMAL REC MODE SET> screen is displayed.
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE : 12.5 FPS ( 166H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1 %
AUTO DELETE
6
: OFF
4
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ENHANCED” flashes.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE : 12.5 FPS ( 166H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
EXIT/OSD
Setting normal recording
Use the following procedure to make normal recording
settings for picture quality, audio recording and recording rate.
Alternatively, a program number set using “PROGRAM REC
SET” can be specified to set these parameters.
1
5
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select the “PICTURE
QUALITY” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “AUDIO RECORDING”.
MENU
2
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE : 12.5 FPS ( 166H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
BASIC (BA)
Basic
NORMAL (NO)
Normal
‹ENHANCED (EN)
FINE (FI)
English
83
Description
Enhanced
Fine
SUPER FINE (SF)
Super Fine
INDIV.
Picture quality is set for each camera.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 84 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
„ Setting the picture quality for each camera
CHANNEL
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
NORMAL REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ALARM REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
8
CHANNEL
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NORMAL REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ALARM REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“12.5 FPS” flashes.
9
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the jog dial to select the “REC
RATE” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “REC PROGRAM GROUP”.
(Default setting: 12.5 FPS)
The allowable recording time depends on the “PICTURE
QUALITY” setting. (JP.83)
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE : 12.5 FPS ( 166H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
Turn the jog dial to select the “AUDIO
RECORDING” setting (ON/OFF) and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
OPERATION
Allowable
recording
time
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE : A 12.5 FPS ( 156H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE : A 12.5 FPS ( 156H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
NETWORK
SETTINGS
100, 50, 25, 16.67,
‹12.5, 8.333, 6.25, 5,
4.167, 3.571, 3.125,
Recording is performed at the
2.778, 2.5, 2.273, 1.923,
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
1.667, 1.471, 1.316, 1.19,
1.087, 1, 0.5, 0.333, 0.25,
0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.033
(Default setting: OFF)
NETWORK
CONTROL
“OFF” flashes.
SETTINGS
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE :A 12.5 FPS ( 156H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
(3) Turn the jog dial to select the camera number and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“EN” flashes.
(4) Turn the jog dial to select the picture quality and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to the next camera number.
(5) Set the picture quality for the other cameras in the same
way.
(6) Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
The display returns to the <NORMAL REC MODE SET>
screen.
7
OPERATION
z Set when the audio recording rate range is set to above A1
FPS.
z When set to “ON”, the letter “A” (indicating that audio will
be recorded) is displayed in front of “REC RATE”. As both
video and audio is stored in the recording area, the
recording capacity decreases.
z Audio can only be played back at the same rate during
recording.
z Playback of audio and video may be out of sync in some
areas.
<PICTURE QUALITY SET>
6
INTRODUCTION
(1) Select “INDIV.” and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “PICTURE QUALITY SET”.
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <PICTURE QUALITY SET> screen is displayed.
On the DSR-5009P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹OFF
Audio is recorded.
OTHER
ON
Description
Audio is not recorded.
84
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 85 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
Setting program recording
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 or 100 FPS is set.
z When four cameras are connected and 100 FPS is set,
recording is performed at the recording rate close to the set
rate (100 FPS) divided by the number of cameras.
(Example: When 8 cameras are connected and the
recording rate setting is 100 FPS, the actual recording rate
is 12.5 FPS)
Use the following procedure to program the camera numbers
for recording. Four programs can be set. For example,
Program No. 1 could be setup to record from cameras No. 1
through No. 4 only, whereas Program No. 2 could be setup to
record from cameras No. 3 through No. 6. In addition, these
programs can also be used for timer recording.
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
z Even if audio recording is set to “ON” using the <NORMAL
REC MODE SET> screen, certain settings for program
recording may make audio recording impossible. Set more
than one of the 16 channels to 1 FPS or greater to record
audio.
On the DSR-5009P, set more than one of the nine
channels.
“OFF” flashes.
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE : A 12.5 FPS ( 156H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: OFF
<PROGRAM REC SET>
(1)
(2)
11 Turn the jog dial to select the “REC
NORMAL REC :
PROGRAM GROUP” number and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<NORMAL REC MODE SET>
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE : ***** FPS (
0H)
REC PROGRAM GROUP
: P-1
Example: Setting Program No. 1 to record video only from
cameras No. 1 through No. 3 at a recording rate of 5
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹OFF
1
Description
Used when recording with Program No. 1.
P-2
Used when recording with Program No. 2.
P-3
Used when recording with Program No. 3.
P-4
Used when recording with Program No. 4.
MENU
2
12 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
EXIT/OSD
English
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Video from all cameras is recorded at the
same rate.
P-1
57H
(1) PROGRAM
Selects Program No. 1 through Program No. 4.
(2) SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE
Sets which of the connected cameras to record from.
Recording rates can also be set for each camera.
Example: P-1
Setting
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
85
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 86 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
3
RECORD SET
7
Turn the jog dial to select “5” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Camera No. 1 is now set to record at a rate of 5.
The cursor moves to “02”.
The <PROGRAM REC SET> screen is displayed.
<PROGRAM REC SET>
<PROGRAM REC SET>
4
NORMAL REC :
57H
57H
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Setting
“P-1” flashes for “PROGRAM”.
SETTINGS
OFF
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
NORMAL REC :
Description
25, 12.5, 6.25, 3.125,
Recording is performed at the
1.563, ‹1, 0.5, 0.333,
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
0.25, 0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.033
<PROGRAM REC SET>
Recording rate is not set.
z When the set recording rate total exceeds 25 FPS, the
actual recording rate is restricted to 25 FPS.
57H
8
Turn the jog dial to select a
“PROGRAM” number (for example, P-1)
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “01” under “SELECT INDIVIDUAL
CAMERA RATE (FPS)”.
Use the same procedure to set the
recording rates for cameras No. 2 and 3,
and set the recording rate to “OFF” for
cameras No. 4 through 16.
NETWORK
CONTROL
5
OPERATION
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:5
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
NORMAL REC :
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select “5.PROGRAM
REC SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
On the DSR-5009P, set the recording rate to “OFF” for
cameras No. 4 through 9.
<PROGRAM REC SET>
<PROGRAM REC SET>
NORMAL REC :
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE
01:5
02:5
03:5
05:OFF
06:OFF
07:OFF
09:OFF
10:OFF
11:OFF
13:OFF
14:OFF
15:OFF
57H
NORMAL REC :
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
9
“1” flashes.
57H
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
<PROGRAM REC SET>
EXIT/OSD
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
OTHER
NORMAL REC :
(FPS)
04:OFF
08:OFF
12:OFF
16:OFF
NETWORK
SETTINGS
6
NETWORK
OPERATION
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
57H
86
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 87 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
Timer settings
Making timer reservations every day or every
week for the same duration with the same
recording rate
Use the following procedures to set recording start and stop
times using the timer function.
1
Timer setting items
Timer setting items can be used to set times at which to start
and stop recording and the recording rate on each specified
day of the week.
(1) (2) (3)
(7)
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
(4)
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
(5)
(6)
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
(1) WEEK
This column is used to select the days of the week for timer
settings. Select “DLY” to perform timer recording for the same
duration at the same rate every day. The 7th (default: “SAT”)
and 8th (default: “DLY”) lines are used for timer recording
settings of over 24 hours.
(2) START
This column is used to enter the 24-hour time at which to start
timer recording.
(3) STOP
This column is used to enter the 24-hour time at which to stop
timer recording.
If the start and end times are on different days (i.e., midnight
is included), a “T” is displayed to the left of the end time.
(4) PROGRAM
This column is used to enable timer recording using the
program function “P-1” through “P-4”. (JP.85)
(5) FPS
This column is used to set the recording rate.
No setting is required here when using program recording.
(6) SET
This column is used to set timer recording to “ON” or “OFF”.
When set to “OFF”, timer recording is disabled.
(7) Settings for timer recording of over 24 hours
Use these lines for timer recording spanning more than 24
hours.
3
Turn the jog dial to select “6.TIMER
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <TIMER SET> screen is displayed.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
4
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“SUN” flashes.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
z The settings made using <NORMAL REC MODE SET>
are used to set picture quality and audio recording for timer
recording. (JP.83)
z Ensure that start and end times are input using 24-hour
notation.
z If the start and end times are on different days (i.e.,
midnight is included), a “T” is displayed to the left of the
end time.
English
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
87
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 88 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
5
RECORD SET
8
“--” (indicating the hour) from “START” flashes.
6
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
“OFF” flashes for “SET”.
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
Setting
The cursor appears in the bottom line.
‹OFF
Description
Video from all cameras is recorded at the
same rate.
P-1
Used when recording with Program No. 1.
P-2
Used when recording with Program No. 2.
P-3
Used when recording with Program No. 3.
P-4
Used when recording with Program No. 4.
START
18:30
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
23:15
OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NETWORK
SETTINGS
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Turn the jog dial to set the timer “ON”/
“OFF”, and turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
NETWORK
OPERATION
9
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NETWORK
CONTROL
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
Description
SETTINGS
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
23:15
OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 or 100 FPS are set.
z When two or more cameras are connected and 50 or 100
FPS is set, the actual recording rate is roughly the
recording rate divided by the number of cameras.
(Example: When 8 cameras are connected and the
recording rate setting is 100 FPS, the actual recording rate
is 12.5 FPS)
“12.5” flashes when “OFF” is selected.
When something other than “OFF” is selected, “FPS”
becomes “*****” and “OFF” flashes for “SET”.
Proceed to step 9.
START
18:30
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
100, 50, 25, 16.67,
‹12.5, 8.333, 6.25, 5,
4.167, 3.571, 3.125,
Recording is performed at the
2.778, 2.5, 2.273, 1.923,
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
1.667, 1.471, 1.316, 1.19,
1.087, 1, 0.5, 0.333, 0.25,
0.2, 0.1, 0.05, 0.033
Turn the jog dial to select the
“PROGRAM” value and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
23:15
OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting the “START” and “STOP” time.
Example: Setting a start time of 6:30 PM and an end time
of 11:15 PM
(1) Turn the jog dial and set “18” (indicating the hour), and
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(Also use 1-9 on the [CAMERA SELECT] button or the
[QUAD] button (0) to input.)
(2) Turn the jog dial and set “30” (indicating the minutes),
and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(3) Set the hours and minutes likewise for “STOP”
“OFF” flashes.
7
START
18:30
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
OPERATION
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
Turn the jog dial to set the recording
rate and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to set the day, and turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
OTHER
88
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 89 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
10 Use the same procedure to set other
To cancel all set timer reservations
items.
1
„ To change a setting item
Turn the shuttle dial to select the item to be changed and then
turn the jog dial to change the setting.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
START
18:30
09:00
--:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
23:15
OFF
21:00
OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
11 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
3
EXIT/OSD
Turn the jog dial to select “6.TIMER
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <TIMER SET> screen is displayed.
z If timer settings overlap, recording is performed in the
following priority order.
Individual reservations
(High)
“DLY”
Priority
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
“EXT”
(Low)
z If a reservation for a particular day or a daily reservation
overlaps with each other, priority is given to that with the
earliest start time. If both have the same start time, priority
is given to that with the highest setting position in the
menu.
4
z Set specific dates as holidays to enable the same
operation as on Sunday. (JP.66)
START
09:00
09:00
09:00
09:00
09:00
--:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
21:00
OFF
21:00
OFF
21:00
OFF
21:00
OFF
21:00
OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
Press the [MENU RESET] button.
All setting items are cleared.
SHUTTLE
C
LE
AR
EN
T
ER
CARD
MENU
RESET
EJECT
English
89
[MENU RESET] button
SET
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 90 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
4
Use the following procedures to set timer recordings spanning
more than 24 hours. Perform in line 7 (default: “SAT”) and line
8 (default: “DLY”) of the <TIMER SET> screen.
Turn the jog dial to select line 7 (SAT)
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“SAT” in the “WEEK” column flashes.
Press the [MENU] button.
Line 7
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Make settings in the “WEEK” and
“START” columns.
(1) Turn the jog dial to select “MON” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“---” (hour) flashes.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
MON
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
--:--
--:--
OFF 12.5 FPS
SETTINGS
2
5
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
OPERATION
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
Example: A Program No. 1 timer recording from 10:30 AM
on Monday to 8:30 PM on Wednesday with a recording
rate of 5 FPS
1
INTRODUCTION
Timer recordings spanning more than 24 hours
OFF
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “10” (hour) and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
(3) Turn the jog dial to select “30” (minutes) and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
MON
Turn the jog dial to select “6.TIMER
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
6
The <TIMER SET> screen is displayed.
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
--:--
OFF 12.5 FPS
OFF
Turn the jog dial to set the end time to
“**” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The “DLY” item on line 8 automatically changes to “TUE” (i.e.,
the day after that set on line 7) and flashes. Items that do not
need to be set are indicated with asterisks (*).
10:30
**:**
**:**
--:--
*** *****FPS
OFF 12.5 FPS
***
OFF
NETWORK
SETTINGS
MON
TUE
NETWORK
OPERATION
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
10:30
NETWORK
CONTROL
3
OTHER
90
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 91 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
7
RECORD SET
Set “WEEK” and “STOP” to stop
recording and make the settings for
“FPS” and “SET”.
MON
WED
(1)
10:30 **:**
**:** T20:30
(2) (3)
Timer recording using an external timer
*** *****FPS
OFF
5FPS
***
ON
(4)
(6)
(5)
Use the following procedure to control the start and end of
recording in response to signals received via the EXT TIMER
IN terminal on the rear of the digital video recorder.
Example: Recording at a rate of 5 FPS using the EXT
TIMER IN terminal
1
(1) Turn the jog dial to select “WED” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “20” (hour) and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
(3) Turn the jog dial to select “30” (minutes) and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
(4) Turn the jog dial and set “OFF” (indicating program
recording) to “P-1” and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(5) Turn the jog dial to set “FPS” (recording rate) to “5” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(6) Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
8
Connect the signal line from the
external timer to the EXT TIMER IN
terminal within the rear panel control
terminal block.
External timer signal
External timer input
(with a pulse width of at least 1 second)
2
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
MENU
EXIT/OSD
3
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
4
Turn the jog dial to select “6.TIMER
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <TIMER SET> screen is displayed.
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
English
91
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 92 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
5
RECORD SET
9
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select line 9 (EXT)
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
“OFF” flashes.
EXIT/OSD
6
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Setting timer recording
Use the following procedure to activate or cancel timer
recording.
1
OFF
12.5 FPS OFF
z External timer recording and normal timer recording can be
combined.
z Connect the signal line from the external timer to the EXT
TIMER IN terminal. External timer recording is not possible
until a timer is connected.
Turn the jog dial to select “5” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
8
*****
*****
OFF
5FPS
NETWORK
OPERATION
EXT
NETWORK
CONTROL
7
*****
SETTINGS
z The TIMER indicator lights up and the digital video
recorder enters timer recording standby mode.
z Press the [TIMER] button once again to cancel timer
recording.
z “REC” is displayed in the operation display when a signal is
received (with a pulse width of at least 1 second) via the
EXT TIMER IN terminal, and monitoring video is recorded
in the recording area.
“12.5” flashes.
*****
Press the [TIMER] button.
TIMER
Turn the jog dial to select “OFF” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
EXT
OPERATION
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
OFF
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to line 1.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
EXT
*****
*****
OFF
5FPS
ON
OTHER
92
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 93 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
5
Setting alarm recording
To set alarm recording
Turn the jog dial to select the “ALARM
RECORDING” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “PICTURE QUALITY”.
Use the following procedure to select the picture quality, audio
recording and recording rate for alarm recording.
1
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 15FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Setting
‹OFF
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
3
Turn the jog dial to select “7.ALARM
REC MODE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
ENABLED
AL-REC ON
TIMER
Alarm recording is enabled only during
timer recording.
AL-REC OFF
TIMER
Alarm recording is enabled only when
timer recording is disabled.
OLY AL-RC
ON TMR
Alarm recording is enabled only during the
time set in the timer setting. Normal
recording is not enabled.
z When “ALARM RECORDING” is set to “OFF” the cursor
cannot move to another item.
6
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ENHANCED” flashes.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes for “ALARM RECORDING”.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
English
Alarm recording is disabled.
Alarm recording is enabled regardless of
whether or not timer recording is enabled.
* “OLY AL-RC ON TMR” can be enabled simply by making a
timer setting. Accordingly, there is no need to press the
[TIMER] button.
The <ALARM REC MODE SET> screen is displayed.
4
Description
93
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 94 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
7
RECORD SET
8
The cursor moves to “AUDIO RECORDING”.
Turn the jog dial to select “AUDIO
RECORDING” and turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
9
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Description
Basic
NORMAL (NO)
Normal
‹ENHANCED (EN)
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to “ALARM INTERLEAVE”.
Enhanced
FINE (FI)
Fine
SUPER FINE (SF)
Super Fine
INDIV.
Picture quality is set for each camera.
„ Setting the picture quality for each camera
(1) Select “INDIV.” and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “PICTURE QUALITY”.
(2) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <PICTURE QUALITY SET> screen is displayed.
On the DSR-5009P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
<PICTURE QUALITY SET>
‹OFF
CHANNEL
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
NORMAL REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ALARM REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ON
Audio is recorded.
z Audio recording is possible when “REC RATE” is set to 1
FPS or greater.
z When set to “ON”, the letter “A” (indicating that audio will
be recorded) is displayed in front of “REC RATE”.
(3) Turn the jog dial to select the camera number and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“EN” flashes.
(4) Turn the jog dial to select the picture quality and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to the next camera number.
(5) Set the picture quality for the other cameras in the same
way.
(6) Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
The display returns to the <ALARM REC MODE SET>
screen.
NETWORK
OPERATION
CHANNEL
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NORMAL REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ALARM REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
Description
Audio is not recorded.
NETWORK
CONTROL
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
SETTINGS
BASIC (BA)
OPERATION
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
Setting
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select the “PICTURE
QUALITY” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ONLY” flashes.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
OTHER
94
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 95 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
11 Turn the jog dial to select “SW” or
13 Turn the jog dial to select the “REC
The cursor moves to “REC RATE”.
The cursor moves to “DURATION”.
“ONLY” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
RATE” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Setting
Description
SW
Recording is switched between video from a
camera for which an alarm has occurred and
video from all connected cameras.
‹ONLY
Video is recorded only from cameras with an
alarm occurring.
Description
50, 25, 16.67, ‹12.5,
8.333, 6.25, 5, 4.167,
3.571, 3.125, 2.778, 2.5,
Recording is performed at the
2.273, 1.923, 1.667,
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
1.471, 1.316, 1.19, 1.087,
1, 0.5, 0.333, 0.25, 0.2,
0.1, 0.05, 0.033
* Example of recording pattern for SW and ONLY
SW
01
Alarm
02
03
02
Alarm
04
02
05
04
06
02
07
04
08
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 FPS is set.
z When two or more cameras are connected and 50 FPS is
set, the actual recording rate is roughly the recording rate
divided by the number of cameras. (Example: When 4
cameras are connected and the recording rate setting is 50
FPS, the actual recording rate is 12.5 FPS)
02
Alternate recording of multiple alarm recordings
ONLY
01
02
Alarm
03
02
Alarm is cancelled
02
02
02
02
04
Recording until alarm is cancelled
14 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“20SEC” flashes.
“A12.5” flashes.
(Default setting: 12.5FPS)
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
English
95
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 96 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
15 Turn the jog dial to select the
Use the following procedure to set the recording rate and
time.
The cursor moves to “PRE-ALARM RECORDING”.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: ON
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE:A12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
z Settings cannot be made for “PRE-ALARM RECORDING”
when “ALARM REC” is set to “OFF”.
OPERATION
1
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
INTRODUCTION
To set pre-alarm recording
“DURATION” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Description
Records for the set duration for
each alarm.
CC
Records while an alarm is
activated.
Recording continues for five
seconds even if entry is less than
five seconds.
2
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
SETTINGS
5SEC, 10SEC, ‹20SEC,
40SEC, 1MIN, 2MIN, 3MIN,
4MIN, 5MIN, 10MIN, 15MIN
16 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
EXIT/OSD
3
Number of alarms
NETWORK
CONTROL
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
“ALARM” appears in the operation display.
When an alarm occurs, the number of alarms is displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select “7.ALARM
REC MODE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <ALARM REC MODE SET> screen is displayed.
“ALARM” display
02
4
Turn the jog dial to select “PRE-ALARM
RECORDING” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
96
English
OTHER
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z If a new alarm from a different channel occurs during alarm
recording, the alarm number in the top-right corner is
incremented as if two alarms occurred. However, in cases
where alarms occur consecutively on the same channel,
alarm retrigger settings (JP.98) can be used to ensure that
these are counted as only one alarm.
NETWORK
OPERATION
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
01-01-05 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000001
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 97 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
5
RECORD SET
7
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “REC RATE”.
Turn the jog dial to select the “REC
RATE” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 5SEC
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 5SEC
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹OFF
Pre-alarm recording is disabled.
ON
Pre-alarm recording is enabled.
6
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Description
Setting
Description
100, 50, 25, 16.67,
‹12.5, 8.333, 6.25, 5,
Recording is performed at the
4.167, 3.571, 3.125,
2.778, 2.5, 2.273, 1.923, selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
1.667, 1.471, 1.316, 1.19,
1.087, 1
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“12.5” flashes.
(Default setting: 12.5FPS)
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 5SEC
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
z 100 FPS cannot be selected when mirroring is set
(JP.117).
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 or 100 FPS are set.
z When four cameras are connected and 100 FPS is set,
recording is performed at the recording rate close to the set
rate (100 FPS) divided by the number of cameras.
(Example: When 8 cameras are connected and the
recording rate setting is 100 FPS, the actual recording rate
is 12.5 FPS)
8
Turn the jog dial to select the
“DURATION” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “ALARM TRIGGER”.
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ON
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 5SEC
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹5SEC, 10SEC, 20SEC,
40SEC, 1MIN, 2MIN, 3MIN,
4MIN, 5MIN, 10MIN, 15MIN
English
97
Description
Records for the set duration.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 98 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
9
RECORD SET
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
EXIT/OSD
INTRODUCTION
Setting alarm triggers
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
“PRE” appears in the operation display. When an alarm
occurs, “ALARM” is displayed.
Use this setting to indicate how alarms are to be detected.
1
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Number of alarms
“PRE” display
MENU
01-01-05 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A PRE 0000000
OPERATION
2
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
02
SETTINGS
3
z Pre-alarm recording is performed during the period set by
“DURATION” before an alarm occurs. To play back prealarm recordings, perform alarm search (using the
[SEARCH] button). (JP.37)
Recordings are played back at the point the alarm occurs.
Use the shuttle dial to begin reverse playback.
z When pre-alarm recording is performed, audio is not
recorded.
Turn the jog dial to select “7.ALARM
REC MODE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <ALARM REC MODE SET> screen is displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM
TRIGGER” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“ALARM” flashes.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
NETWORK
CONTROL
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
OTHER
98
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 99 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
5
RECORD SET
Turn the jog dial to select an alarm
detection method and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Setting the motion sensors
Use the following procedure to set motion sensors on video
from each camera so that alarms can be detected.
The cursor moves to “MOTION SENSOR”.
(1)
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
(2)
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹ALARM
SENSOR
Description
Alarm recording is performed when
a motion sensor detects movement.
(JP.99)
Alarm recording is performed when
either the external alarm*1 or a
motion sensor is activated.
*1 External alarm
z Switch is attached to the ALARM IN terminal on the rear
panel and alarm is detected by opening and closing the
switch.
z Coaxial alarm signals from a coaxial superimposition
camera
1
[Setting conditions]
z When “SENSOR”, “ALARM AND SENSOR” or “ALARM
OR SENSOR” is selected, the motion sensors must be set.
6
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
2
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
(3)
(4)
(5)
Make timer settings for “TIME PERIOD
A” and “TIME PERIOD B” on the <TIME
PERIOD SET> screen. (JP.69)
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
EXIT/OSD
English
T-1
(1) Motion sensor setting
Display changes in response to the sensor condition. Settings
are made using the jog dial.
-: Sensor off
A or B: Sensor on
(2) Camera number display
Changes when a [CAMERA SELECT] button is pressed. Use
this item to select the camera for which motion sensors are to
be set up.
(3) Time period
Select an interval set using “TIME PERIOD” (JP.69).
(4) LEVEL
Sets the sensitivity level of the motion sensors.
OFF: No motion sensor has been set.
1 to 10: A motion sensor is set. Lower values correspond to
higher sensitivity levels and vice versa.
(5) MODE
Sets the detection method for the motion sensors. (JP.102)
Alarm recording is performed when
an external alarm*1 occurs.
Alarm recording is performed when
both the external alarm*1 and a
ALARM AND SENSOR
motion sensor are activated
simultaneously.
ALARM OR SENSOR
CH01
MENU
99
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 100 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
3
RECORD SET
6
Press a [CAMERA SELECT] button.
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Press the button of the number of the camera for which
motion sensors are to be set up.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
On the DSR-5009P, press the [CAMERA SELECT] 1-9
button.
Turn the jog dial to select “7.ALARM
REC MODE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the jog dial while pressing the [FUNC.] button to move
the cursor (blue) vertically.
Cursor can be moved up and down using the jog dial if a mark
indicating such actions is displayed in the upper right of the
screen.
The <ALARM REC MODE SET> screen is displayed.
SETTINGS
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: SENSOR
MOTION SENSOR
->
5
Turn the jog dial to move the cursor
(blue) to the position where a sensor is
to be set and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
FUNC.
CH01
8
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: SENSOR
MOTION SENSOR
->
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
Turn the jog dial to select “A” or “B”.
NETWORK
CONTROL
Turn the jog dial to select “MOTION
SENSOR” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
A
CH01
9
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise twice.
NETWORK
OPERATION
“A” or “B” : Sensor set
“-”
: No sensor
The <MOTION SENSOR>
screen is displayed.
The change is defined.
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
NETWORK
SETTINGS
The cursor (blue) is displayed
at the top left position.
Cursor can be moved to the
left and right using the jog
dial if a mark indicating such
actions is displayed in the
upper right of the screen.
OPERATION
4
7
A
MODE : A
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
OTHER
10 Use the same procedure to set other
sensor positions.
100
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 101 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
„ To specify the start position and end position
together within a range
Setting sensitivity levels
13 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(1) Turn the jog dial to move the cursor (blue) to the start
position and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “A” or “B” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise. (“A” or “B” are yellow.)
(3) Turn the jog dial to move the cursor (blue) to the end
position and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
A
Start position
A A A A A A A A
A A A A A A A A
A A A A A A A A
CH01
End position
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
14 Turn the jog dial to select “OFF” or a
MODE : A
sensitivity level between “1” to “10” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Setting time periods
The cursor moves to “MODE”.
11 Turn the jog dial to select “T-1” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“T-1” flashes.
A
A
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
Setting
‹OFF
12 Turn the jog dial to select the time
1 to 10
period and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to “LEVEL”.
Description
Motion sensing is disabled.
Motion sensing is enabled. Lower numbers
correspond to higher levels of sensitivity.
Setting sensor modes
15 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“A” flashes.
A
A
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
‹T-1
Time period T-1
T-2
Time period T-2
T-3
Time period T-3
T-4
Time period T-4
English
CH01
101
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 102 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
16 Turn the jog dial to select the “MODE”
„ To stop motion sensor recording
setting and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to the top left sensor.
A
A
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
CH01
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
OPERATION
CH01
INTRODUCTION
Press the [MENU] button and select “2.RECORD SET”, “7.
ALARM REC MODE SET”, and “MOTION SENSOR” and
when the motion sensor settings screen appears set “LEVEL”
to “OFF”.
MODE : A
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when a
moving object is detected in B.
A AND B
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when a
moving object is detected by a sensor in both A
and B.
A AND NB
By setting A to important points (moving objects)
and B to non-moving points, the motion sensor
alarm is not triggered when the overall screen
brightness changes. The motion sensor alarm
only activates when A experiences a change
and B does not.
A TO B
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when an
object is detected moving from A to B. (within 2
seconds from A to B)
B TO A
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when an
object is detected moving from B to A. (within 2
seconds from B to A)
Setting alarm operation and display
Use the following procedure to display the main monitor and
monitor 2 when an alarm is detected.
1
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
A motion sensor alarm is triggered when the
entire image changes uniformly. In this way,
sprays and other similar measures can be
protected against. (No sensor settings are
needed for this mode.)
MENU
17 Use the same procedure to set “LEVEL”
2
and “MODE” for “T-2” through “T-4”.
The <RECORD SET> screen is displayed.
z Motion sensor positions are common for “T-1” through “T4” and different settings cannot be made.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Turn the jog dial to select “2.RECORD
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
NETWORK
OPERATION
C
z The period for “T-1” through “T-4” as set in step 12
changes to that of “TIME PERIOD A” or “TIME PERIOD B”
on the <TIME PERIOD SET> screen.
NETWORK
CONTROL
B
z The sensitivity level can be checked on the setting screen.
When motion is detected, the sensor color changes from
green to red, and a buzzer is sounded. When “C” is
selected in “MODE” the buzzer is sounded.
If detection is too sensitive, an alarm can be triggered even
by slight changes in lighting; accordingly, the sensitivity
level should be set to match the camera location.
SETTINGS
‹A
The motion sensor alarm is triggered when a
moving object is detected in A.
18 Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
OTHER
Motion sensor settings are confirmed and the <ALARM REC
MODE SET> screen is displayed once again.
102
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 103 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
3
RECORD SET
Turn the jog dial to select “8.ALARM
OPERATION SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹OFF
The <ALARM OPERATION SET> screen is displayed.
Even if a new alarm is received on the same
channel during alarm recording, the duration is not
extended.
If a new alarm is received on the same channel
during alarm recording, the duration is extended
and both alarms are treated as one. (Example:
Alarms occur in the order A J C) However, if the
new alarm is on a different channel, the alarms are
treated separately. (Example: Alarms occur in the
order A J B J C)
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: OFF
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
Description
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
Example:
ON
4
Alarm
Alarm
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
CH 1
“OFF” flashes for “ALARM RETRIGGER”.
Alarm recording A
Alarm recording C
Alarm
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: OFF
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
CH 2
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
6
Alarm recording B
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“FULL” flashes.
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
5
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
The cursor moves to “MAIN MON. DISPLAY”.
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
7
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
Turn the jog dial to select the “MAIN
MON. DISPLAY” setting and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “ALARM PRIORITY”.
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
English
103
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 104 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Description
When an alarm is detected, the main monitor
displays in full screen format the video on the
channel containing the alarm.
9 *1
When an alarm is detected, the main monitor
displays multi 9 screens.
16*2
When an alarm is detected, the main monitor
displays multi 16 screens.
NC
The display on the main monitor does not change
when an alarm is detected.
z After an alarm duration has ended, the display returns to
the screen prior to the alarm.
z “ALARM PRIORITY” cannot be selected when “MAIN
MON. DISPLAY” is set to “9”, “16” or “NC”.
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“NC” flashes.
*1 Multi screen display is laid out according to the settings on
P.126. Therefore, the image for the channel for which an
alarm was detected may not be displayed depending on
the settings when multi 9 screen display is selected.
Special care should be taken.
*2 Only for the DSR-5016P
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
SETTINGS
8
OPERATION
‹FULL
INTRODUCTION
Setting
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“LAST” flashes.
11 Turn the jog dial to select the “MON.2
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
DISPLAY” value and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
NETWORK
CONTROL
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
9
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
Turn the jog dial to select the “ALARM
PRIORITY” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: ON
‹NC
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
Setting
‹LAST
Description
SWITCH
When a number of alarms occur, the
display switches between the video from
the corresponding cameras, showing each
for one second.
When an alarm is detected, the image of
the channel that received the alarm is
displayed full screen on Monitor 2.
9
When an alarm is detected, Monitor 2
appears in multi 9 screen display.
16*1
When an alarm is detected, Monitor 2
appears in multi 16 screen display.
12 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
104
English
OTHER
FIRST
FULL
*1 Only for the DSR-5016P
When a number of alarms occur, the most
recent alarm video is given priority and is
displayed.
When a number of alarms occur, only the
video for the first alarm is displayed.
However, if the duration for the first alarm
expires, video for the next alarm is
displayed.
When an alarm is detected, Monitor 2 does
not change.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Description
NETWORK
OPERATION
The cursor moves to “MON.2 DISPLAY”.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 105 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
RECORD SET
Canceling an alarm
To forcibly cancel an alarm during alarm operation, press the
[CAMERA SELECT] button for the camera with the alarm and
hold it for approximately 3 seconds. Alternatively, connect a
switch between the ALARM RESET terminal and C terminal
(the grounded terminal), and turn on the switch to cancel an
alarm that occurs.
ALARM
RESET
C
English
105
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 106 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
[MENU] button
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
Jog dial
OPERATION
MOVE:JOG
INTRODUCTION
[EXIT/OSD] button
Main Menu
SELECT:SHUTTLE
4. RS-232C/RS-485 SET (JP.115)
Makes settings when
<RS-232C/RS-485 SET>
connecting a controller,
CONTROL
: RS-485
etc. to the RS-232C or RSDATA SPEED
: 19200
485 terminal.
STATUS INFO
: OFF
Configuration
The following settings can be made with <GENERAL SET>.
MOVE:JOG
ALARM INFO
ADDRESS
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
5. HDD SET (JP.117)
Perform hard disk
initialization and mirroring
settings.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
<DISPLAY SET>
DATE
: ON
TIME
: ON
QUALITY
: ON
AUDIO
: ON
ALARM COUNT
: ON
ALARM TYPE
: ON
TITLE
: ON
VIDEO LOSS
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
: ON
2. BUZZER SET (JP.109)
Turns the buzzer on or off.
<BUZZER SET>
ALARM
: OFF
DISK FULL
: ON
DISK ERROR
: ON
LOCK WARNING : ON
KEY IN
: OFF
NON REC
: OFF
<NETWORK SET>
DHCP
: OFF
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168. 0. 1
SUBNET MASK
: 255.255.255. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
HTTP PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SET
->
MAC ADDRESS
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
: ON
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
OTHER
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
NETWORK STATUS
NETWORK
SETTINGS
7. NETWORK CONTROL SET (JP.123)
Sets the method for
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
remote control over a
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
network.
3. SECURITY LOCK SET (JP.110)
Sets the key lock,
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
password lock and other
LOCK MODE
: KEY
lock modes, the user level
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
for copying and camera
control, and user ID.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NORMAL
NETWORK
OPERATION
6. NETWORK SET (JP.120)
Allows the digital video
recorder to be connected
to a PC via a network.
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: OFF
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
NETWORK
CONTROL
1. DISPLAY SET (JP.107)
Displays or hides the date
and time on the operation
display and sets the
screen display for
situations where video
signals are lost.
: OFF
: 001
SETTINGS
<GENERAL SET>
1.DISPLAY SET
2.BUZZER SET
3.SECURITY LOCK SET
4.RS-232C/RS-485 SET
5.HDD SET
6.NETWORK SET
7.NETWORK CONTROL SET
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
106
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 107 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
(1) DATE
Displays and hides the date.
(2) TIME
Displays and hides the time.
(3) QUALITY
Displays and hides the picture quality mode.
(4) AUDIO
Displays and hides the audio recording mode.
(5) ALARM COUNT
Displays and hides the number of current alarms.
(6) ALARM TYPE
Displays and hides the type of alarm recording.
(7) TITLE
Displays and hides the camera titles.
Setting data display
Use the following procedure to hide the date, time, or other
information from the operation display. All items are set to
“ON” by default setting. Where necessary, the required items
can be turned off.
1
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
4
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
3
Turn the jog dial to select “DATE” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ON” flashes for “DATE”.
<DISPLAY SET>
DATE
: ON
TIME
: ON
QUALITY
: ON
AUDIO
: ON
ALARM COUNT
: ON
ALARM TYPE
: ON
TITLE
: ON
Turn the jog dial to select “1.DISPLAY
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
VIDEO LOSS
The <DISPLAY SET> screen is displayed.
(1)
(3)
(5)
(7)
(2)
(4)
(6)
VIDEO LOSS
(1)
5
<DISPLAY SET>
DATE
: ON
TIME
: ON
QUALITY
: ON
AUDIO
: ON
ALARM COUNT
: ON
ALARM TYPE
: ON
TITLE
: ON
(2)
(3)(4) (6)
: ON
Turn the jog dial to select “ON ”or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to “TIME”.
<DISPLAY SET>
DATE
: ON
TIME
: OFF
QUALITY
: ON
AUDIO
: ON
ALARM COUNT
: ON
ALARM TYPE
: ON
TITLE
: ON
: ON
(5)
01-01-05 00:00:00 REC 1% EN A ALARM 0000000
02
VIDEO LOSS
6
(7)
7
z Refer to P.108 for details on “VIDEO LOSS”.
: ON
Use the same procedure to set the other
items to “ON” or “OFF”.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
English
107
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 108 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
4
“ON” flashes for “VIDEO LOSS”.
VIDEO LOSS
5
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<DISPLAY SET>
DATE
: ON
TIME
: ON
QUALITY
: ON
AUDIO
: ON
ALARM COUNT
: ON
ALARM TYPE
: ON
TITLE
: ON
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
VIDEO LOSS
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
6
: ON
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
NETWORK
CONTROL
2
: ON
SETTINGS
Use the following procedure to display “VIDEO LOSS” when
the camera video is interrupted.
OPERATION
<DISPLAY SET>
DATE
: ON
TIME
: ON
QUALITY
: ON
AUDIO
: ON
ALARM COUNT
: ON
ALARM TYPE
: ON
TITLE
: ON
Setting display for video loss
1
INTRODUCTION
z A maximum of 9,999,999 alarms can be displayed in the
operation display. When this number is exceeded, the
alarm count returns to 0000000.
z When “ALARM RECORDING” is set to “OFF” on the
<ALARM REC MODE SET> screen, the number of alarms
and type of alarm recording are not displayed.
z When “ALARM RECORDING” is set to “ENABLED” on the
<ALARM REC MODE SET> screen, the operation display
changes as follows.
z “ALARM” is displayed when alarm video is recorded or
played back.
z “PRE” is displayed when pre-alarm video is recorded or
played back.
z “ARCHIV” is displayed when video is played back from
the archive area.
Turn the jog dial to select “VIDEO
LOSS” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
EXIT/OSD
z After video loss is detected, the setting can be cancelled by
performing either of the following:
(1) Input the video signal.
(2) If no video input is required, use a [CAMERA SELECT]
button to select the camera for which video loss was
detected and then press the same button for
approximately 3 seconds.
Turn the jog dial to select “1.DISPLAY
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <DISPLAY SET> screen is displayed.
VIDEO LOSS
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<DISPLAY SET>
DATE
: ON
TIME
: ON
QUALITY
: ON
AUDIO
: ON
ALARM COUNT
: ON
ALARM TYPE
: ON
TITLE
: ON
NETWORK
OPERATION
3
: ON
OTHER
108
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 109 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
4
Setting the buzzer
“OFF” flashes for “ALARM”.
Use the following procedure to set a warning buzzer to sound
for alarms or when hard disk space becomes insufficient.
1
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<BUZZER SET>
ALARM
: OFF
DISK FULL
: ON
DISK ERROR
: ON
LOCK WARNING
: ON
KEY IN
: OFF
NON REC
: OFF
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
5
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
3
The cursor moves to “DISK FULL”.
<BUZZER SET>
ALARM
: ON
DISK FULL
: ON
DISK ERROR
: ON
LOCK WARNING : ON
KEY IN
: OFF
NON REC
: OFF
Turn the jog dial to select “2.BUZZER
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <BUZZER SET> screen is displayed.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Setting
<BUZZER SET>
ALARM
: OFF
DISK FULL
: ON
DISK ERROR
: ON
LOCK WARNING : ON
KEY IN
: OFF
NON REC
: OFF
(6)
‹OFF
ON
The buzzer sounds when an alarm occurs.
7
(1) ALARM (default setting: OFF)
Sounds a buzzer when an alarm occurs.
(2) DISK FULL (default setting: ON)
Sounds a buzzer when overwriting is not permitted and the
hard disk capacity becomes insufficient.
(3) DISK ERROR (default setting: ON)
Sounds a buzzer when a hard-disk error occurs.
(4) LOCK WARNING (default setting: ON)
Sounds a buzzer if a button is pressed while the security lock
is on. Specifically, the buzzer sounds twice with an interval of
approximately 0.5 seconds.
(5) KEY IN (default setting: OFF)
Sounds a buzzer when a button is pressed.
(6) NON REC (default setting: OFF)
Sounds a buzzer when recording is stopped.
Description
The buzzer does not sound when an alarm
occurs.
6
(5)
English
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Use the same procedure to set the other
items to “ON” or “OFF”.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
z To stop a buzzer, press any button or turn either the jog
dial or shuttle dial.
109
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 110 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
5
Use the following procedure to restrict operation of the digital
video recorder based on the user level.
1
Turn the jog dial to select the mode and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
If “PASSWORD” is selected, the cursor moves to “FREE
ACCESS LEVEL”. Proceed to step 6.
If “KEY” or “NETWORK” is selected, the cursor moves to
“OPERATION AUTHORITY”. Proceed to step 7.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: PASSWORD
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
USER ID SET
->
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Turn the jog dial to select “3.SECURITY
LOCK SET” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
6
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
PASSWORD
Password lock is enabled. When keys are
pressed while locked, the input screen for
user ID and password is displayed and
operation restrictions are restricted
according to ID level.
NETWORK
Control the DVR from a PC on a network.
If “LOCK MODE” is set to
“PASSWORD”, turn the jog dial to
select “FREE ACCESS LEVEL” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Turn the jog dial to select “LOCK
MODE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“KEY” flashes.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
NETWORK
OPERATION
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: PASSWORD
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
NETWORK
CONTROL
The <SECURITY LOCK SET> screen is displayed.
Description
All key operations are locked. When keys
are pressed while locked, buzzer is
sounded.
SETTINGS
‹KEY
4
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
3
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
OPERATION
2
INTRODUCTION
Setting the security lock
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹NON
Description
Locks all operations.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
LV1
Excludes LV1 users from the password
lock.
USER ID SET
->
LV2
Excludes LV2 users from the password
lock.
LV3
Excludes LV3 users from the password
lock.
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
OTHER
Refer to P.112 for details on user level and authorization.
110
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 111 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
7
GENERAL SET
10 Turn the jog dial to select the copy level
Turn the jog dial to select “OPERATION
AUTHORITY” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “CAMERA CONTROL”.
“NORMAL” flashes.
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: PASSWORD
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
Setting
If no changes are to be made to user privileges, select
“NORMAL” and go to step 13.
The cursor moves to “COPY”.
USER ID SET
->
CHANGE
9
Description
User privileges remain at the default
setting.
If “OPERATION AUTHORITY” is set to
“CHANGE”, turn the jog dial to select
“COPY” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“LV2, 3, 4” flashes for “COPY”.
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
: CHANGE
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
English
LV3, 4
Allows users at Level 3 or higher to copy
images to external media.
LV4
Allows users at Level 4 to copy images to
external media.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: CHANGE
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Changes copying to external media and
camera control privileges.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
‹LV2, 3, 4
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹NORMAL
Description
Allows users at Level 2 or higher to copy
images to external media.
“LV2, 3, 4” flashes for “CAMERA CONTROL”.
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Setting
->
11 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
: CHANGE
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Turn the jog dial to select “NORMAL” or
“CHANGE” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: CHANGE
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
8
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
111
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 112 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
12 Turn the jog dial to select the camera
Use the following procedure to set the user ID, password and
level.
The user ID must be between one and eight alphanumeric
characters, and the password between four and eight
alphanumeric characters.
Characters that can be entered: 0 to 9, A to Z
The cursor moves to “USER ID SET”.
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
: CHANGE
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
1
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
OPERATION
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
INTRODUCTION
Registering a user
control level and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
MENU
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
2
Description
LV3, 4
Allows users at Level 3 or higher to control
cameras from the digital video recorder.
LV4
Allows users at Level 4 to control cameras
from the digital video recorder.
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
SETTINGS
‹LV2, 3, 4
Allows users at Level 2 or higher to control
cameras from the digital video recorder.
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
13 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Turn the jog dial to select “3.SECURITY
LOCK SET” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The <SECURITY LOCK SET> screen is displayed.
Setting user ID
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCK MODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
Set a user ID and password to restrict operation of the digital
video recorder directly or through the network.
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
Select from the following four user levels.
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Level
LV1
LV2
LV3
LV4
4
Monitoring
The <USER ID SET> screen is displayed.
Recording
Menu operation
112
ID SET>
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
OTHER
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Playback/
searching
Turn the jog dial to select “USER ID
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
NETWORK
OPERATION
„ User level and privileges
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
Operation
privilege
NETWORK
CONTROL
3
EXIT/OSD
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 113 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
5
GENERAL SET
9
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The first user ID entry bar “|” flashes.
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
6
The password is confirmed.
ID SET>
[KEY]
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
z The “LV” setting registered on line 1 cannot be changed
from “4” (the user ID and password can be changed). To
change the level, register a separate user on a different
line. After the password is confirmed for line 2 or any line
thereafter, the cursor moves to the “LV” setting. Set the
user level.
z The same “USER ID” cannot be registered more than
once.
ID SET>
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
10 Use the same procedure to register
other users.
11 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The first password entry bar “4” flashes.
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
8
ID SET>
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Enter a user ID.
Use the jog dial, shuttle dial or [CAMERA SELECT] buttons to
enter up to eight alphanumeric characters. Refer to “Setting
camera titles” (JP.65) for more details regarding how to enter
characters.
7
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
EXIT/OSD
ID SET>
[KEY]
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Turning on the key lock, password lock and
network lock
Enter a password.
Use the jog dial, shuttle dial or [CAMERA SELECT] buttons to
enter between four and eight alphanumeric characters. Refer
to “Setting camera titles” (JP.65) for more details regarding
how to enter characters.
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
English
1
ID SET>
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
With the normal monitoring screen
displayed, press the [SHUTTLE HOLD]
button for approximately 3 seconds.
The LOCK indicator on the front panel lights up and a buzzer
sounds to indicate setting of key lock, password lock, or
network lock.
SHUTTLE HOLD
113
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 114 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
1
z The lock cannot be activated during the following
operations.
• While displaying the menu screen, search screen, or
copy screen
• While playing back recorded image
• While camera is being controlled
• While video is being magnified
INTRODUCTION
Canceling the key lock
During key lock, press the [SHUTTLE
HOLD] button for approximately 3
seconds.
The LOCK indicator on the front panel turns off and a buzzer
sounds to indicate deactivation of the key lock.
SHUTTLE HOLD
OPERATION
2
Confirm the lock status.
If any operation is made other than by pressing the
[SHUTTLE HOLD] button during key lock or network lock, the
following screen is displayed.
Canceling the password lock or network lock
Example: While password lock is activated
1
SETTINGS
KEY LOCKED !
During password lock, press the
[SHUTTLE HOLD] button for
approximately 3 seconds.
The following screen is displayed.
SHUTTLE HOLD
If a user without privileges operates the digital video recorder
during password lock, the following screen is displayed.
[KEY]
PASSWORD LOCKED !
(LOCKED LEVEL: LV4,3,2,1)
PLEASE ENTER YOUR ID AND PASSWORD.
[KEY]
PASSWORD LOCKED !
(LOCKED LEVEL: LV4,3,2,1)
PLEASE ENTER YOUR ID AND PASSWORD.
NETWORK
CONTROL
USER ID ________
PASSWORD ________
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
2
USER ID ________
PASSWORD ________
Enter the user ID and password.
If a user without privileges presses the [SHUTTLE HOLD]
button to operate the digital video recorder during network
lock, the following screen is displayed.
USER ID ***
PASSWORD ****
[KEY]
NETWORK LOCKED !
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
NETWORK
OPERATION
[KEY]
PASSWORD LOCKED !
(LOCKED LEVEL: LV4,3,2,1)
PLEASE ENTER YOUR ID AND PASSWORD.
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
PLEASE ENTER YOUR ID AND PASSWORD.
The LOCK indicator on the front panel turns off and a buzzer
sounds to indicate deactivation of the password lock.
LV4:MENU SET
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Use the jog dial, shuttle dial or [CAMERA SELECT] buttons to
enter the characters. Refer to “Setting camera titles” (JP.65)
for more details regarding how to enter characters.
USER ID ________
PASSWORD ________
OTHER
114
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 115 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
5
Setting RS-232C and RS-485
Set when connected to a PC through the rear panel RS-232C
terminal or when connected to a system controller through the
RS-485 terminal (A, B).
To perform PPP settings (modem), set to RS-485.
The DATA SPEED setting is for the RS-485. Set the PPP
dialing speed in “BAUD RATE” in the <PPP SET> screen.
1
Turn the jog dial to select “RS-232C” or
“RS-485” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to “DATA SPEED”.
<RS-232C/RS-485 SET>
CONTROL
: RS-485
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
2
Setting
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Description
Camera control (SANYO + other companies’)
from the DVR unit enabled
Camera control (SANYO + other companies’)
from the network enabled
Camera control (SANYO + other companies’)
from the controller enabled
PC connected to RS-232C cannot be used
‹RS-485
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
RS-232C
3
Turn the jog dial to select “4.RS-232C/
RS-485 SET” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
6
The <RS-232C/RS-485 SET> screen is displayed.
Camera control (other companies’) from the
DVR unit enabled
Camera control (other companies’) from the
network enabled
Controller cannot be used
The DVR operations from a PC connected to
RS-232C are enabled
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“19200” flashes.
<RS-232C/RS-485
CONTROL
:
DATA SPEED
:
STATUS INFO
:
ALARM INFO
:
ADDRESS
:
4
SET>
RS-485
19200
OFF
OFF
001
<RS-232C/RS-485 SET>
CONTROL
: RS-485
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
7
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“RS-485” flashes.
<RS-232C/RS-485 SET>
CONTROL
: RS-485
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
Turn the jog dial to select the “DATA
SPEED” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Settings are complete if “RS-232C” is selected for
“CONTROL”. Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
If “RS-485” is selected, proceed to the next step.
<RS-232C/RS-485 SET>
CONTROL
: RS-485
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
2400, 4800, 9600, ‹19200
English
115
Description
Sets the data speed.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 116 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
8
GENERAL SET
11 Turn the jog dial to select “ALARM
When “RS-485” is selected for
“CONTROL”, turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“OFF” flashes for “STATUS INFO”.
The cursor moves to “ADDRESS”.
<RS-232C/RS-485 SET>
CONTROL
: RS-485
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
<RS-232C/RS-485
CONTROL
:
DATA SPEED
:
STATUS INFO
:
ALARM INFO
:
ADDRESS
:
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Turn the jog dial to select “STATUS
INFO” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Setting
ON
Description
Alarm information is transmitted.
Alarm information is not transmitted.
SETTINGS
‹OFF
The cursor moves to “ALARM INFO”.
<RS-232C/RS-485
CONTROL
:
DATA SPEED
:
STATUS INFO
:
ALARM INFO
:
ADDRESS
:
SET>
RS-485
19200
OFF
OFF
001
OPERATION
9
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
SET>
RS-485
19200
OFF
OFF
001
“001” flashes for “ADDRESS”.
Setting
‹OFF
Description
Status information is transmitted.
NETWORK
CONTROL
<RS-232C/RS-485 SET>
[KEY]
CONTROL
: RS-485
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
ON
INTRODUCTION
INFO” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
13 Turn the jog dial to select the
Status information is not transmitted.
NETWORK
OPERATION
“ADDRESS” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes for “ALARM INFO”.
<RS-232C/RS-485
CONTROL
:
DATA SPEED
:
STATUS INFO
:
ALARM INFO
:
ADDRESS
:
<RS-232C/RS-485 SET>
CONTROL
: RS-485
DATA SPEED
: 19200
STATUS INFO
: OFF
ALARM INFO
: OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
SET>
RS-485
19200
OFF
OFF
001
Setting
000 - 127
Description
Sets the address of the digital video recorder.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
[Settings] (The default setting is “001”)
When connecting a camera with remote operation capability,
set this address between “001” and “008” and make camera
control settings. (JP.145)
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
116
English
OTHER
14 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 117 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
5
Hard disk initialization and mirroring
This section describes how to initialize the hard disk and
perform mirroring.
The internal hard disk capacity is displayed as DISK 1 and
DISK 2; the hard disk capacity for the expansion unit is
displayed as EX-DISK 1 to 4.
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The “HDD INITIALIZING !” screen is displayed and the hard
disk is initialized.
When initialization is completed, the display returns to the
<HDD SET> screen.
Initializing the hard disk
1
Press the [MENU] button.
HDD INITIALIZING !
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
6
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
Setting mirroring
3
Set mirroring when two hard disks are built-in or when hard
disk expansion has been carried out and even numbered hard
disks are set.
When mirroring has been set, the same image can be
recorded to two hard disks.
If there is a recording error, the <HDD SET> screen can be
used to select another hard disk to read the data. (JP.119)
When mirroring is set for hard disks of different capacities,
mirroring occurs on the hard disk with the smaller capacity.
Turn the jog dial to select “5.HDD SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <HDD SET> screen is displayed.
DISK 1
<HDD SET>
: 250GB
DISK 2
: 250GB
DISK INITIALIZE
->
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED!
MIRRORING
: OFF
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
z Set mirroring to automatically restrict the recording rate
upper limit.
1
4
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
MENU
The <WARNING> screen is displayed. “NO” flashes.
<WARNING>
2
THIS CHANGE WILL INITIALIZE THE DISK.
ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED.
ARE YOU SURE ?
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
NO
CHANGE:JOG
English
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET”and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
SET:SHUTTLE
117
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 118 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
3
GENERAL SET
7
The <HDD SET> screen is displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select “MASTER” or
“SLAVE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select “5.HDD SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “DISK INITIALIZE”.
4
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
: 250GB
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB
EX-DISK 2 : 250GB
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB
EX-DISK 4 : 250GB
DISK INITIALIZE
->
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED !
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : MASTER
CAUTION : RECORDING SPEED WILL BE
LIMITED BY MIRRORING !
Turn the jog dial to select “MIRRORING”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
“OFF” flashes.
‹MASTER
SLAVE
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
<WARNING>
REC RATE SETTING IN THE MENU WILL BE
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED.
HDD INITIALIZE !
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
ARE YOU SURE ?
NO
“MASTER” is displayed on the “PLAYBACK DRIVE”. An arrow
is displayed on the screen between the disks.
CHANGE:JOG
9
SET:SHUTTLE
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The “HDD INITIALIZING !” screen is displayed and the hard
disk is initialized.
When initialization is completed, the display returns to the
<HDD SET> screen.
NETWORK
OPERATION
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
: 250GB
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB
EX-DISK 2 : 250GB
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB
EX-DISK 4 : 250GB
DISK INITIALIZE
->
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED !
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : MASTER
CAUTION : RECORDING SPEED WILL BE
LIMITED BY MIRRORING !
6
Playback from the slave disk.
NETWORK
CONTROL
5
8
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
Description
Playback from the master disk.
SETTINGS
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB
DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB
EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB
EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: OFF
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
OPERATION
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB
DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB
EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB
EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: OFF
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
HDD INITIALIZING !
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“MASTER” flashes.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
: 250GB
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB
EX-DISK 2 : 250GB
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB
EX-DISK 4 : 250GB
DISK INITIALIZE
->
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE ERASED !
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : MASTER
CAUTION : RECORDING SPEED WILL BE
LIMITED BY MIRRORING !
10 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
OTHER
z Set mirroring to automatically restrict the recording rate
upper limit (i.e., set to half of the normal value).
118
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 119 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
5
Switching playback disks
When mirroring is set to “ON” and a recording error occurs,
change the hard disk used for playback.
1
Turn the jog dial to select “MASTER” or
“SLAVE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : MASTER
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
‹MASTER
SLAVE
6
Description
Playback from the master disk.
Playback from the slave disk.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
3
EXIT/OSD
Turn the jog dial to select “5.HDD SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <HDD SET> screen is displayed.
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
4
Expanding (Replacing) and
initializing the hard disk
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
Please contact the dealer from whom you purchased this
digital video recorder regarding hard disk expansion
(replacement). An external hard disk expansion unit (VA-EXH
series) (sold separately) or optional SCSI board and RAID unit
can be used with this digital video recorder.
z Initialization must always be performed after expanding the
hard disk.
z All important recordings should be copied to CompactFlash
cards or other storage media before expanding the hard disk.
Turn the jog dial to select “PLAYBACK
DRIVE” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“MASTER” flashes.
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : MASTER
The <HDD SET> screen is displayed in the following manner
when hard disk expansion is carried out for the DVR or
external expansion unit.
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
“NEW” is displayed to
the right of the hard
disk capacity for new
hard disks.
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 160GB NEW DISK 2
: 160GB NEW
EX-DISK 1 : 160GB NEW EX-DISK 2 : 160GB NEW
EX-DISK 3 : 160GB NEW EX-DISK 4 : 160GB NEW
NEW DISK INITIALIZE
->
PLEASE INITIALIZE THE NEW DISK
MIRRORING
: OFF
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
CAUTION : RECORDING SPEED WILL BE
LIMITED BY MIRRORING !
ALL DISK INITIALIZE
->
To initialize a recently expanded hard disk, select “NEW DISK
INITIALIZE”.
To initialize all connected hard disks, select “ALL DISK
INITIALIZE”.
z When a RAID unit is connected, “ARRAY” is displayed
instead of “EX-DISK”.
English
119
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 120 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
Network settings
Use the following procedure to make menu settings for the
digital video recorder and to monitor video from a PC via a
network (LAN).
A LAN cable must be connected to the LAN terminal on the
rear panel before proceeding.
The setting is necessary for controlling the DVR from a PC on
a network.
Contact the network administrator for more details on setting
values.
z Connecting to a PC directly
(without using a switch)
1 - 16
MAIN
16
LAN
1
2
3
4
Monitor
(sold separately)
PC
1 - 16
MAIN
1
16
LAN
1
2
3
4
Monitor
(sold separately)
NETWORK
OPERATION
Switch
NETWORK
CONTROL
z Connecting to an intranet
(using a switch)
SETTINGS
A crossed-type LAN cable must
be used here. (10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX Category 5)
OPERATION
z DHCP
Set whether the IP address is automatically acquired from the
DHCP server or manually set. Set “ON” when automatically
acquiring an IP address from an Internet service provider or
from a DHCP server on a LAN, and set “OFF” when using a
fixed IP address.
z IP ADDRESS
Select “OFF” for “DHCP” to set. Generally, a private IP
address is used when a fixed IP address is set in a LAN
(example: 192.168.0.0 – 192.168.255.255).
Be sure not to duplicate IP addresses from other devices.
z SUBNET MASK
Select “OFF” for “DHCP” to set. The same value is set
throughout the LAN.
z GATEWAY
Select “OFF” for “DHCP” to set. When connecting from a LAN
to a WAN or other differing network, specify the device IP
address (on the LAN side).
z HTTP PORT
Sets open port. Default value is “80”.
z NETWORK SPEED
Sets restrictions for traffic in the LAN. Normally, set it to “NO
LIMIT”.
z DNS SET
Settings relating to the Domain Name Server are performed in
another screen.
z DNS SERVER
Set whether the DNS server IP address is automatically
acquired or manually set. Generally this setting is “AUTO”
when “ON” is selected for “DHCP”. When the DNS server
address is specified by a network administrator or Internet
service provider, select “MANUAL” and set the following
items, “PRIMARY” and “SECONDARY”.
z PRIMARY
z SECONDARY
Set when “DNS SERVER” is set to “MANUAL”. Set the
DNS server address received from the network
administrator or Internet service provider.
Making network connections
1
INTRODUCTION
Making network settings
PC
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Intranet
A straight-type LAN cable must
be used here. (10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX Category 5)
PC
PC
Switch
OTHER
120
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 121 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
1
GENERAL SET
5
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
When “ON” is selected, proceed to step 9.
When “OFF” is selected, the cursor moves to “IP ADDRESS”.
<NETWORK SET>
DHCP
: OFF
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168. 0. 1
SUBNET MASK
: 255.255.255. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
HTTP PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SET
->
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
MAC ADDRESS
6
3
Set “IP ADDRESS”.
(Default setting: 192. 168. 0. 1)
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select the first number (0 to 255) and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise. (Also use the
[CAMERA SELECT] 1-9 buttons or the [QUAD] button (0)
to input.)
(3) Use the same procedure to enter the remaining numbers.
Turn the jog dial to select “6.NETWORK
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <NETWORK SET> screen is displayed.
<NETWORK SET>
DHCP
: ON
IP ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
SUBNET MASK
: 0. 0. 0. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
HTTP PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SET
->
MAC ADDRESS
4
<NETWORK SET>
[KEY]
DHCP
: OFF
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168. 0. 1
SUBNET MASK
: 255.255.255. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
HTTP PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
7
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
Set “SUBNET MASK”.
(Default setting: 255. 255. 255. 0)
Use the same procedure for setting “IP ADDRESS” to set the
subnet mask.
Set each field within the range of 0 to 255.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ON” flashes.
<NETWORK SET>
[KEY]
DHCP
: OFF
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168. 0. 1
SUBNET MASK
: 255.255.255. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
HTTP PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
<NETWORK SET>
DHCP
: ON
IP ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
SUBNET MASK
: 0. 0. 0. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
HTTP PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SET
->
MAC ADDRESS
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
8
Set “GATEWAY”.
(Default setting: 0. 0. 0. 0)
Use the same procedure for setting “IP ADDRESS” to set the
gateway.
Set each field within the range of 0 to 255.
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
<NETWORK SET>
[KEY]
DHCP
: OFF
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168. 0. 1
SUBNET MASK
: 255.255.255. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
HTTP PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
English
121
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 122 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
9
GENERAL SET
13 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Set “HTTP PORT”.
“AUTO” flashes.
<NETWORK SET>
[KEY]
DHCP
: OFF
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168. 0. 1
SUBNET MASK
: 255.255.255. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
HTTP PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SET
->
DNS SERVER
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
HOST NAME
DOMAIN SUFFIX
“MANUAL” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
When “AUTO” is selected, proceed to step 16.
When “MANUAL” is selected, the cursor moves to
“PRIMARY”.
“NO LIMIT” flashes.
DNS SERVER
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
HOST NAME
DOMAIN SUFFIX
11 Turn the jog dial to select the
select the “PRIMARY” and
“SECONDARY” settings.
Use the same procedure for setting “IP ADDRESS” to set the
primary and secondary settings.
<NETWORK SET>
DHCP
: OFF
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168. 0. 1
SUBNET MASK
: 255.255.255. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
HTTP PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SET
->
DNS SERVER
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
HOST NAME
DOMAIN SUFFIX
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
<DNS SET>
: MANUAL
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: VDH-5016
: SANYO.CO.JP
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Description
No limit
1024KBPS
Network speed
Up to 1024KBPS
512KBPS
Network speed
Up to 512KBPS
256KBPS
Network speed
Up to 256KBPS
128KBPS
Network speed
Up to 128KBPS
64KBPS
Network speed
Up to 64KBPS
EXIT/OSD
z “HOST NAME” and “DOMAIN SUFFIX” cannot be set on
the digital video recorder. Set these on a PC connected to
the network. (JP.193)
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <DNS SET> screen is displayed.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Network speed
NETWORK
OPERATION
16 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
NETWORK
CONTROL
The cursor moves to “DNS SET”.
<DNS SET>
: AUTO
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
OTHER
HOST NAME
DOMAIN SUFFIX
: VDH-5016
: SANYO.CO.JP
15 If “DNS SERVER” is set to “MANUAL”,
“NETWORK SPEED” setting and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
DNS SERVER
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
<DNS SET>
: AUTO
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
SETTINGS
<NETWORK SET>
DHCP
: OFF
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168. 0. 1
SUBNET MASK
: 255.255.255. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
HTTP PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SET
->
Setting
: VDH-5016
: SANYO.CO.JP
14 Turn the jog dial to select “AUTO” or
:12-34-5B-6C-78-9D
MAC ADDRESS
<DNS SET>
: AUTO
: 0. 0. 0. 0
: 0. 0. 0. 0
OPERATION
MAC ADDRESS
‹NO LIMIT
INTRODUCTION
(Default setting: 00080)
(1) Turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
(2) Turn the jog dial to
select the setting and
then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
: VDH-5016
: SANYO.CO.JP
122
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 123 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
5
Making network control settings
1
Press the [MENU] button.
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to “NETWORK STATUS”.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
<NETWORK CONTLOR SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “3.GENERAL
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
The <GENERAL SET> screen is displayed.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹ON
3
OFF
Turn the jog dial to select “7.NETWORK
CONTROL SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
6
Description
The digital video recorder can be
controlled via a network.
The digital video recorder cannot be
controlled via a network.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ON” flashes for “NETWORK STATUS”.
The <NETWORK CONTROL SET> screen is displayed.
<NETWORK CONTLOR SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
<NETWORK CONTLOR SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
4
7
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“ON” flashes for “NETWORK CONTROL”.
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The cursor moves to “OPERATION AUTHORITY”.
<NETWORK CONTLOR SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
<NETWORK CONTLOR SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹ON
OFF
English
123
Description
During network connection, the message
“NETWORK CONTROL” is displayed on
the monitor connected to the digital video
recorder.
The message “NETWORK CONTROL” is
not displayed on the monitor connected to
the digital video recorder even during
network connection.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 124 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
8
GENERAL SET
11 Turn the jog dial to select copy or
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Selects the level that can perform the following operations for
network connection. (JP.120)
Copy playback image to archive area (JP.174)
Download playback image to computer (JP.175)
The cursor moves to “CAMERA CONTROL”.
<NETWORK CONTLOR SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
: NORMAL
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
<NETWORK CONTLOR SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
9
Turn the jog dial to select “NORMAL” or
“CHANGE” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
->
‹LV3, 4
LV4
<NETWORK CONTLOR SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
Description
User privileges remain at the default
setting.
Changes live image downloading
privileges and camera control privileges.
: CHANGE
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
“CHANGE”, turn the jog dial to select
“COPY/DOWNLOAD” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
OPERATION
10 If “OPERATION AUTHORITY” is set to
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
NETWORK
CONTROL
CHANGE
Allows users at Level 4 to copy and
download images.
“LV2,3,4” flashes for “CAMERA CONTROL”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹NORMAL
Description
Allows users at Level 3 or higher to copy
and download images.
12 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Setting
->
SETTINGS
Setting
USER ID SET
USER ID SET
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
<NETWORK CONTLOR SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
: CHANGE
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
: CHANGE
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
The cursor moves to “COPY/DOWNLOAD”.
If no changes are to be made to user privileges, select
“NORMAL” and go to step 14.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
OPERATION
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
INTRODUCTION
download level and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“NORMAL” flashes.
“LV3,4” flashes for “COPY/DOWNLOAD”.
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
: CHANGE
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<NETWORK CONTLOR SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
OTHER
124
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 125 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
GENERAL SET
13 Turn the jog dial to select the camera
Setting user ID
control level and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
Set a user ID and password to restrict operation of the digital
video recorder directly or through the network.
Select a level to control cameras from the digital video
recorder. (JP.112)
„ User levels and privileges
Select from the following four user levels.
<NETWORK CONTLOR SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
: CHANGE
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
Operation
privilege
Monitoring
LV3, 4
Allows users at Level 3 or higher to control
cameras from the digital video recorder.
LV4
Allows users at Level 4 to control cameras
from the digital video recorder.
LV3
LV4
*1
Menu operation
Monitor control
Description
‹LV2, 3, 4
LV2
Recording
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Allows users at Level 2 or higher to control
cameras from the digital video recorder.
LV1
Playback/
searching
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Setting
Level
Concurrent
connection
restriction
16 users*2
3 users
1 user at LV3 or LV4
3 users at LV2, LV3 and LV4
16 users including a user for the DVR (1 user
for the DVR)
*1 Masked video cannot be monitored.
*2 However, the maximum number may not be possible
depending on the network conditions and the number of
screens displayed.
14 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Setting user
EXIT/OSD
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
ID SET>
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
Use the following procedure to set the user ID, password and
level.
The user ID must be between one and eight alphanumeric
characters, and the password between four and eight
alphanumeric characters.
Characters that can be entered: 0 to 9, A to Z
The operation is the same as “Setting user” (JP.112) from
“Security lock settings”.
Change “NETWORK CONTROL” user ID, password, and
level (settings described on this page) to change the values in
the “USER ID SET” screen of “SECURITY LOCK
SETTINGS”.
English
125
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 126 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
SCREEN SET
[EXIT/OSD] button
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
OPERATION
MOVE:JOG
[MENU] button
INTRODUCTION
Main Menu
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Jog dial
3
Setting quad and multi 9/16 display
“NORMAL” flashes for “1.MULTI SCREEN”.
Use the following procedure to change the display positions
for cameras in quad and multi 9/16 screens. Different
positions can be set for both the main monitor and monitor 2.
On the DSR-5009P, display positions can be changed on
quad and multi 9 screens.
02
05
03
01
06
04
07
02
09
05
03
08
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
06
12
z Each camera can only be displayed in one position on any
screen.
The cursor moves to “QUAD POSITION SET”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Setting multiple screen positions
‹NORMAL
CHANGE
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
The display sequence for cameras does
not change.
The display sequence for cameras
changes.
Turn the jog dial to select “4.SCREEN
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
5
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: CHANGE
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
MENU
2
Description
NETWORK
OPERATION
Example: Displaying Camera No. 05 in quad position 01
On the DSR-5009P, set for cameras No. 01 through 09.
1
Turn the jog dial to select “CHANGE”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
NETWORK
CONTROL
4
14
SETTINGS
01
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <QUAD POSITION SET> screen is displayed.
QUAD2
05 06
07 08
QUAD3
09 10
11 12
QUAD4
13 14
OTHER
MAIN MON.
QUAD1
01 02
03 04
15 16
MON.2
QUAD1
QUAD2
QUAD3
QUAD4
01 02
05 06
09 10
13 14
03 04
07 08
11 12
15 16
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
126
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 127 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
6
SCREEN SET
Turn the jog dial to select “01” for
“QUAD1” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Checking modified screen positions
Next, check the modified screen positions.
8
“01” flashes for “QUAD1”.
MAIN MON.
QUAD1
01 02
03 04
QUAD2
05 06
07 08
QUAD3
09 10
11 12
[KEY]
QUAD4
13 14
15 16
QUAD1 pattern is displayed. Turn the shuttle dial counterclockwise to return to the <QUAD POSITION SET> screen.
MON.2
QUAD1
QUAD2
QUAD3
QUAD4
01 02
05 06
09 10
13 14
03 04
07 08
11 12
15 16
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
7
Turn the jog dial to select either
“CHECK THE MAIN MON SCREEN” or
“CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
MAIN MON.
QUAD1
05 02
03 04
Turn the jog dial to select “05” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
QUAD2
05 06
07 08
QUAD3
09 10
11 12
07 08
QUAD3
09 10
11 12
QUAD4
13 14
15 16
MON.2
QUAD1
QUAD2
QUAD3
QUAD4
01 02
05 06
09 10
13 14
03 04
07 08
11 12
15 16
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
“01” changes to “05” for “QUAD1”.
MAIN MON.
QUAD1
05 02
03 04
QUAD2
05 06
QUAD4
13 14
15 16
<CHECK DISPLAY POSITION>
MAIN MON. QUAD1
MON.2
QUAD1
QUAD2
QUAD3
QUAD4
01 02
05 06
09 10
13 14
03 04
07 08
11 12
15 16
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
z The position of camera images on monitor 2 can be
changed in the same manner as on the main monitor.
9
05
02
03
04
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
English
127
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 128 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
SCREEN SET
4
Use the following procedure to scroll through video from all
cameras at a specified interval.
The interval for automatic selection can only be set for full
screen and quad display.
Turn the jog dial to set the interval to
“5S” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Automatic selection is set to an interval of 5 seconds.
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select “4.SCREEN
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“INDIV.” cannot be selected for “QUAD”.
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed.
z The interval applies to all cameras on the main monitor and
monitor 2. To set the interval for each camera when
displaying video at full screen, select “INDIV.” in step 4 and
then go to “MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET”.
z The interval can be set anywhere between 1 and 30
seconds.
6
Turn the jog dial to select “FULL” for
“2.SEQUENCE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
“1S” flashes for “FULL”.
NETWORK
CONTROL
3
Use the same operation to set the
switching interval for quad screen
display.
SETTINGS
2
5
OPERATION
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 5S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
Example: Automatic switching of the full-screen display
every 5 seconds.
1
INTRODUCTION
Setting the interval and monitors for
automatic screen selection
EXIT/OSD
Setting the time period to switch the display on
the main monitor and monitor 2
Example: Setting the display interval of each camera’s
video for the main monitor and monitor 2.
1
Specify “TIME PERIOD A” and “TIME PERIOD B”.
2
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Make timer settings for “TIME PERIOD
A” and “TIME PERIOD B” on the <TIME
PERIOD SET> screen. (JP.69)
NETWORK
OPERATION
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
MENU
OTHER
128
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 129 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
3
SCREEN SET
7
Turn the jog dial to select “4.SCREEN
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“T-1” flash for “TIME PERIOD”.
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed.
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00 CH
01 02 03 04 05 06
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
12:00)
07 08
1S 1S
1S 1S
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
4
Turn the jog dial to select “FULL” for
“2.SEQUENCE SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
8
“1S” flashes for “FULL”.
The cursor moves to “1S” for “01” and “MAIN MON.”.
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
5
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00 CH
01 02 03 04 05 06
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
Turn the jog dial to set the interval to
“INDIV.” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 5S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
Sets time period T-1.
T-2
Sets time period T-2.
T-3
Sets time period T-3.
T-4
Sets time period T-4.
Turn the jog dial to select the channel to
be changed for “MAIN MON.” or
“MON.2” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“1S” flashes.
On the DSR-5009P, set for cameras No. 01 through 09.
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00 CH
01 02 03 04 05 06
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
The <MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET> screen is displayed.
12:00)
07 08
1S 1S
1S 1S
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
12:00)
07 08
1S 1S
1S 1S
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
English
Description
‹ T-1
9
Turn the shuttle dial to select “MAIN/
MON. 2 MONITOR SET” and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00 CH
01 02 03 04 05 06
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
12:00)
07 08
1S 1S
1S 1S
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
Set the main monitor and monitor 2 display period for each
camera.
6
Turn the jog dial to select the time
period and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
129
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 130 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
SCREEN SET
10 Turn the jog dial to select “1S” to “30S”
Use the following procedure to set video from a specific
camera (including playback video) to be masked by a gray
pattern when it is not to be shown on a monitor screen.
After confirming this setting, the cursor moves one position to
the right.
12:00)
07 08
1S 1S
1S 1S
01
OPERATION
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00 CH
01 02 03 04 05 06
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
INTRODUCTION
Setting masks
or “OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
04
Example: Preventing the display of specific camera video
at a set period (as indicated by TIME PERIOD A and TIME
PERIOD B).
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹ 1S - 30S
Description
Channel not displayed.
1
Switching interval (seconds)
11 Use the same procedure to set other
channels.
SETTINGS
OFF
Make timer settings for “TIME PERIOD
A” and “TIME PERIOD B” on the <TIME
PERIOD SET> screen. (JP.69)
Specify “TIME PERIOD A” and “TIME PERIOD B”.
12 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
2
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Press the [MENU] button.
NETWORK
CONTROL
MENU
EXIT/OSD
3
z When setting a number of time periods together, use the
jog dial to move the cursor to the next period after
completing step 11, and repeat steps 9 through 10.
z The time period for “T-1” through “T-4” changes to that of
“TIME PERIOD A” or “TIME PERIOD B” on the <TIME
PERIOD SET> screen.
Turn the jog dial to select “4.SCREEN
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
4
Turn the jog dial to select “MASK” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
OTHER
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
NETWORK
SETTINGS
“OFF” flashes.
130
NETWORK
OPERATION
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed.
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 131 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
5
SCREEN SET
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
The cursor moves to “MASK SET”.
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: NORMAL
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: ON
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
6
7
<MASK SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00
CH
01 02 03 04 05
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MON. 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
NETWORK
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
- 12:00)
06 07 08
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
CH
MAIN MON.
MON. 2
NETWORK
14
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
OFF
OFF
OFF
12
OFF
OFF
OFF
Sets time period T-2.
T-3
Sets time period T-3.
T-4
Sets time period T-4.
13
OFF
OFF
OFF
15
OFF
OFF
OFF
Turn the jog dial to select the channel to
be changed and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
On the DSR-5009P, set for cameras No. 01 through 09.
<MASK SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00
CH
01 02 03 04 05
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MON. 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
NETWORK
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
- 12:00)
06 07 08
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
10 Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“T-1” flashes for “TIME PERIOD”.
8
Sets time period T-1.
T-2
9
The <MASK SET> screen is displayed.
10
OFF
OFF
OFF
‹ T-1
z Each camera can be set individually for the main monitor,
monitor 2 and network video.
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
09
OFF
OFF
OFF
Description
<MASK SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00
CH
01 02 03 04 05
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MON. 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
NETWORK
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
- 12:00)
06 07 08
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
CH
MAIN MON.
MON. 2
NETWORK
14
OFF
OFF
OFF
09
OFF
OFF
OFF
10
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
OFF
OFF
OFF
12
OFF
OFF
OFF
13
OFF
OFF
OFF
15
OFF
OFF
OFF
After confirming this setting, the cursor moves one position to
the right.
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
Turn the jog dial to select the time
period and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
<MASK SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00
CH
01 02 03 04 05
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MON. 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
NETWORK
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
- 12:00)
06 07 08
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
CH
MAIN MON.
MON. 2
NETWORK
14
OFF
OFF
OFF
10
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
OFF
OFF
OFF
12
OFF
OFF
OFF
13
OFF
OFF
OFF
15
OFF
OFF
OFF
- 12:00)
06 07 08
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
CH
MAIN MON.
MON. 2
NETWORK
14
OFF
OFF
OFF
09
OFF
OFF
OFF
10
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
OFF
OFF
OFF
12
OFF
OFF
OFF
13
OFF
OFF
OFF
15
OFF
OFF
OFF
Setting
Description
‹OFF
Masking is disabled.
ON
Masking is enabled.
z When set to “ON”, the playback video is also masked. (As
a result, playback video is not visible.)
To play back video, repeat step 5 and set masking to
“OFF”.
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
11 Use the same procedure to set other
channels.
English
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
After setting the period, the cursor moves to “OFF” for channel
“01” and “MAIN MON.”.
09
OFF
OFF
OFF
<MASK SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00
CH
01 02 03 04 05
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MON. 2
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
NETWORK
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
131
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 132 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
SCREEN SET
12 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
4
EXIT/OSD
INTRODUCTION
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Press the [CAMERA SELECT] button for
the camera whose color level is to be
set and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
“5” flashes.
<COLOR LEVEL SET>
-
CH01
5
Use the following procedure to adjust the color of video
displayed on monitors.
1
5
Turn the jog dial to select the “COLOR
- turn the
LEVEL” setting and then
shuttle dial clockwise.
SETTINGS
Setting the color level
COLOR LEVEL :
OPERATION
z When setting a number of time periods together, after
completing step 10, use the jog dial to select the next
period and then repeat the process from step 6.
z The time period for “T-1” through “T-4” changes to that of
“TIME PERIOD A” or “TIME PERIOD B” on the <TIME
PERIOD SET> screen.
z Network mask settings are valid only for the user
connecting to the network with ID1. Users connecting with
ID2, ID3 and ID4 are able to display all channels.
<COLOR LEVEL SET>
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
Turn the jog dial to select “4.SCREEN
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Setting
1 - 10
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
Turn the jog dial to select “4.COLOR
LEVEL SET” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
SETTINGS
The <COLOR LEVEL SET> screen is displayed.
<COLOR LEVEL SET>
OTHER
COLOR LEVEL :
Description
Manual adjustment to one of ten levels.
Light (1) to Dark (10)
Display is automatically in color when set
to 10.
NETWORK
OPERATION
6
CH01
5
[Settings] (The default setting is “5”)
The <SCREEN SET> screen is displayed.
3
COLOR LEVEL :
NETWORK
CONTROL
2
CH01
5
132
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 133 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
POWER LOSS/USED TIME
[EXIT/OSD] button
Main Menu
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
[MENU] button
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
[SHUTTLE
HOLD]
button
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Jog dial
3
Use the following procedure to check the date and time of
power losses, the amount of hard disk operation time and the
amount of power-on time.
1
Select “USED TIME” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <USED TIME> screen is displayed.
Press the [MENU] button.
(1)
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
(2)
(3)
(4)
MENU
<USED
INTERNAL UNIT DISK1
DISK2
POWER
F/W: M 0.12-00 / S
USED TIME
2
(5)
Turn the jog dial to select “5.POWER
LOSS/USED TIME” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
(1)
<POWER LOSS/USED
LOSS
03-02 00:05
----- --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:-USED TIME
TIME>
RECOVER
03-02 06:37
----- --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:-->
Check the date and time of power losses and the amount of
hard disk operation time.
:
:
:
:
:
00123H
-----H
-----H
-----H
00123H
z Press the [MENU RESET] button to clear the power loss
information and number of power losses.
(1) LOSS/RECOVER
Displays information in order for the eight most recent power
losses (i.e., the date and time of loss and recovery).
The number on the left is the number of power losses.
(Example: #001)
For all numbers above 999, the number “999” is displayed.
4
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The display returns to the normal screen.
EXIT/OSD
English
USE
USE
USE
USE
(1) DISK 1 USE
The hard disk 1 power usage duration is displayed.
(2) DISK 2 USE
The hard disk 2 power usage duration is displayed. If there is
only one hard disk, “------” is displayed.
(3) POWER
Displays the total amount of power-on time for the digital video
recorder.
(4) F/W
Displays the firmware version.
(5) EX-DISK1/EX-DISK2/EX-DISK3/EX-DISK4 USE,
POWER
Total usage time is shown for each hard disk when expanded.
The <POWER LOSS/USED TIME> screen is displayed.
POWER
#001
EX-DISK1
EX-DISK2
EX-DISK3
EX-DISK4
POWER
TIME>
USE : 00123H
USE : -----H
: 00123H
00.21-02 / P 00.00-09
133
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 134 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
6
INITIALIZATION LOG
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
OPERATION
MOVE:JOG
[MENU] button
INTRODUCTION
[EXIT/OSD] button
Main Menu
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Jog dial
Use the following procedure to display the eight most recent
entries in the initialization and re-recording log for the hard
disk.
Press the [MENU] button.
3
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The display returns to the normal screen.
MENU
2
SETTINGS
1
z “INITI.” is displayed when recording areas are changed.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
CONTROL
Turn the jog dial to select
“6.INITIALIZATION LOG” and then turn
the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <INITIALIZATION LOG> screen is displayed.
(1)
(3)
< INITIALIZATION LOG
TIME AREA
ACTION
--:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( ------
(4)
>
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
USER
----------------------------------------------------------------
NETWORK
OPERATION
DATE
-------------------------------------
(2)
NETWORK
SETTINGS
(1) DATE/TIME
Displays the time and date of initialization and area resetting.
(2) AREA
Displays the recording of the target area of initialization or
area resetting.
z ALL
z RECORD
z ARCHIVE
(3) ACTION
Displays whether initialization (JP.117) or AREA FULL
RESET (JP.79) was selected.
z INITI.
z RESET
(4) USER ID
Displays the user ID of the user that performed initialization
and area resetting.
OTHER
134
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 135 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
7
COPY MENU SETTINGS
[EXIT/OSD] button
Main Menu
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
MOVE:JOG
[MENU] button
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Jog dial
3
Use the following procedure to save menu settings or user ID
settings on a CompactFlash card or to load settings from a
CompactFlash card back onto the digital video recorder.
These functions make it easy to share the same settings on a
number of different digital video recorders.
Also connect to a network via a PC and load from or save to
the hard disk.
Turn the jog dial to select “SAVE
MENUS TO CF” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
<WARNING>
SAVE MENUS TO CF !!
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
CONTINUE?
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-04.00
SAVE MENUS TO CF
NO
->
LOAD MENUS FROM CF
->
COPY USER ID SETTINGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE ^YES^ FOR ^AREA SETTINGS^,
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
4
Saving menu settings
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The saving process begins.
Use the following procedure to save menu settings to a
CompactFlash card.
Insert a CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash card slot.
1
Press the [MENU] button.
SAVING TO CF!!
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
When this is completed, “SAVING FINISHED!” is displayed. A
file named “MENUCOPY.BIN” is created in the CompactFlash
directory.
Turn the jog dial to select “7.COPY
MENU SETTINGS” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <COPY MENU SETTINGS> screen is displayed.
English
135
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 136 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
7
COPY MENU SETTINGS
5
Use the following procedure to load menu settings saved on a
CompactFlash card to the digital video recorder.
Turn the jog dial to select “LOAD
MENUS FROM CF” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Loading menu settings
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
<WARNING>
z When loading a menu setting file to the recorder, specify
whether recording area settings are to be copied.
Normally, “COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS” is set
to “NO”. If this is set to “YES”, the hard disk is initialized as
part of the loading process and all recorded data is lost.
z Only files from the same DVR TYPE VER No. model can
be loaded. When loading of a file that cannot be loaded is
attempted, an error message is displayed.
CONTINUE?
NO
6
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
OPERATION
1
LOAD MENUS FROM CF !!
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The loading process starts.
SETTINGS
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select “7.COPY
MENU SETTINGS” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
When the load is completed, “SYSTEM INITIALIZING” is
displayed and the display returns to the camera video.
The <COPY MENU SETTINGS> screen is displayed.
NETWORK
CONTROL
3
NETWORK
OPERATION
Turn the jog dial to select “COPY USER
ID SETTINGS” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“NO” flashes.
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-04.00
SAVE MENUS TO CF
->
4
NETWORK
SETTINGS
LOAD MENUS FROM CF
->
COPY USER ID SETTINGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE ^YES^ FOR ^AREA SETTINGS^,
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
Turn the jog dial to select “NO” or
“YES” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
OTHER
136
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 137 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
7
COPY MENU SETTINGS
5
Copying the recording area settings
The <WARNING> screen is displayed.
Use the following procedure to copy recording area settings.
1
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
<WARNING>
Press the [MENU] button.
SAVE MENUS TO CF!!
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
CONTINUE?
MENU
NO
2
Turn the jog dial to select “7.COPY
MENU SETTINGS” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
6
The <COPY MENU SETTINGS> screen is displayed.
The cursor is displayed on “SAVE MENUS TO CF”.
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The copying process begins.
When copying is completed, the display returns to the
previous screen.
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-04.00
SAVING FINISHED!!
SAVE MENUS TO CF
->
SAVE MENUS TO CF
LOAD MENUS FROM CF
->
COPY USER ID SETTIGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE ^YES^ FOR ^AREA SETTINGS^,
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
3
LOAD MENUS FROM CF
->
COPY USER ID SETTINGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE ^YES^ FOR ^AREA SETTINGS^,
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
Turn the jog dial to select “COPY
RECORDING AREA SETTINGS” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“NO” flashes.
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-04.00
SAVE MENUS TO CF
->
LOAD MENUS FROM CF
->
COPY USER ID SETTINGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE ^YES^ FOR ^AREA SETTINGS^,
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
4
Turn the jog dial to select “YES” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor appears on “SAVE MENUS TO CF”.
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-04.00
SAVE MENUS TO CF
->
LOAD MENUS FROM CF
->
COPY USER ID SETTIGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : YES
*IF YOU CHOOSE ^YES^ FOR ^AREA SETTINGS^,
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
English
->
137
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 138 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
[FUNC.] button
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
Shuttle dial
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
OPERATION
MOVE:JOG
[EXIT/OSD] button
INTRODUCTION
[MENU] button
Main Menu
SELECT:SHUTTLE
Jog dial
The following settings can be made with <ADVANCED MENU
SET>.
<ADVANCED MENU SET>
1.ROI SET
2.ALARM NOTICE SET
3.CAMERA CONTROL SET
4.PPP SET
5.TIME ZONE/NTP SET
4. PPP SET (JP.147)
Displays the PPP settings.
This cannot be set from
the digital video recorder.
Set this on a PC
connected to the network.
SELECT:SHUTTLE
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
OFF
OFF
OFF
ACTIVE ROI
OFF
OFF
OFF
<PPP SET>
DIAL UP
: OFF
DIAL UP SET
->
DIAL IN
: OFF
DIAL IN SET
->
CIRCUIT TYPE
: DTMF
MODEM INI. COMMAND
:
BAUD RATE
: 115200 bps
DATA SIZE
: 8 bits
PARITY
: NONE
STOP BIT
:1
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
5. TIME ZONE/NTP SET (JP.149)
Use the Internet or an NTP
server on a LAN to
TIME ZONE
synchronize the time.
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET ---->
<TIME ZONE SET>
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
2. ALARM NOTICE SET (JP.144)
Receive notification by e<ALARM NOTICE SET>
mail when an alarm event
ALARM NOTICE
: OFF
or device malfunction
SMTP SERVER ADDRESS :
occurs.
USER MAIL ADDRESS :
This cannot be set from
SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET ->
the digital video recorder.
SUBJECT :
Set this on a PC
AUTHENTICATION
: NO USE
connected to the network.
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
NETWORK
OPERATION
1. ROI SET (JP.139)
Set the Region of Interest
(ROI) to enable recording,
at different picture quality,
only of areas preset on the
monitor or areas where
motion is detected. Areas
where intruders are
detected, for example, can
be recorded at higher
picture quality.
->
->
->
->
->
PELCO COAX
--- | 11 OFF
2ND RS-485/422 001 | 12 OFF
OFF
--- | 13 OFF
OFF
--- | 14 OFF
OFF
--- | 15 OFF
OFF
--- | 16 BBV COAX
2ND RS485/422 PROTOCOL : OFF
NETWORK
CONTROL
MOVE:JOG
03
04
05
06
07
08
ADD
-----------------
SETTINGS
3. CAMERA CONTROL SET (JP.145)
Set camera control when
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>
cameras with remote
CH PROTOCOL
ADD | CH PROTOCOL
operation capability are
01 SANYO COAX
000 | 09 OFF
connected.
02 BBV COAX
--- | 10 OFF
Configuration
NETWORK
SETTINGS
POP3 SERVER ADDRESS :
USER ID
:
PASSWORD
:
OTHER
138
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 139 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
3
Setting ROI
Set the Region of Interest (ROI) to enable recording at
different picture qualities, only of areas preset on the monitor.
Enables recording at high picture qualities for areas where
motion is detected.
This function allows you to raise the quality level for the preset
ROI or lower the quality level for unnecessary areas without
changing the image size each time.
Turn the jog dial to select “1.ROI SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <ROI SET> screen is displayed.
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
OFF
OFF
OFF
ACTIVE ROI
OFF
OFF
OFF
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
Setting the ROI
There are three static areas in the ROI. The static areas are
fixed and preset.
Perform the following settings.
z QUALITY: Set for each of the three static areas in the ROI.
z ACTIVE ROI: Set each of the three static areas to always
activate or activate only when motion is detected.
z EFFECTIVE MODE: Set to perform normal recording or
alarm recording.
z AREA/SENSITIVITY: Set delay for time period, sensitivity,
and triggering finish.
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET ---->
4
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The camera number flashes.
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
z Refer to “Setting ROI areas” (JP.142) for static area
settings.
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
OFF
OFF
OFF
ACTIVE ROI
OFF
OFF
OFF
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET ---->
z If ROI settings overlap, the settings from the previous row
are prioritized.
1
5
Press the [MENU] button.
Turn the jog dial to select the camera
number for the camera to set ROI for
and turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “QUALITY” and “ACTIVE ROI” in
“STATIC AREA 1”.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select
“8.ADVANCED MENU SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
6
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes for “QUALITY” in “STATIC AREA 1”.
The <ADVANCED MENU SET> screen is displayed.
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
OFF
OFF
OFF
ACTIVE ROI
OFF
OFF
OFF
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET ---->
English
139
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 140 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
7
ADVANCED MENU SET
10 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “EFFECTIVE REC MODE”.
“OFF” flashes for “ACTIVE ROI”.
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
MIN
OFF
OFF
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
ACTIVE ROI
OFF
OFF
OFF
“NORMAL REC” flashes.
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
Normal
(Same picture quality as outside ROI area)
HIGH
Fine
MAX
Best quality
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET ---->
12 Turn the jog dial to select the
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
MIN
OFF
OFF
Set the recording mode to enable ROI.
ACTIVE ROI
OFF
OFF
OFF
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
Description
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Activates ROI always
Setting
Activates ROI only in areas with motion
detected
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
MIN
LOW
HIGH
ROI is enabled during normal recording.
ALARM REC
ROI is enabled during alarm recording.
NORMAL/
ALARM
ROI is enabled during normal and alarm
recording.
ACTIVE ROI
OFF
OFF
OFF
OTHER
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
Description
‹NORMAL REC
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Use the same procedure to set the
“QUALITY” and “ACTIVE ROI” settings
in “STATIC AREA 2” and “STATIC
AREA 3”.
NETWORK
OPERATION
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET ---->
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
9
ACTIVE ROI
OFF
OFF
OFF
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET ---->
ON
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
MIN
LOW
HIGH
NETWORK
CONTROL
“EFFECTIVE REC MODE” setting and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor moves to “STATIC AREA 2”.
Setting
ACTIVE ROI
OFF
OFF
OFF
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” or “OFF”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
‹OFF
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
MIN
LOW
HIGH
SETTINGS
Low quality
‹OFF
8
Description
LOW
OPERATION
11 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Lowest quality
ACTIVE ROI
OFF
OFF
OFF
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET ---->
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET ---->
MIN
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
MIN
LOW
HIGH
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
Setting
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select the
“QUALITY” setting and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET ---->
140
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 141 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
13 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
15 Turn the jog dial to select the time
period and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
The <ROI (AREA/SENSITIVITY)> screen is displayed.
The cursor moves to “LEVEL”.
2
1
2
3
1
CH-01
T-1
LEVEL: OFF
TIME LAG: OFF
3
CH-01
z When “QUALITY” are all set to “OFF”, the <AREA/
SENSITIVITY> screen is not displayed.
z The frame is not displayed for “STATIC AREA” numbers
with “QUALITY” set to “OFF”.
T-1
LEVEL: OFF
TIME LAG: OFF
16 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“OFF” flashes.
When only “QUALITY” is set for “STATIC AREA”, “CH-01”
appears in the bottom of the screen. Set the area for ROI.
(JP.142)
2
1
14 Turn the jog dial to select “T-1” and
3
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“T-1” flashes.
CH-01
LEVEL: OFF
TIME LAG: OFF
17 Turn the jog dial to select the response
2
sensitivity and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
1
While responding, a beep sounds and the area number is
highlighted.
The cursor moves to “TIME LAG”.
3
CH-01
T-1
LEVEL: OFF
TIME LAG: OFF
2
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
T-1
Description
‹T-1
Time period T-1
T-2
Time period T-2
T-3
Time period T-3
T-4
Time period T-4
1
3
CH-01
T-1
LEVEL: OFF
TIME LAG: OFF
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
z “T-1” through “T-4” are the times of TIME PERIOD A or
TIME PERIOD B set on the <TIME PERIOD SET> screen.
(JP.69)
‹OFF
1 - 10
Description
Response sensitivity is disabled.
Response sensitivity is enabled. Lower
numbers correspond to higher levels of
sensitivity.
z Set “TIME LAG” to OFF when “LEVEL” is set.
English
141
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 142 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
18 Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Setting ROI areas
“OFF” flashes.
Use the following procedure to select the position of the areas
for ROI.
2
1
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
1
MENU
3
T-1
LEVEL: OFF
OPERATION
CH-01
TIME LAG: OFF
2
19 Turn the jog dial to select the time lag
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the jog dial to select
“8.ADVANCED MENU SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <ADVANCED MENU SET> screen is displayed.
2
SETTINGS
1
3
CH-01
T-1
LEVEL: OFF
3
TIME LAG: OFF
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹OFF
1S - 10S
The <ROI SET> screen is displayed.
Description
No operation after the response-stop
CH-01
STATIC AREA 1 :
STATIC AREA 2 :
STATIC AREA 3 :
Time lag after the response-stop (seconds)
20 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
ON
ON
ON
NETWORK
CONTROL
Setting
Turn the jog dial to select “1.ROI SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
ACTIVE ROI
OFF
OFF
OFF
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET ---->
EXIT/OSD
Turn the jog dial to select “AREA/
SENSITIVITY SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
The <AREA/SENSITIVITY SET> screen is displayed.
The normal camera image is displayed overlapping.
The frame for the number is not displayed if “QUALITY” is set
to “OFF” in the previous screen.
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
NETWORK
SETTINGS
2
1
3
CH-01
T-1
LEVEL: OFF
TIME LAG: OFF
OTHER
142
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 143 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
5
ADVANCED MENU SET
8
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Area settings mode is activated and an icon appears in the
upper right part of the screen.
Set the areas in frame 2 and frame 3 in
the same way.
The cursor moves to “T-1”.
Icon
2
2
1
1
3
3
CH-01
6
CH-01
T-1
LEVEL: OFF
9
EXIT/OSD
3
z If areas coincide, the smaller area number is prioritized.
CH-01
T-1
LEVEL: OFF
TIME LAG: OFF
Turn the jog dial to move the cursor to the left or right.
Press the [FUNC.] button and turn the jog dial to move the
cursor up or down.
z Large ROI size decreases ROI effectiveness.
Turn the jog dial to move the cursor (the
orange †) to the lower right of the
position where an area is to be set and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The cursor (the orange †) moves to the top left of frame 2.
2
1
3
CH-01
T-1
LEVEL: OFF
TIME LAG: OFF
Turn the jog dial to move the cursor to the left or right.
Press the [FUNC.] button and turn the jog dial to move the
cursor up or down.
English
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
2
FUNC.
TIME LAG: OFF
z Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise to return to the
previous operation.
The cursor moves to the bottom right.
7
LEVEL: OFF
TIME LAG: OFF
Turn the jog dial to move the cursor (the
orange †) to the upper left of the
position where an area is to be set and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
FUNC.
T-1
143
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 144 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
4
The <SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET> screen is displayed.
Use the following procedure to receive notification by e-mail
when an alarm event occurs while the digital video recorder is
connected to a network. Alarm notification cannot be set from
the digital video recorder.
Set this on a PC connected to the network. (JP.201)
The following section describes how to display the alarm
notification setting details.
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is displayed.
<SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET>
USE MAIL ADDRESS
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
IMAGE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
(1)
(3)
OPERATION
1
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Setting alarm notification
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select
“8.ADVANCED MENU SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
5
AUTHENTICATION
POP3 SERVER ADDRESS
USER ID
PASSWORD
NETWORK
OPERATION
<ALARM NOTICE SET>
ALARM NOTICE
: OFF
SMTP SERVER ADDRES :
USER MAIL ADDRES
:
SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET ->
SUBJECT :
NETWORK
CONTROL
EXIT/OSD
The <ALARM NOTICE SET> screen is displayed.
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The normal display is restored.
Turn the jog dial to select “2.ALARM
NOTICE SET” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
SETTINGS
(1) USE
Displays whether or not an alarm notification is sent to the
recipient e-mail address.
(2) MAIL ADDRESS
Displays the e-mail address to which the alarm notification is
sent.
(3) IMAGE
Displays whether or not an alarm image is attached to the email.
The <ADVANCED MENU SET> screen is displayed.
3
(2)
: NO USE
:
:
:
NETWORK
SETTINGS
(1) ALARM NOTICE
Displays whether or not an alarm notification is sent.
(2) SMTP SERVER ADDRESS
Displays the SMTP server address.
(3) USER MAIL ADDRESS
Displays the e-mail address from which the alarm notification
is sent.
(4) SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET
Displays the <SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET> screen.
(J step 4)
(5) SUBJECT
Displays the e-mail subject.
(6) AUTHENTICATION
Displays whether or not user authentication is performed.
(7) POP3 SERVER ADDRESS
Displays the POP3 server address.
(8) USER ID
Displays the user ID.
(9) PASSWORD
Displays the password.
OTHER
144
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 145 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
4
Camera control settings
Set when cameras with remote operation capability are
connected.
To perform camera control for a SANYO camera, set
“CONTROL” in the <RS-232C/RS-485 SET> screen to RS485. (JP.115)
Perform the following connections and set camera control to
use in full screen display.
Turn the jog dial to select the camera
number corresponding to a connected
dome camera and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
The “PROTOCOL” input field flashes.
On the DSR-5009P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
CH
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Connections necessary for remote operation:
z Connect coaxial control cameras to the VIDEO terminal.
z Connect the Sanyo RS-485 control camera to the RS-485
(RJ-11) terminal.
z Connect another maker’s RS485/422 control camera to the
2ND RS485/422 terminal.
5
z If “ADDRESS” in the <RS-232C/RS-485 SET> screen
(JP.116) is set to between “001” and “008”, camera
control settings can be performed. Camera control settings
are not available if “ADDRESS” is set to “000” or between
“009” and “127”.
1
The cursor moves to the next “PROTOCOL” field.
CH
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Press the [MENU] button.
MENU
Setting
‹OFF
Turn the jog dial to select “3.CAMERA
CONTROL SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
English
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>
PROTOCOL
ADD | CH PROTOCOL
OFF
--- | 09 OFF
OFF
--- | 10 OFF
OFF
--- | 11 OFF
OFF
--- | 12 OFF
OFF
--- | 13 OFF
OFF
--- | 14 OFF
OFF
--- | 15 OFF
OFF
--- | 16 OFF
2ND RS485/422 PROTOCOL : OFF
ADD
-----------------
Description
No protocol
SANYO COAX1
SANYO COAX
SANYO RS485
SANYO RS485
BBV COAX
BBV COAX
PELCO COAX
PELCO COAX
2ND RS-485/422
2ND RS-485/422
SANYO COAX2
SANYO COAX (High speed)
z “COAX” stands for coaxial control and the video signal and
camera control signal. This requires no further wiring for
signal control.
The <CAMERA CONTROL SET> screen is displayed.
CH
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>
PROTOCOL
ADD | CH PROTOCOL
SANYO COAX1
001 | 09 OFF
OFF
--- | 10 OFF
OFF
--- | 11 OFF
OFF
--- | 12 OFF
OFF
--- | 13 OFF
OFF
--- | 14 OFF
OFF
--- | 15 OFF
OFF
--- | 16 OFF
2ND RS485/422 PROTOCOL : OFF
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Turn the jog dial to select
“8.ADVANCED MENU SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <ADVANCED MENU SET> screen is displayed.
3
ADD
-----------------
Turn the jog dial to select a protocol and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
2
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>
PROTOCOL
ADD | CH PROTOCOL
OFF
--- | 09 OFF
OFF
--- | 10 OFF
OFF
--- | 11 OFF
OFF
--- | 12 OFF
OFF
--- | 13 OFF
OFF
--- | 14 OFF
OFF
--- | 15 OFF
OFF
--- | 16 OFF
2ND RS485/422 PROTOCOL : OFF
6
ADD
-----------------
145
Use the same procedure to set the
connection channels of other dome
cameras.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 146 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
7
ADVANCED MENU SET
8
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>
PROTOCOL
ADD | CH PROTOCOL
SANYO COAX1
001 | 09 OFF
BBV COAX
--- | 10 OFF
PELCO COAX
--- | 11 OFF
2ND RS-485/422 004 | 12 OFF
OFF
--- | 13 OFF
OFF
--- | 14 OFF
OFF
--- | 15 OFF
OFF
--- | 16 OFF
2ND RS485/422 PROTOCOL : OFF
z Camera control address
The camera address is a fixed value and is as follows.
If a protocol other than SANYO COAX1, SANYO RS-485
or 2ND RS485/RS422 is selected, “---” is displayed for the
cameral control address.
On the DSR-5009P, CH1-CH9 are available.
ADD
-----------------
DVR/
RS-485
address
DVR1:001
ADD
-----------------
DVR2:002
Camera control
address
CH1
001
CH1
017
CH2
002
CH2
018
CH3
003
CH3
019
CH4
004
CH4
020
CH5
005
CH5
021
CH6
006
•
•
CH7
007
•
•
CH8
008
CH9
009
CH10
•
•
CH1
113
010
CH2
114
CH11
011
CH3
115
CH12
012
CH4
116
CH13
013
CH5
117
CH14
014
•
•
CH15
015
CH15
127
CH16
016
CH16
000*1
DVR8:008
*1 Cannot be operated from a VSP-9000 controller.
9
NETWORK
OPERATION
z DATA SPEED for protocol set in “2ND RS485/422
PROTOCOL” is fixed.
Set the DATA SPEED on the camera in the following
manner.
z PELCO: 2,400 bps
z KALATEL: 4,800 bps
z SENSORMATIC: 4,800 bps
z BBV: 9,600 bps
NETWORK
CONTROL
CH
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>
PROTOCOL
ADD | CH PROTOCOL
SANYO COAX1
001 | 09 OFF
BBV COAX
--- | 10 OFF
PELCO COAX
--- | 11 OFF
2ND RS-485/422 004 | 12 OFF
OFF
--- | 13 OFF
OFF
--- | 14 OFF
OFF
--- | 15 OFF
OFF
--- | 16 OFF
2ND RS485/422 PROTOCOL : BBV
DVR/
RS-485
address
SETTINGS
Turn the jog dial to select the protocol
to set and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
Camera control
address
OPERATION
CH
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
INTRODUCTION
When “2ND RS485/422” is selected for
“PROTOCOL”, turn the jog dial to select
“2ND RS485/422 PROTOCOL”, and turn
the shuttle clockwise.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
146
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 147 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
Operating the camera with the digital video
recorder
1
z Turn the shuttle dial during automatic panning, automatic
camera selection, or TOUR for manual panning and turn
the jog dial for manual tilt and to cancel automatic modes.
z Operation is only possible for one camera.
z When switching to another camera during automatic
panning, automatic camera selection, or TOUR, the
following operations are available only for the second
camera. Automatic panning, automatic camera selection,
and TOUR continue for the first camera.
z When an alarm occurs during camera operation, the CH
that the alarm occurred on is displayed on the screen and
camera operation mode is canceled.
Press the [FUNC.] button.
Making PPP settings
The FUNC. indicator lights up and camera operation mode is
activated.
The settings for dial-up Internet connections are displayed.
PPP settings cannot be set from the digital video recorder.
Set these on a PC connected to the network. (JP.202)
FUNC.
2
Button name in
normal mode
Button
Operation
[MENU]
button
[MENU] button
Displays the camera menu
screen.
[ENTER]
button
[EXIT/OSD] button
Determines items on the
camera menu screen.
[QUAD] button
Press the [PRESET] button
and then the [CAMERA
SELECT] button to move to
a preset position.
[PRESET]
button
[AUTO PAN]
[MULTI] button
button
Enables auto panning
(refer to note)
[SEQUENCE]
[MON2] button
button
Enables automatic camera
selection (refer to note)
[TOUR]
button
[PLUS] button
Enables TOUR (refer to
note)
[ZOOMK]
button
[
Zooms out
[ZOOML]
button
[alarm
[AF] button
[PLAY/STOP]
button
Enables auto focus
[FOCUS]
button
[SHUTTLE HOLD]
button
Press the [FOCUS] button
and use [ZOOM ↑] or
[ZOOM ↓] button to manually
adjust the focus.
alarm] button
] button
1
[IRIS] button [STILL] button
PAN
Shuttle dial
Controls manual panning
TILT
Jog dial
Controls manual tilting
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is
displayed.
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select
“8.ADVANCED MENU SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <ADVANCED MENU SET> screen is displayed.
Zooms in
Press the [IRIS] button and
use [ZOOM ↑] or [ZOOM ↓]
button to adjust the iris
(aperture).
English
z To enable PPP settings, set “CONTROL” in “RS-232C/RS485 SET” on P.115 to “RS-485”.
Click the buttons to operate the camera.
147
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 148 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
3
ADVANCED MENU SET
5
Turn the shuttle dial counter-clockwise.
INTRODUCTION
Turn the jog dial to select “4.PPP SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The display returns to the <PPP SET> screen.
The <PPP SET> screen is displayed.
<PPP SET>
DIAL UP
: OFF
DIAL UP SET
->
DIAL IN
: OFF
DIAL IN SET
->
CIRCUIT TYPE
: DTMF
MODEM INI. COMMAND
:
BAUD RATE
: 115200 bps
DATA SIZE
: 8 bits
PARITY
: NONE
STOP BIT
:1
<PPP SET>
DIAL UP
: OFF
DIAL UP SET
->
DIAL IN
: OFF
DIAL IN SET
->
CIRCUIT TYPE
: DTMF
MODEM INI. COMMAND
:
BAUD RATE
: 115200 bps
DATA SIZE
: 8 bits
PARITY
: NONE
STOP BIT
:1
6
(1) DIAL UP
Displays whether or not to use a dial-up connection.
(2) DIAL UP SET
Displays the <DIAL UP SET> screen. (J step 4)
(3) DIAL IN
Displays whether or not to use a dial-in connection.
(4) DIAL IN SET
Displays the <DIAL IN SET> screen. (J step 6)
(5) CIRCUIT TYPE
Displays the type of phone line connected to the modem.
(6) MODEM INI. COMMAND
Displays the AT command to control the modem.
(7) BAUD RATE
Display the communication speed.
(8) DATA SIZE
Displays the data size.
(9) PARITY
Displays the parity.
(10) STOP BIT
Displays the stop bit.
The <DIAL IN SET> screen is displayed.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
<DIAL IN SET>
LOGIN ID
:
PASSWORD
:
AUTHENTICATION
: AUTO
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168.250.250
CLIENT IP ADDRESS : 192.168.250.251
The <DIAL UP SET> screen is displayed.
Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The display returns to the normal screen.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<DIAL UP SET>
PROVIDER TEL NO :
LOGIN ID
:
PASSWORD
:
AUTHENTICATION
: AUTO
AUTO IP ADDRESS : 0. 0. 0. 0
NETWORK
OPERATION
7
NETWORK
CONTROL
(1) LOGIN ID
Displays the login ID.
(2) PASSWORD
Displays the password.
(3) AUTHENTICATION
Displays the authentication protocol.
(4) IP ADDRESS
Displays the IP address of the digital video recorder.
(5) CLIENT IP ADDRESS
Displays the IP address of the PC.
Turn the jog dial to select “DIAL UP
SET” and then turn the shuttle dial
clockwise.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Turn the jog dial to select “DIAL IN SET”
and then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
SETTINGS
4
OPERATION
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
OTHER
(1) PROVIDER TEL NO
Displays the phone number of the provider.
(2) LOGIN ID
Displays the login ID.
(3) PASSWORD
Displays the password.
(4) AUTHENTICATION
Displays the authentication protocol.
(5) AUTO IP ADDRESS
Displays the automatic IP address.
148
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 149 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
ADVANCED MENU SET
Setting
Time zone/NTP setting
Use the following procedure to synchronize the time using the
Internet or an NTP server on a LAN.
1
MENU
2
Turn the jog dial to select
“8.ADVANCED MENU SET” and then
turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
The <ADVANCED MENU SET> screen is displayed.
3
Greenwich Mean Time -11
hours, Midway Island, Samoa
GMT-10 Hawaii
Greenwich Mean Time -10
hours, Hawaii
GMT-09 Alaska
Greenwich Mean Time -9
hours, Alaska
GMT-08 Pacific Time
Greenwich Mean Time -8
hours, Pacific Time
GMT-07 Arizona, Mountain
Time
Greenwich Mean Time -7
hours, Arizona
GMT-06 Central Time
Greenwich Mean Time -6
hours, Central Time
GMT-05 Eastern Time
Greenwich Mean Time -5
hours, Eastern Time
GMT-04 Atlantic Time
(Canada)
Greenwich Mean Time -4
hours, Atlantic Time (Canada)
GMT-03:30 Newfoundland
Greenwich Mean Time -3 hours
30 minutes, Newfoundland
GMT-03 Brasilia
Greenwich Mean Time -3
hours, Brasilia
GMT-02 Mid-Atlantic
Greenwich Mean Time -2
hours, Mid-Atlantic
Press the [MENU] button.
The MENU indicator lights up and the <MAIN MENU> is displayed.
Turn the jog dial to select “5.TIME
ZONE/NTP SET” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
Description
GMT-11 Midway Island,
Samoa
GMT-01 Azores, Cap Verde Greenwich Mean Time -1 hour,
Is.
Azores
The <TIME ZONE SET> / <NTP SET> screen is displayed.
‹GMT Dublin, Lisbon,
London
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
Greenwich Mean Time, Dublin,
Lisbon, London
GMT+01 Amsterdam,
Berlin, Rome
Greenwich Mean Time +1 hour,
Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome
GMT+02 Athens, Istanbul,
Minsk
Greenwich Mean Time +2
hours, Athens, Istanbul, Minsk
GMT+03 Moscow,
Baghdad, Riyadh
Greenwich Mean Time +3
hours, Moscow, Baghdad,
Riyadh
GMT+03:30 Tehran
Greenwich Mean Time +3
hours 30 minutes, Tehran
“GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London” flashes.
GMT+04 Kabul, Baku,
Tbilisi
Greenwich Mean Time +4
hours, Kabul, Baku, Tbilisi
5
GMT+05 Islamabad,
Tashkent
Greenwich Mean Time +5
hours, Islamabad, Tashkent
GMT+05:30 Mumbai,
Kolkata
Greenwich Mean Time +5
hours 30 minutes, Mumbai,
Kolkata
GMT+06 Almaty, Dhaka
Greenwich Mean Time +6
hours, Almaty, Dhaka
GMT+07 Bangkok, Hanoi,
Jakarta
Greenwich Mean Time +7
hours, Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta
GMT+08 Beijing, Hong
Kong
Greenwich Mean Time +8
hours, Beijing, Hong Kong
GMT+09 Osaka, Sapporo,
Tokyo
Greenwich Mean Time +9
hours, Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo
GMT+10 Canberra, Sydney
Greenwich Mean Time +10
hours, Canberra, Sydney
GMT+11 Magadan,
Solomon Is.
Greenwich Mean Time +11
hours, Magadan, Solomon Is.
GMT+12 Auckland,
Wellington
Greenwich Mean Time +12
hours, Auckland, Wellington
GMT+12 Fiji, Marshall Is.
Greenwich Mean Time +12
hours, Fiji, Marshall Is.
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
4
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
Turn the jog dial to select the “TIME
ZONE” setting and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
Set the time zone. Select the region where the digital video
recorder is installed.
The cursor moves to “SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER”.
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
GMT-12 Eniwetok,
Kwajalein
English
Description
Greenwich Mean Time -12
hours, Eniwetok, Kwajalein
149
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 150 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
6
ADVANCED MENU SET
9
Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
“01” flashes.
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : ON
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 192.168.001.020
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
Turn the jog dial to select “ON” and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
10 Set “TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE”.
The cursor moves to “NTP SERVER ADDRESS”.
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : ON
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹OFF
8
Description
To use NTP server
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
To not use NTP server
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : ON
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 192.168.001.020
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 10:30
Set “NTP SERVER ADDRESS”.
11 Press the [EXIT/OSD] button.
The setting is completed and the display returns to the normal
screen.
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
NETWORK
OPERATION
(1) Turn the shuttle dial clockwise.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select the first number (0 to 255) and
then turn the shuttle dial clockwise. (Also use the
[CAMERA SELECT] 0-9 buttons or the [QUAD] button (0)
to input.)
(3) Use the same procedure to enter the remaining numbers.
The cursor moves to “TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE”.
NETWORK
CONTROL
Example: 10:30
(1) Turn the jog dial to select “10” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
“00” (minutes) flashes.
(2) Turn the jog dial to select “30” and then turn the shuttle
dial clockwise.
Default setting: 01:00 (Time is updated at 1 AM.)
SETTINGS
Set the time to synchronize. The time is synchronized with the
clock on the NTP server and updated each day at the
specified time.
Hours: Select from 01 to 23.
Minutes: Select 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50.
<TIME ZONE SET>
ON
OPERATION
7
INTRODUCTION
“OFF” flashes.
Turn the jog dial to select “TIME TO
SYNCHRONIZE” and then turn the
shuttle dial clockwise.
EXIT/OSD
NETWORK
SETTINGS
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 192.168.001.020
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
OTHER
150
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 151 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 152 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
Manual for Remote Operation
by Network Connection
e11_l8hbd_xe_nw_7.fm Page 153 Wednesday, April 6, 2005 6:27 PM
1
GETTING PREPARED
The digital video recorder can be remotely controlled from PCs when the unit is connected to a network.
Camera
1
DVR (Digital Video Recorder)
16
Switch
Switch
LAN cable
10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX
Category 5 Straight
1
15
PC/AT compatible
machine
Operations possible with PC control
Digital video recorder network
settings
z Menu settings, recording, playback, and other similar
operations are possible from the PC screen.
z A maximum of 15 PCs can be simultaneously connected to
a single DVR (Digital Video Recorder). However, the
maximum number may not be possible depending on the
NET conditions and the number of screens displayed.
(Example)
z Users with user level LV1: 11 PCs
z Users with user level LV2: 3 PCs
z Users with user level LV4: 1 PC
z Control of the DVR can be freely switched from the unit
itself to the PC and vice versa. Note that operation of the
unit is not affected by simply connecting a cable.
z In order to provide security for computer control, operations
are restricted according to the user level. (JP.191)
z When controlling the digital video recorder by computer
over the Internet or LAN, network settings such as IP
address settings are necessary.
See P.120 for more setting details.
z When a pre-existing network is being used, a check must
be carried out by that network’s administrator to confirm
that the set IP addresses do not coincide with other IP
addresses already in use.
Saving and playing back sound
z The dedicated application DVR Viewer2 (Ver. 1.0.0 or
later) must be installed in order to store or play back audio
on a networked PC or to play back video with audio stored
on a PC, CompactFlash card or other storage media.
Please either install the software from the CD-ROM
included with this product or download it from our website
listed below.
z The JPEG2000 plug-in is required to view images.
Please download it from our website listed below.
z Settings for some functions such as live motion detection
cannot be made with Internet Explorer. To make further
detailed settings, use the dedicated software. Please
contact the dealer for details.
Sanyo website URL:
http://www.sanyosecurity.com
English
153
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 154 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
GETTING PREPARED
2
Click the [Security] tab.
INTRODUCTION
Installing DVR Viewer2
The [Security] screen is displayed.
See P.205 for installing and operating DVR Viewer2.
Setting Internet Options
After installing DVR Viewer2, use the following procedure to
make the Internet security settings.
1
OPERATION
Select [Internet Options...] from the
Internet Explorer [Tools] menu.
The [Internet Options] window is displayed.
Example: Windows XP
SETTINGS
3
Click [Custom Level...].
Confirm that [Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins] is set to
[Enable].
If this is not the case, click [Enable] for [Run ActiveX controls
and plug-ins] to configure this setting as shown below.
NETWORK
CONTROL
The [Security Settings] window is displayed.
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
This completes the Internet security setting procedure.
154
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 155 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
GETTING PREPARED
6
Minimum system requirements
Computer: PC/AT compatible machine
Operating system: Windows 98/98 SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP
Browser: Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 or later
Video: 65,000 colors, resolution 800 x 600 dpi or higher
Select [Use the following IP address:]
and then type in the IP address and the
subnet mask.
Recommended specifications
CPU: Pentium® 4 (2 GHz) or better
RAM: 256 MB minimum
Operating system: Windows 2000, XP, or later
Audio playback requirements
DirectX and compatible sound card
Speakers
TCP/IP settings
The following example applies to Windows XP.
Transmission control protocol/Internet protocol (TCP/IP) is the
standard protocol used for the Internet and intranets. If this
unit is to be used while connected to a network, specify a
TCP/IP to suit each operating system.
1
7
Click the [Network and Internet
Connections] icon in the [Control
Panel].
8
The [Network and Internet Connections] window is displayed.
2
z Ask the network administrator for details on the IP address,
subnet mask, default gateway and DNS settings.
Right-click on the LAN card (Ethernet
adapter) being used and then select
[Properties] from the pop-up menu.
The [General] tab in the [Local Area Connection Properties]
window is displayed.
4
Check that [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)]
is selected in the list of components
used by the Ethernet board displayed in
the [This connection uses the following
items:] box.
If [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is not selected, select it.
5
Click [Properties].
The [General] tab in the [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties] window is displayed.
English
Click [OK].
This completes the TCP/IP settings.
Click [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] window is displayed, and the
settings for the LAN card (Ethernet adapter) being used are
displayed in the [LAN or High-Speed Internet] column.
3
Check the settings, and then click [OK].
The display returns to the [Local Area Connection Properties]
window.
155
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 156 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
NETWORK CONTROL
1
INTRODUCTION
Controlling from a PC
z In the network settings (JP.120), if a value other than “80”
is set as the default port value, enter a colon (:) and then
the port number after the IP address.
For example, if the port number was set as “60001” you
should enter
http://192.168.0.1:60001/
Launch the web browser on the PC.
Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 or later is supported.
These operating systems are supported: Windows 98, 98 SE,
Me, NT 4.0, 2000 and XP
Enter a password (for verification
purposes).
OPERATION
3
z If no web browser is installed on the PC, install Internet
Explorer before proceeding.
z If the Java Script run-time error message is displayed while
Internet Explorer is being used, modify that application’s
settings as follows:
(1) Select [Tools] J [Internet Options] J [Advanced] in
order.
(2) Uncheck [Display a notification about every script error]
from the [Advanced] screen, and check [Disable script
debugging].
A verification screen is displayed when accessed. Enter [User
name] and [Password] for verification purposes and click the
[OK] button.
If the password is incorrect, the password entry screen is
displayed again, prompting you to re-enter the password.
SETTINGS
NETWORK
CONTROL
z The following are default settings for user ID and
password.
User ID
4444
ID3
3333
ID2
2222
ID1
1111
Refer to P.112 for details on how to set user level and
authorization.
z Check “ON” for “Remember my password” to save [User
name] and [Password]. Verification will be carried out
automatically on subsequent occasions. Note, however,
that it may not be possible to save a password other than
that used for the default connection.
z Up to fifteen PCs can be connected simultaneously to a
single DVR. Users at LV3 and LV4 are restricted to one
PC, and users at LV2 are restricted to three PCs.
Enter the unit’s URL.
In the address bar of a browser, enter the IP address to
access the digital video recorder and press the [Enter] key.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
When connecting the unit directly to the Internet (without a
router) set the fixed IP address received from the Internet
service provider.
NETWORK
OPERATION
2
Password
ID4
OTHER
When creating a LAN and setting a private IP address on the
unit, the port forwarder settings must be completed for the
router. When setting the port forwarder, enter the WAN side
IP address in the URL.
Contact the network administrator for more details.
(Depending on the device, “Port forwarding” may be called
“Static IP Masquerade”, “Address translation”, “Port mapping”,
or “Virtual server”.)
156
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 157 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
NETWORK CONTROL
Disconnecting
1
z When the maximum number of PCs (15) is connected to
the digital video recorder and then an upper-level user
accesses the unit from a different PC, the most recent
lower-level user is automatically disconnected and priority
is given to the upper-level user.
An error message is displayed on the PC of the
disconnected user. (JP.158)
z If entry of an incorrect password is repeated or [Cancel] is
clicked, [AUTHENTICATION ERROR] displayed.
z If a user clicks a restricted button during computer control,
the password input screen is displayed to verify the
required user level.
4
Click the
button on the operation
screen of the PC.
The connection is cancelled and control rights are returned to
the unit.
z To forcibly cancel PC access from the unit, press and hold
the [SHUTTLE HOLD] button for at least 3 seconds.
z Access from the PC is not permitted for a period of 10
seconds after access is cancelled.
z The access connection is also cancelled and control rights
then switch back to the unit whenever communication with
the PC is not possible for a period of about 1 minute or
more.
z If the browser is closed without clicking the
button,
approximately 1 minute is required before reconnection is
possible.
Select a language and click [OK].
The operation screen is displayed and computer control is
now enabled.
Messages displayed when connected
Messages related to the switching of control or the network
connection status may be displayed on-screen at any time.
Display on the unit
„ When control rights are switched to the PC
“NETWORK CONTROL” is displayed on the monitor.
The “NETWORK CONTROL” message is displayed when
connected to a network, regardless of whether control is
performed from the PC or the digital video recorder
01-01-05 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000000
z A connection may not be possible via a proxy server. In
this case, cancel the proxy settings.
z Due to certain PC performance levels and specifications, a
portion of the video may not be displayed. In this case, go
to [Tools] J [Internet Options] J [Temporary Internet Files]
J [Settings] in Internet Explorer, and then reduce [Amount
of disk space to use].
NETWORK CONTROL
02
z The “NETWORK CONTROL” message is not displayed
when the network control setting (JP.123) connection
display is set to “OFF” using the unit’s setting menu.
English
157
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 158 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
NETWORK CONTROL
„ When control rights are switched to the unit
INTRODUCTION
„ When connection to the network cannot be
made because the DVR is being operated
Whenever the
button on the operation screen of the PC is
clicked, access is cancelled and control rights switch back to
the unit. At the same time, the “NETWORK CONTROL”
message from the unit’s on-screen display changes to
“DISCONNECTED”.
z Once the message changes to “DISCONNECTED”, it can
be cleared by pressing any button on the unit.
DSR-5016
DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER
THE UNIT IS NOT READY !
OPERATION
This screen is displayed in the following cases.
z Copying is made on the DVR unit.
z Menu is displayed on the DVR unit.
01-01-05 00:00:00 REC REPEAT EN A ALARM 0000000
„ When the number of users to be connected
exceeds the concurrent connection restriction
DISCONNECTED
DSR-5016
DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER
THE UNIT IS BUSY !
„ Forced disconnection from the unit
When security lock is not turned ON, press and hold the
[SHUTTLE HOLD] button on the DVR for at least 2 seconds.
When access is forcibly cancelled in this way, the “NETWORK
CONTROL” message changes to “DISCONNECTED”.
z Access from the PC is not permitted for a period of 10
seconds after access is cancelled.
Display on the PC
„ When disconnected from the network
NETWORK
CONTROL
This screen is displayed in the following cases.
z Connection via ID1 is attempted when 15 computers are
already connected
z Connection via ID3 is attempted when ID4 user is already
connected
z Connection via ID3 is attempted when ID3 user is already
connected
z Connection via ID4 is attempted when ID4 user is already
connected
z Connection is attempted when users are already
connected to ID2, ID3 and ID4
SETTINGS
02
DSR-5016
DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER
NETWORK
OPERATION
THE UNIT IS DISCONNECTED !
This screen is displayed in the following cases.
z Connection is forcibly terminated from the DVR unit.
z Connection is terminated manually by clicking the
disconnect button.
z Network settings are changed while LV1 or LV2 user is
connected to the network.
z User ID and password are changed while LV1 or LV2 user
is connected to the network.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
„ When network settings are changed
DSR-5016
DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER
NETWORK DISCONNECTED !
PLEASE CONNECT TO THE NETWORK
WITH NEW SETTINGS !
OTHER
This screen is displayed in the following cases.
z Settings on the DVR unit are changed.
z Own User ID settings are changed.
158
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 159 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
OPERATION PANEL FUNCTIONS AND RESTRICTIONS
Operation panel
Playback buttons
5. Previous event (LV2/3/4)
Starts playback from the previous alarm event.
DSR-5016
6. Next event (LV2/3/4)
Starts playback from the next alarm event.
D I G I TA L V I D E O R E C O R D E R
01
CHANNEL
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
7. Slower (LV2/3/4)
Playback speed is reduced by one setting.
8. Faster (LV2/3/4)
Playback speed is increased by one setting.
2
9. Reverse playback (LV2/3/4)
Starts playback of recorded images in the reverse direction.
10. Stop (LV2/3/4)
Stops playback and returns to live display.
4
3
P L AY B A C K
11. Play (LV2/3/4)
Starts playback of recorded images.
10
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
14
13
15
17
12. Previous image (LV2/3/4)
Moves a still image back one frame.
13. Still (LV2/3/4)
Pauses the image during playback.
14. Next image (LV2/3/4)
Advances a still image forward one frame.
Setting buttons
16
21
15. Search (LV2/3/4)
Displays the search screen (i.e., setting screen).
20
22
16. Copy (by setting)
Displays the copy screen (i.e., setting screen).
18
19
17. Download (by setting)
Displays the download screen (i.e., setting screen).
RECORD
18. Menu setting (LV4)
Displays the menu screen (i.e., setting screen).
Channel and screen selection buttons
19. Disconnect (LV1/2/3/4)
Disconnects the PC from the network and switches control
rights to the unit.
1. Channel number
Displays the channel number selected using “Channel
selection”.
The DSR-5009P displays only nine channels.
Recording buttons
2. Channel selection (LV1/2/3/4)
Selects a camera channel when displaying video on a full
screen.
The DSR-5009P displays only nine channels.
20. Record (LV3/4)
Starts normal recording.
21. Stop (LV3/4)
Stops normal recording.
3. Multi 9/16 screen display (LV1/2/3/4)
Click once to display 16 screens, and again to display 9
screens.
The DSR-5009P can only display video in nine screens.
22. Timer (LV3/4)
Activates timer standby mode when clicked while recording is
stopped. If clicked in Timer Standby mode, it deactivates this
mode.
4. Quad-screen display (LV1/2/3/4)
Click to display 4 screens.
English
* Entries in parentheses refer to user level restrictions for the
specific button. (JP.191)
159
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 160 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
OPERATION PANEL FUNCTIONS AND RESTRICTIONS
2
Operation is available when a camera with remote operation
capability is connected to the VIDEO terminal, RS-485
terminal, or 2ND RS485/422 terminal and settings are carried
out using camera control settings (JP.202).
Click each button to use a dome
camera.
INTRODUCTION
Camera operation panel
DSR-5016
DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER
CHANNEL
2
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OPERATION
z Use the network control settings (JP.194) to set user
levels for camera operation.
z Camera controls are carried out in full screen display.
z Multiple users can simultaneously monitor and control the
same camera.
1
01
CAMERA CONTROL
1
3
Click [CAMERA CONTROL].
4
In place of the operation panel on the left side of the screen,
camera operation panel is displayed.
01-01-05 00: 36: 17
LV1:0 LV2:0 LV3:0 LV4:1
USER ID ID4
5
MENU
7
ZOOM
10
-
12
13
SPEED
SET
FOCUS
+
SEQ
IRIS
9
11
AF
AF
PAN
6
8
3
SETTINGS
NORMAL RECORDING MODE RECORDING
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
LIVE
MENU
TOUR
14
PRESET POSITION
15
01
02
07
08
03
04
09
05
06
GO
PRESET MEMORY
READ INTERVAL : 1
AUDIO
: OFF
SIZE
----
: 1
QUALITY
: 3
SAVE TO PC : OFF
01
NETWORK
CONTROL
16
01
SET
RECORD
CAMERA CONTROL
17
18
SET
1
19
20
1.
Channel number
Displays the channel number selected using “Channel
selection”.
The DSR-5009P displays only nine channels.
2.
Channel selection
Select a camera channel.
The DSR-5009P displays only nine channels.
3.
Pan/tilt
Adjust camera direction. Follow the chart below and
press directional buttons to adjust camera in eight
different directions.
When displaying camera internal menu, use for selecting
menu items.
Left
160
NU
Down
Upper right
Right
OTHER
Lower left
Up
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Upper left
NETWORK
OPERATION
z When “AUDIO” is set to “ON” or when saving real-time to
PC, the [CAMERA CONTROL] button is not displayed.
Lower right
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 161 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
OPERATION PANEL FUNCTIONS AND RESTRICTIONS
4.
Menu set
Sets the camera internal menu item setting values.
5.
[MENU]
Displays camera internal menu screen.
3
6.
Control speed
Adjusts the operation speed for Pan and Tilt.
Sets a level between 1 and 7. Higher values correspond
to faster operation speed.
Camera operation panel changes to Normal operation panel.
7.
[ZOOM]
Activates zoom mode. (“ZOOM” turns green)
Use -/+ to zoom.
8.
[FOCUS]
Activates focus adjust mode. (“FOCUS” turns green)
Adjust focus with -/+.
9.
[IRIS]
Activates IRIS adjust mode. (“IRIS” turns green)
Adjust IRIS with -/+.
Finishing dome camera operation
10. -/+
Use when zooming, adjusting focus, and adjusting IRIS.
11. [AF]
Use auto-focus.
12. [SEQ]
Starts automatic camera selection. Press a different
operation button to switch to that operation.
13. [PAN]
Starts automatic panning. Press a different operation
button to switch to that operation.
14. [TOUR]
Starts the TOUR saved on the camera. Press a different
operation button to switch to that operation.
15. Preset access
Move camera into position set with preset number.
For preset numbers after 9, select from the drop-down list
and click [GO].
16. Preset register
Select a preset number from the drop-down list and click
Menu set to register the current camera position.
17. Record (LV3, LV4)
This button starts normal recording.
18. Record stop (LV3, LV4)
This button stops normal recording.
19. Timer (LV3, LV4)
This button activates timer standby mode when clicked
while recording is stopped. If clicked in Timer Standby
mode, it deactivates this mode.
20. Disconnect (LV1, 2, 3, 4)
This button disconnects the PC from the network and
switches control rights to the unit.
z When pan/tilt is pressed during automatic panning,
automatic camera selection or TOUR, manual pan/tilt
mode is entered and all automatic modes are cancelled.
English
161
Click [CAMERA CONTROL].
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 162 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
RECORDING IMAGES
Use the following procedures to store monitored images and
alarm images on the internal hard disk of the digital video
recorder.
Before recording images, make the necessary menu settings
to match the installation environment. (JP.178)
When an alarm is detected via the ALARM IN terminal or a
motion sensor, the recording of alarm images starts
automatically.
Use the alarm recording settings (JP.186) to activate alarm
recording, or set the alarm recording not to be performed
during timer recording.
RECORD
1
button on the operation
Stopping normal recording
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
Pre-alarm recording
1
Use the following procedure to automatically record monitored
images in accordance with timer settings. Note that timer
recording cannot operate during normal recording.
Click the
panel.
z The newest images for the preset duration are
automatically recorded and updated by overwriting.
z Pre-alarm recording is automatically terminated whenever
alarm recording starts, and it is automatically restarted as
alarm recording ends.
button on the operation
The unit enters standby mode for timer recording, and
recording then starts and stops automatically at the set times.
The current status of timer recording is displayed on-screen
with the message “TIMER STANDBY” or “TIMER
RECORDING”.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z If “OLY AL-RC ON TMR” has been selected using the
“ALARM REC MODE SET” menu item (JP.186), it is not
necessary to click the
button on the operation panel to
set up standby mode.
3
NETWORK
OPERATION
2
Set the conditions for timer recording
using the “TIMER SET” screen.
(JP.185)
Set the conditions for “PRE-ALARM
RECORDING” using the “ALARM REC
MODE SET” screen. (JP.187)
NETWORK
CONTROL
Use the following procedure to set pre-alarm recording to
record video just before an alarm. Images can be viewed from
just before an alarm when alarm recording is played back.
Timer recording
1
SETTINGS
z Settings can be made to generate a buzzer sound on the
PC when an alarm occurs on the digital video recorder.
(JP.187)
z Click the
button on the PLAYBACK area on the
operation panel to stop the alarm during alarm recording.
Normal recording starts.
2
OPERATION
Use the following procedure to manually record live monitored
images.
Click the
panel.
Set the conditions for “ALARM
RECORDING” using the “ALARM REC
MODE SET” screen. (JP.186)
z Regardless of the unit’s current operation or status, alarm
recording starts automatically whenever an alarm is
detected.
z When the duration set for alarm recording ends, alarm
recording stops automatically.
Normal recording
1
INTRODUCTION
Alarm recording
OTHER
To cancel timer recording, click the
button on the operation panel while
“TIMER STANDBY” is displayed.
162
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 163 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
WATCHING IMAGES
Monitored live images and recorded images can be viewed
upon demand.
Note that switching to live or playback images, modifying the
screen display and other similar operations have absolutely
no effect on timer recording and alarm recording.
The various ways of displaying live
images
01
CHANNEL
Switching to live images during playback
Click the
button on the PLAYBACK area on the operation
panel. When playback finishes, the screen switches back to
the display of monitored live images.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Playing back recorded images
Displays the current
channel (camera)
number while in full
screen display
[CHANNEL] button
[QUAD] button
The following two methods are available for the playback of
images.
[MULTI] button
Changing channels (cameras)
1
P L AY B A C K
Click the [CHANNEL] button for the
number to view.
The live image from the selected channel is displayed full
screen.
Buttons used
for playback
Activating quad-screen display
1
Click the [QUAD] button.
Displays the images from channels (cameras) 1-4.
Continue to click the [QUAD] button to cycle to 5-8, 9-12, and
13-16.
On the DSR-5009P, the images change in order of 1-4, 5-8, 93, etc.
Image
specification
Playback method
To activate full screen display, click on the image or click the
[CHANNEL] button.
Click the
button on the operation
panel to switch to play mode and begin
playback of images from the recording
area in the order in which they were
recorded.
When no images are z When recorded images are played
back for the first time or when a reset
specified for playback
is performed from the unit, playback
starts from the beginning of the
stored data.
z Any subsequent playback starts at
the last stop point.
Activating 9/16 screen display
The DSR-5009P can only display video in nine screens.
1
Click the [MULTI] button.
Multi 16 screen display is activated and all camera images
can be viewed.
2
Click the [MULTI] button again.
Multi 9 screen display is activated and the images from
channels (cameras) 1-9 are displayed.
z Use the search function to find the
required images from the data stored
in the recording areas of the hard
disk.
When images are
z When the image for playback has
specified for playback
been identified using search mode,
the play mode screen is
automatically displayed and the
specified image is played (JP.169).
3
Click the [MULTI] button again.
Multi 16 screen display is restored.
To activate full screen display, click on the image or click the
[CHANNEL] button.
z Video from each screen of the multi-screen display is
updated at a speed appropriate for its channel. The
updating speed is affected by network conditions.
English
163
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 164 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
WATCHING IMAGES
INTRODUCTION
Performing operations in play mode
Use the buttons on the operation panel.
P L AY B A C K
OPERATION
Playback
Click the
button.
Adjusting the playback speed
button.
SETTINGS
During playback, click the
or
: Increases the playback speed.
: Decreases the playback speed.
Reverse playback
Click the
button.
Adjusting the reverse playback speed
NETWORK
CONTROL
During reverse playback, click the
or
: Increases the reverse playback speed.
: Decreases the reverse playback speed.
button.
Still image
button while
NETWORK
OPERATION
During playback, click the
button.
Playback pauses on the current image.
To return to normal play mode, click the
playback is paused.
Frame advance (forward/reverse)
While playback is paused, click the
or
: Advances a frame in the forward direction.
: Advances a frame in the reverse direction.
button.
Alarm skip
NETWORK
SETTINGS
During playback, click the
or
button.
The previous or next alarm image is displayed accordingly.
: Skips to the next alarm video.
: Skips to the previous alarm video.
Stopping playback
During playback, click the
button.
OTHER
164
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 165 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
WATCHING IMAGES
Live mode image (multi-screen display)
NORMAL RECORDING MODE STOP
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
LIVE
(7)
(9) (10)
(8)
(6)
01-01-05 00: 37: 58
01
02
HALL 4F 03
04
05
06
(6)
(8) (9) (12)
(11)
NORMAL RECORDING MODE STOP
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
PLAY
LV1:0 LV2:0 LV3:0 LV4:1
USER ID ID4
Play mode image (full-screen display)
(7)
01-01-05 00: 36: 20
SPEED
PLAYBACK AREA NORMAL
PLAY
01
07
08
READ INTERVAL : 1
09
SIZE : 1
(1)
(1)
QUALITY : 3
(3)
(2)
320 x 240
4
800 x 600
2
400 x 300
5
1,024 x 768
3
640 x 480
6
1,280 x 960
Setting
‹OFF
A1
A2
A12
‹3
4
English
SAVE TO PC : OFF
(2)
SET
(5)
Description
Audio is not played.
Play audio from the device connected to
the AUDIO1 IN terminal on the unit’s rear
cover.
Play audio from the device connected to
the AUDIO2 IN terminal on the unit’s rear
cover.
Play audio from both the AUDIO1 IN
terminal and the AUDIO2 IN terminal on
the unit’s rear cover.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹5SEC
10SEC
15SEC
20SEC
30SEC
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Standard quality
: 1
Select the audio delay time (buffering time).
Audio data is loaded to the computer (buffered) for a given
amount of time to ensure that there are no playback
interruptions. The playback audio is delayed when compared
with the originally recorded sound. The following set amounts
of time indicate the delay.
* Size for full screen monitoring.
(3) QUALITY (Default setting: 3)
Four levels of picture quality can be set for live images (live
mode only).
The recorded image is not displayed during playback.
2
----
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Lowest quality
SIZE
(4) AUDIO (Default setting: OFF)
Change the audio channel for the device connected to the
AUDIO1 IN terminal on the unit’s rear cover.
Listen to the current audio from the device connected to the
AUDIO1 IN terminal while displaying live image.
Play audio from the device connected to the AUDIO1 IN
terminal at the time of recording while playing back a recorded
image.
Use the following procedures to adjust the images displayed
on screen.
To make an adjustment, select the adjustment setting from
the menu and then click [SET] from the pull-down menu on
the screen.
(1) READ INTERVAL (Default setting: 1)
Select one of five image display speeds.
Larger setting numbers correspond to higher speeds;
however, the actual speed depends on the speed of your
network connection.
* When “(4) AUDIO” is set to “ON”, “READ INTERVAL”
cannot be set.
(2) SIZE (Default setting: 1)
Select one of six image sizes.
Larger setting numbers correspond to larger image sizes.
1
: OFF
(4)
Adjusting the image and audio
‹1
READ INTERVAL : 1
AUDIO
SET
Fine
Best quality
Screen indicating
the reading of
audio data
165
Description
Set the audio delay (5, 10, 15, 20 or 30
seconds) to play audio.
In Play mode, the speed of fast-forward
and frame advance may be affected by
the network environment being used.
In addition, if the audio-data reading
screen appears frequently, the audio
delay (5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 seconds)
should be lengthened to match the
network environment.
If this screen continues to appear
frequently even when the delay time is 30
seconds, it indicates that audio playback
is not possible with the network
environment being used.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 166 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
WATCHING IMAGES
(5) SAVE TO PC (Default setting: OFF)
Set to “ON” to save live images or playback images to a PC.
* Set only for full screen monitoring.
Playback
direction
NETWORK
CONTROL
Display
SETTINGS
z A user level 2 (LV2) or better is required to play back
images.
z The user level required for saving images to a PC is set in
the user ID and network control settings. (JP.191, 123)
z To be able to play back audio, install “DVR Viewer2” for
storing and playing back audio (JP.209), and then set
“AUDIO” to “ON”.
z Playback is performed with priority given to audio, and as a
result, images may not be displayed for certain hardware
and software configurations.
z Audio playback is not available for quad screen or multi
screen (9/16 screen) display.
z Due to certain PC performance levels and specifications, a
portion of the video may not be displayed. In this case, go
to [Tools]J[Internet Options]J[Temporary Internet
Files]J[Settings] in Internet Explorer, and then reduce
[Amount of disk space to use].
OPERATION
(6) Image mode
LIVE: Live mode
PLAY: Play mode
(7) Time
Live mode: Displays the current time.
Play mode: Displays the recording time.
(8) NORMAL RECORDING MODE
Displays the current status for normal recording.
z STOP
z RECORDING
z TIMER STANDBY
z TIMER RECORDING
z AREA FULL (in recording area)
(9) ALARM RECORDING MODE
Displays the current status for alarm recording.
z STOP
z PRE ALARM RECORDING
z ALARM RECORDING
z AREA FULL (in alarm recording area)
(10) Connection user
Displays the connection status for the various user levels
when a number of different users are connected.
Example: LV1: 4 LV2: 1 LV3: 1 LV4: 0
The user ID for the current user is displayed in red.
(11) PLAYBACK AREA (in the play mode screen only)
The type of recording is displayed for the playback image.
z ALARM
z PRE ALARM
z NORMAL
z ARCHIVE
(12) SPEED (in the play mode screen only)
Displays the playback speed and direction.
INTRODUCTION
Screen display items
Playback speed
Forward
Normal
STILL
Paused
Paused
R.PLAY
Reverse
Normal
CUE
Forward
Fast-forward playback
REVIEW
Reverse
Fast-rewind playback
SLOW
Forward
Slow playback
R.SLOW
Reverse
Slow reverse playback
NETWORK
OPERATION
PLAY
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
166
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 167 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
WATCHING IMAGES
5
Downloading live images to a PC
Click [BROWSE].
A dialog box for selecting the save location is displayed.
Select a suitable save location.
z To download video with audio to a PC, DVR Viewer2 must
be installed before the necessary settings can be made.
(JP.205)
z The user level required for downloading images is set in
the user ID and network control settings. (JP.191, 123)
1
Displays live image for users with
download authorization.
NORMAL RECORDING MODE STOP
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
LIVE
01-01-05 00: 40: 32
LV1:0 LV2:0 LV3:0 LV4:1
USER ID ID4
z Alternatively, enter the path directly into “DESTINATION
FOLDER”.
6
01
READ INTERVAL : 1
2
3
SIZE
: OFF
AUDIO
: 1
----
QUALITY
: 3
SAVE TO PC : OFF
CAMERA CONTROL
The setting menu closes and the screen returns to the display
for step 3 above.
The “DESTINATION FOLDER” location is displayed.
SET
Set “SAVE TO PC” to “ON”.
7
Click [SET].
NORMAL RECORDING MODE STOP
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
01-01-05 00: 00: 00
USER ID ID4
Click [START].
The saving process begins and the elapsed save time and
saving screen are displayed.
The elapsed save time is incremented as the save process
progresses.
The save setting items are displayed.
LIVE
Enter the save location and click the
[OK] button.
LV1:0 LV2:0 LV3:0 LV4:1
NORMAL RECORDING MODE STOP
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
LIVE
LV1:0 LV2:0 LV3:0 LV4:1
USER ID ID4
01-01-05 00: 47: 05
01
READ INTERVAL : 1
SIZE
: OFF
AUDIO
: 1
----
QUALITY
: 3
SAVE TO PC : ON
CAMERA CONTROL
01
SET
READ INTERVAL : 1
DURATION
: 01
HR : 00
MIN
DESTINATION FOLDER : C:\
AUDIO
: OFF
SIZE : 1
----
QUALITY
: 3
CAMERA CONTROL
SAVE TO PC : ON
BROWSE
DURATION
START
: 00:00:00
/ 00:06:00
DESTINATION FOLDER : C:\ My documents\1124
CANCEL
4
Set “DURATION”.
Elapsed save time
Use units of one hour and one minute to set the image
duration to save to PC.
English
SAVE IN PROGRESS
167
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 168 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
WATCHING IMAGES
„ To cancel a save operation
INTRODUCTION
Click [CANCEL].
NORMAL RECORDING MODE STOP
ALARM RECORDING MODE STOP
LIVE
LV1:0 LV2:0 LV3:0 LV4:1
USER ID ID4
01-01-05 00: 47: 05
OPERATION
01
SIZE : 1
READ INTERVAL : 1
: OFF
AUDIO
DURATION
----
: 00:00:00
QUALITY
: 3
CAMERA CONTROL
SAVE TO PC : ON
/ 00:06:00
DESTINATION FOLDER : C:\ My documents\1124
CANCEL
SETTINGS
8
SAVE IN PROGRESS
When saving is completed, click [OK]
on the pop-up window.
The final still image from the save process is displayed.
The setting menu closes and the screen returns to the display
for step 2 above.
Folders, as shown below, are created within the folder set in
step 5, and within these folders, images are stored with
numbers assigned automatically.
IMG00001
(1)
(2)
DVR00002
IMG00001
NETWORK
CONTROL
DVR00001
000001.J2K
000002.J2K
000003.J2K
000001.J2K
000002.J2K
000003.J2K
NETWORK
OPERATION
(1) The folder “DVR00001” is created.
(2) Within this folder, folders are created in order beginning
with “IMG00001”. Images are stored in each folder.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
168
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 169 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
Recorded video can be searched and played back using any
of six search modes.
Search menu
Basic operation
1
Search mode
Type of
recording
searched
In live mode (when playback is
stopped), click the
button on the
operation panel.
The “SEARCH” screen is displayed.
1
ALARM LOG
SEARCH
Alarm
recording
Search for alarm video by
specifying the date/time.
When the search is
completed, images can be
selected from ALARM
SEARCH or ALARM
THUMBNAIL SEARCH
and displayed in a list or as
thumbnails.
2
ALARM
SEARCH
Alarm
recording
Search and play back
alarm images from the
alarm event list.
3
ALARM
THUMBNAIL
SEARCH
Alarm
recording
Search and play back
alarm images using
thumbnails (small images).
4
TIME/DATE
SEARCH
Normal
recording and
alarm
recording
Search and play back
recorded images by date
and time.
5
ARCHIVE
AREA
SEARCH
Archive area
Search and play back
images stored (or copied)
to the archive area using
an image list.
6
MOTION
DETECTION
SEARCH
Normal
recording and
alarm
recording
Search and play back
recorded images of moving
objects detected in
accordance with motion
sensor settings.
SEARCH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2
ALARM LOG SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
TIME/DATE SEARCH
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
Select and click the desired search
mode from the “SEARCH” screen.
The screen for the selected search mode is displayed.
3
Search for video using the search mode
screen.
See the following pages for more details regarding the
different search procedures.
4
Check the returned video using the
preview or thumbnail display and then
click the screen.
Play mode is activated and playback of the full video starts.
Still image, fast-forward and other similar operations can be
performed during playback. (JP.164)
English
169
Description
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 170 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
z If “MONTH” is selected in step 2 above, each frame
represents one day. If “WEEK” is selected, four frames
represent one day. If “DAY” is selected, each frame
represents one hour. If “HOUR” is selected, each frame
represents two minutes.
z Click the [BACK] or [NEXT] button to shift the display one
page.
Use the following procedure to perform an alarm search or
alarm thumbnail search by defining the period (month, week,
day or time) of the alarm video.
ALARM LOG SEARCH
(4)
(2)
MONTH
MOVE
01-10-05 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
(5)
A search is started, and when it is finished the frame color
changes in the following fashion.
Black: No recordings
Blue: Normal recording
(Press the [FUNC.] button and then the blue frame is
displayed after a few moments)
Red: Alarm recording
4
16
BACK
PAGE NEXT
SEARCH:
ALARM
SEARCH
(7)
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
TERM: Period
Date/time
Channel number
Selected type of recording searched
When “MONTH” is specified in “TERM”: Day
When “WEEK” is specified in “TERM”: Day of the week
When “DAY” is specified in “TERM”: Hour
When “HOUR” is specified in “TERM”: Minute
(6) PAGE: The month (week/day/time), along with previous
and next entries are displayed
(7) SEARCH: Search mode
‹ALARM
Description
The “ALARM SEARCH” screen (JP.171) is
displayed and the search results are displayed
in a list.
The “ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH” screen
THUMBNAIL (JP.171) is displayed and the search results
are displayed using thumbnails.
Perform ALARM SEARCH (JP.171) or ALARM THUMBNAIL
SEARCH (JP.171).
5
Click “1. ALARM LOG SEARCH” on the
“SEARCH” screen.
Click the [SEARCH] button.
NETWORK
CONTROL
1
Set “SEARCH” to the desired search
mode.
SETTINGS
(6)
OPERATION
(3)
(1)
TERM :
INTRODUCTION
1. ALARM LOG SEARCH
The “ALARM LOG SEARCH” screen is displayed.
2
NETWORK
OPERATION
Set a time period for “TERM” and click
the [MOVE] button.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
Displays one month.
WEEK
Displays one week.
DAY
Displays one day.
HOUR
Displays one hour.
3
NETWORK
SETTINGS
‹MONTH
Set the date and time.
Click the frame of the alarm recording search date.
OTHER
170
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 171 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
2. ALARM SEARCH
3. ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
All of the alarm images stored in the alarm recording area are
displayed as thumbnails (small images). Accordingly, you can
search and play back alarm images using their thumbnails.
Images recorded as alarm recordings are displayed in a list by
alarm numbers.
Accordingly, alarm images from the recording list can be
searched and played back.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6) (8) (9)
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH
ALARM SEARCH
BACK
NO
DATE TIME CH
0000012 03 - 06 12 : 01 01
0000011
03 - 06 11 : 57 01
0000010
03 - 06 11 : 57 04
0000009
03 - 04 11 : 56 04
0000008
03 - 02 11 : 55 04
0000007
03 - 02 11 : 53 01
0000006
03 - 02 11 : 52 01
0000005
03 - 01 22 : 51 01
BACK
PAGE NEXT
(4)
TOTAL ALARMS : 0000053
: 0000012
SEARCH
: -CHANNEL
SEARCH
0000009
0000008
0000007
0000006
0000005
0000004
SEARCH
PLEASE CLICK THE IMAGE TO PLAY.
(1) PAGE: Displays the previous and next 9 thumbnails
(2) SEARCH: Search by the alarm number
(3) CHANNEL: Search by the camera number
1
Click “3. ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH”
on the “SEARCH” screen.
z The newest alarm images with alarm numbers are
displayed in chronological order on the “ALARM
THUMBNAIL SEARCH” screen.
z A maximum of nine alarm events can be displayed as
thumbnails on a single screen.
z Click [BACK] or [NEXT] to display the thumbnail screen for
the previous or subsequent nine events accordingly.
z Setting the alarm number for “SEARCH” displays a new list
with the corresponding image displayed first.
z Setting the camera number for “CHANNEL” displays a new
list with the corresponding image displayed first.
Click “2. ALARM SEARCH” on the
“SEARCH” screen.
Select the alarm number of the image to
be played back from the alarm event
list.
2
z Clicking an alarm No. button displays a preview of the
corresponding alarm image.
z A maximum of eight alarm events can be displayed.
z Click [BACK] or [NEXT] to display the alarm event list for
the previous or subsequent eight events accordingly.
z Setting the alarm number for “SEARCH” displays a new list
with the corresponding image displayed first.
z Setting the camera number for “CHANNEL” displays
camera images as a list in order of recording date.
Click the thumbnail for the image to be
played back.
Full-screen playback starts from the point at which the alarm
was triggered.
Click the preview screen to play back
the image.
Full-screen playback starts from the point at which the alarm
was triggered.
English
0000010
(10)
An alarm event list is displayed in the “ALARM SEARCH”
screen with newer recordings displayed first.
3
CHANNEL : --
0000011
PLEASE CLICK THE IMAGE TO PLAY.
NO: Alarm number. Click to display preview
DATE/TIME: The alarm recording date
CH: The alarm recording camera number
PAGE: Display of the previous and next list from the top
list
(5) TOTAL ALARMS: The total number of alarm recordings
(6) SEARCH: Enter alarm number to display as list
(7) CHANNEL: Enter camera number to display as list
(8) [SEARCH] button: Search using the conditions from (6)
and (7); display as list
(9) PREVIEW ALARM NO: Current alarm number being
previewed
(10) Preview image: Click to start playback
2
SEARCH : 0000000
PREVIEW ALARM NO : 0000012
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
1
PAGE NEXT
0000012
171
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 172 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
5. ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
Use the following procedure to search and play back recorded
images stored (or copied) to the archive area.
Use the following procedure to specify the recorded date and
time and play back the images.
(1)
(5)
(4) (1)
TIME/DATE SEARCH
(2)
(3)
CHANNEL
: --
SEARCH
: 01
(4)
01
TIME
00 : 35
00 : 35
-
2005
NO
01- 01 00 :36 01
0000003
01- 01 00 :36 01
35
0000004
01- 01 01 :48 01
PREVIEW
0000005
01- 02 01 :48 01
0000006
01- 03 01 :52 01
0000007
01- 03 01 :53 01
0000008
01- 03 01 :55 01
00
:
PREVIEW
(6) (9) (11)
(7) (10)
PAGE NEXT
CAPACITY TOTAL- 34594 MB
USED 0 MB
SEARCH : 0000001
CHANNEL : --
SEARCH
PREVIEW NO 0000001
PLEASE CLICK THE IMAGE TO PLAY.
SETTINGS
1
Click “4. TIME/DATE SEARCH” on the
“SEARCH” screen.
Click “5. ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH” on
the “SEARCH” screen.
Specify the camera number from the
“CHANNEL” pull-down menu.
2
Specify the recorded date and time of
the image to be played back from the
“SEARCH” pull-down menu.
Select the archive number of the image
to be played back from the stored image
list.
Click [PREVIEW].
When the search is completed, the image corresponding to
the specified date and time is played back.
3
z If no image exists for the specified date and time, the
image with the nearest recording date and time is
displayed.
Click the preview screen to play back
the image.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z A preview of the corresponding stored image is displayed.
z A maximum of eight stored images can be displayed.
z Click [BACK] or [NEXT] to display the image list for the
previous or subsequent eight images accordingly.
z Setting the archive number for “SEARCH” displays a list
with the oldest corresponding image displayed first.
z Setting the camera number for “CHANNEL” displays a list
with the oldest corresponding image displayed first.
NETWORK
OPERATION
The “ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH” screen is displayed.
This screen contains a list of stored images displayed in order
from the earliest item.
NETWORK
CONTROL
NO: Number. Click to display preview
DATE/TIME: The recording date
CH: The recording camera number
PAGE: Display of the previous and next list from the top
list
(5) CAPACITY: Total archive area capacity
(6) CAPACITY: Used archive area capacity
(7) SEARCH: Enter number to display as list
(8) CHANNEL: Enter camera number to display as list
(9) [SEARCH] button: Search using the conditions from (7)
and (8); display as list
(10) PREVIEW NO: Current number being previewed
(11) Preview image: Click to start playback
The “TIME/DATE SEARCH” screen is displayed.
Full-screen playback starts.
Click the preview screen to play back
the image.
OTHER
5
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) RECORDING TOP: Displays the date and time of the
oldest recording
(2) RECORDING END: Displays the date and time of the
newest recording
(3) CHANNEL: Displays the camera number
(4) SEARCH: Set the recorded date and time of the image to
be played back
(5) [PREVIEW]: Preview display button
(6) PREVIEW: Displays a preview of the image
corresponding to the specified date and time
4
CH
0000002
PLEASE CLICK THE IMAGE TO PLAY.
3
TIME
01- 01 00 :36 01
BACK
2
DATE
0000001
(6)
1
(3) (8)
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH
05
05
-
(2)
OPERATION
DATE
01 - 01 01 - 01 -
TOP
END
INTRODUCTION
4. TIME/DATE SEARCH
Full-screen playback starts.
172
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 173 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
SEARCHING FOR RECORDED VIDEO
1
6. MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
Use the following procedure to detect variations from
recorded images, using the motion sensor, as a result of the
presence of an intruder or the like, and to play back the
corresponding images.
(4)
Click “6. MOTION DETECTION
SEARCH” on the “SEARCH” screen.
The “MOTION DETECTION SEARCH” screen is displayed.
2
(6)
Specify the search area from the
“SEARCH FROM” pull-down menu.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
(1)
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH
SEARCH FROM :
‹ALARM
ALARM
(2)
CHANNEL
: --
(3)
START
END
: 01
: 01
(5)
Setting
- 01
- 2005
00
: 40
- 09
- 2005
12
: 40
FOUND !
A B C D E F G H I
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A B C D E F G H
I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A B C D E F G H I
J
NORMAL
Searches only for normal
recording images.
ALARM AND NORMAL
Searches for alarm recording and
normal recording images.
ARCHIVE*1
Searches only for archive images.
SET
MOTION SENSOR SET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A B C D E F G H
MOTION SENSOR LEVEL: OFF
*1 “ARCHIVE” can only be selected when “MODE” in
“ARCHIVE AREA” in the <RECORDING CONDITIONS
SET> screen is set to “AUTO ALARM COPY”. (JP.81)
3
I J
PREVIEW
PLEASE CLICK THE IMAGE TO PLAY.
(7)
4
(8)
“SEARCHING”
When motion-detection
images exist
“FOUND !”
When motion-detection
images do not exist
“IMAGES NOT FOUND !”
Specify the camera number for
detection from the “CHANNEL” pulldown menu.
Click [SET].
The date and time of the start and end of recording of motion
detection images are displayed in “START” and “END”
respectively.
(1) SEARCH FROM
Recording area to be used for motion detection searching
(2) CHANNEL
Channel or camera number to be used for motion detection
searching
(3) START/END
Date and time of the start and end of the area for motion
detection searching
(4) [SET] button
Detection condition settings
(5) Message box
Displays the results of searching for motion detection images.
When searching
z Use “START” and “END” to refine the search range by
making date and time settings.
z The search results are displayed in a message box when
[SET] is clicked.
5
Set motion sensor detection conditions.
z Motion sensor positions
The motion sensor setting screen displays an 8 x 10
(height x width) grid of sensors. When one of these
sensors is clicked, the corresponding sensor setting mark
changes to red. If the same location in the grid is clicked
again, the motion sensor is deselected.
z Motion sensor sensitivity
Select the sensitivity from the pull-down menu. Lower
numbers correspond to higher levels of sensitivity.
(6) MOTION SENSOR SET
Screen for making motion sensor settings
(7) MOTION SENSOR LEVEL
Motion sensor sensitivity setting: OFF or 1 through 10
(Lower numbers correspond to higher levels of sensitivity.)
(8) [PREVIEW] button
Displays a preview of the motion detection image.
6
Click [PREVIEW].
A search is performed within the specified area for images in
which the motion sensor detected motion, and these images
are then listed in recording order on the preview screen.
7
Click the preview screen to play back
the image.
Full-screen playback starts.
English
Description
Searches only for alarm recording
images.
173
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 174 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
Play an image from a recording area.
INTRODUCTION
1
2
Use the following procedures to copy recorded images to the
archive area on the hard disk or to download images to a PC
or the like.
These functions can be used to save important images from
the recording areas.
Click the
button on the operation
panel at the start of the image to be
copied.
Playback of the image is paused.
3
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
OPERATION
z In certain cases where network-busy is detected as a result
of the operating environment, the network may be forcibly
disconnected in order to protect DVR recording operations.
Furthermore, the network is forcibly disconnected in
response to commands to send a large amount of data in a
single operation (in particular, when 100 images or more
are to be saved), and in this case, the number of images
should be limited based on the hardware configuration in
question.
z When the archive area becomes full of images, download
these images to a CompactFlash card or other storage
media and click [AREA FULL RESET] from the recording
area settings on the “MAIN MENU.” (JP.181)
z Can only save in full screen display. Cannot save for quadscreen or multi screen display.
The “COPY” screen is displayed.
COPY
COPY TO ARCHIVE AREA ON THE RECORDER
01-01-05 00: 00: 00
PLAYBACK AREA NORMAL
SETTINGS
01
HOW MANY: 1
4
PICTURES
START
Enter the number of images for “HOW
MANY”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Copying to the archive area
Setting
‹1 - 10000
(2)
(1)
COPY
5
COPY TO ARCHIVE AREA ON THE RECORDER
01-01-05 00: 00: 00
PLAYBACK AREA NORMAL
Description
Specifically, indicate the number of images
to be copied beginning with the start image.
Click [START].
Copying
“COPYING TO ARCHIVE AREA!”
Copying completed
“COPY FINISHED!”
NETWORK
OPERATION
Copying to the archive area begins and the message box
displays the current copying status.
When copying is completed, click the
button on the
PLAYBACK area to display live video or the
button to
display playback video.
(3)
NETWORK
CONTROL
z Copied data is stored one image at a time. Moving images
can be copied by setting the number of images required
from the first copied image.
z In a single copy operation, a maximum of 10,000 images
can be copied to the archive area and a maximum of
40,000 images can be downloaded to a PC.
01
HOW MANY: 1
PICTURES
z The “COPY” screen cannot be displayed when playing
video from the archive area.
(5)
OTHER
(1) Recorded date/time: Recorded date and time for the
image currently being played back
(2) PLAYBACK AREA:
Area in which the image currently being played back is
recorded
(3) HOW MANY: Setting for the number of images to be
stored
(4) Message box: Displays the copying status.
(5) [START]: Starts copying.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
(4)
START
174
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 175 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
4
Downloading to a PC
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Use the following procedure to download recorded images to
a PC.
(2)
DOWNLOAD
(1)
01-01-05 00: 36: 21
Set “UNIT”.
Setting
Description
‹PICTURES
DOWNLOAD TO PC
Specify the time (hrs/min/sec) for download
number
TIME
PLAYBACK AREA NORMAL
5
Specify the number of images for download
number
Set “AUDIO”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Also download audio.
‹ON
OFF
01
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
MESSAGE
:
UNIT
: PICTURES
AUDIO
: ON
PICTURES (1-40000)
: 1
6
TIME : 00
: 01
START
Do not download audio.
Set the “PICTURES” or “TIME”.
[Settings]
: 00
Setting
BROWSE
DESTINATION FOLDER : C:\
Description
Description
CANCEL
Enter how many images to download from the still
PICTURES
image.
(9)
(7) (10)
(1) The recording date and time for the image currently being
played back
(2) PLAYBACK AREA: The type of recording for the image
currently being played back.
z ALARM z PRE ALARM z NORMAL z ARCHIVE
(3) MESSAGE: Displays the message displayed when
download starts (example: PLEASE WAIT!).
(4) UNIT: Select whether to specify number of images or the
time for download number.
(5) AUDIO: Select whether or not to download audio.
(6) PICTURES (1 - 40000): Enter number of images when
“PICTURES” is specified in “UNIT”.
(7) TIME: Enter time (hrs/min/sec) when “TIME” is specified
in “UNIT”.
(8) DESTINATION FOLDER: Specify the save destination
folder.
(9) [START]: Downloading begins.
(10) [CANCEL]: Downloading stops.
1
2
7
8
0
% TIME [00:05:00]
ELAPSED TIME
: 00:00:00
DESTINATION FOLDER : C:\
CANCEL
SAVE IN PROGRESS
* The above screen is when “TIME” is set.
Click the
button on the operation
panel at the start of the image to be
downloaded.
button on the operation
The “DOWNLOAD” screen is displayed. (Refer to the screen
above.)
English
Click [START].
Starts downloading.
The following message is displayed below the image when
downloading.
Play a recorded image.
Click the
panel.
Set “DESTINATION FOLDER”.
Enter the path to the save destination folder.
Click [BROWSE] to select from the folder tree.
Playback of the image is paused.
3
Set the time (hrs/min/sec) from the still image.
(A maximum of 99:59:59 can be set but only
40,000 images can be downloaded.)
TIME
175
%
Display the download amount in %
ELAPSED TIME
Display the download time
DESTINATION
FOLDER
Display the path to the save destination
folder
CANCEL
Stop downloading.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 176 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
9
SAVING (COPYING) RECORDED VIDEO
INTRODUCTION
When downloading is complete, a
confirmation dialogue is displayed.
Click the [OK] button.
Displays the download results.
DOWNLOAD
01-01-05 00: 36: 21
MESSAGE
DOWNLOAD TO PC
PLAYBACK AREA NORMAL
: DOWNLOAD ABORTED !
DOWNLOADED PICTURES : 0
OPERATION
AUDIO
: OFF
LIVE
SETTINGS
NETWORK
CONTROL
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
176
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 177 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
SETTINGS
3
Before using the digital video recorder, settings should be
made for recording conditions, installation environment and
other similar factors. The corresponding menu items are
displayed in a three-level structure comprising main menus,
sub-menus and setting screens. (JP.178)
Click a sub-menu.
The setting screen is displayed.
A menu tree is displayed on the operation panel to show the
menu hierarchy.
Example: Click “1. CLOCK SET”.
Making menu selections
D I G I TA L V I D E O R E C O R D E R
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
MAIN MENU
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
MENU
TREE
MAIN MENU
CLOCK
CLOCK
CLOCK
CLOCK
CLOCK
CLOCKSET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
2004
2004
2004
2004
2004
-26
-2005
06
06
06
06
06 -----2004
10
07
07
07
07
07
07 -----06
1. INITIAL SET
1. CLOCK SET
2. SUMMER TIME SET
/EXT. CLOCK SET
3. HOLIDAY SET
MON
MON
MON
MON
MON
MON
WED
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
R E C OR D
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
INITIAL SET
RECORD SET
GENERAL SET
SCREEN SET
POWER LOSS/USED TIME
INITIALIZATION LOG
COPY MENU SETTINGS
ADVANCED MENU SET
z Click a menu on the operation panel to display the submenu and a different setting screen.
z Pull-down menus
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
Click
PICTURE QUALITY
2
BASIC
NORMAL
: ENHANCED
FINE
: SUPER FINE
INDIV.
:
Click a menu on the “MAIN MENU”.
The corresponding sub-menu appears.
The main menu is displayed on the operation panel.
Example: Click “1. INITIAL SET”.
D I G I TA L V I D E O R E C O R D E R
MAIN MENU
MAIN
MENU
1. INITIAL SET
2. RECORD SET
3. GENERAL SET
4. SCREEN SET
5. POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6. INITIALIZATION LOG
7. COPY MENU SETTINGS
8. ADVANCED MENU SET
INITIAL SET
When a pull-down menu is clicked, a list of available
selections is displayed.
Select the required value.
1. CLOCK SET
2. SUMMER TIME SET/EXT. CLO
3. HOLIDAY SET
4
5
Make the required settings.
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The setting procedure is ended and the display returns to the
normal screen (monitoring image).
R E CO R D
z Menu screens are not displayed during playback. To
display a menu, stop playback, return to live mode and
then click the
button on the operation panel.
z You must be connected with user level 4 (LV4) to modify
settings.
z It is not possible to modify settings when the unit is
recording.
z Click a menu on the operation panel to display a different
sub-menu.
English
: ENHANCED
177
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 178 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
SETTINGS
Main menu
Sub menu
1. CLOCK SET
Setting items
z SUMMER TIME SET z EXT.CLOCK SET
P.179
3. HOLIDAY SET
z HOLIDAY SET
P.180
1. RECORDING AREA SET
z TOTAL CAPACITY z INTERNAL HDD z EXTERNAL HDD
z RECORDING AREA (AREA FULL RESET)
z ARCHIVE AREA (AREA FULL RESET)
P.181
z PICTURE QUALITY z AUDIO RECORDING z REC RATE
z REC PROGRAM GROUP
P.183
4. PROGRAM REC SET
z PROGRAM z SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
z NORMAL REC
P.184
5. TIMER SET
z WEEK z START z STOP z PROGRAM z FPS z SET
P.185
6. ALARM REC MODE SET
z ALARM RECORDING z PICTURE QUALITY z AUDIO RECORDING
z ALARM INTERLEAVE (REC RATE, DURATION)
z PRE- ALARM RECORDING (REC RATE, DURATION) z ALARM TRIGGER
P.186
1. DISPLAY SET
z DATE z TIME z QUALITY z AUDIO z ALARM COUNT z ALARM TYPE
z TITLE
P.189
2. BUZZER SET
z ALARM z DISK FULL z DISK ERROR z LOCK WARNING z KEY IN
z NON REC
P.189
3. SECURITY LOCK SET
z LOCK MODE z FREE ACCESS LEVEL z OPERATION AUTHORITY
z COPY z CAMERA CONTROL
P.190
4. USER ID SET
z USER ID z PASSWORD z LV
P.191
5. RS-232C/RS-485 SET
z CONTROL z DATA SPEED z STATUS INFO z ALARM INFO z ADDRESS
P.192
6. HDD SET
z DISK1 z DISK2 z EX-DISK1 z EX-DISK2 z EX-DISK3 z EX-DISK4
z MIRRORING z PLAYBACK DRIVE
P.192
7. NETWORK SET
z DHCP z IP ADDRESS z SUBNET MASK z GATEWAY z PORT
z NETWORK SPEED z DNS SERVER (PRIMARY, SECONDARY)
z HOST NAME z DOMAIN SUFFIX z MAC ADDRESS
P.193
P.194
z FULL z QUAD z MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET z TIME PERIOD z CH
z MAIN MONITOR z MON.2
P.196
2. MASK SET
z POWER z LOSS z RECOVER z INTERNAL HDD z EXTERNAL HDD
z FIRMWARE VER
P.198
6. INITIALIZATION
LOG
z DATE z TIME z AREA ACTION z USER
P.199
7. COPY
MENU
SETTNGS
z DVR TYPE VER. z SAVE MENUS TO PC
z LOAD MENUS FROM PC
(LOAD FILE, COPY USER ID SETTINGS, COPY RECORDING AREA
SETTINGS, COPY NETWORK SETTINGS)
P.200
1. ALARM NOTICE SET
z ALARM NOTICE z SMTP SERVER ADDRESS z USER MAIL ADDRESS
z SEND MAIL ADDRESS z USE z MAIL ADDRESS z IMAGE z SUBJECT
z AUTHENTICATION z POP3 SERVER ADDRESS z USER ID
z PASSWORD
P.201
2. CAMERA CONTROL SET
z CH z PROTOCOL z ADD. z 2ND RS-485/422 PROTOCOL
P.202
3. PPP SET
z DIAL UP (PROVIDER TEL NO., LOG IN ID, PASSWORD,
AUTHENTICATION, AUTO IP ADDRESS) z DIAL IN (LOGIN ID,
PASSWORD, AUTHENTICATION, IP ADDRESS, CLIENT IP ADDRESS)
z CIRCUIT TYPE z MODEM INITI. COMMAND z BAUD RATE z DATA SIZE
z PARITY z STOP BIT
P.202
4. TIME ZONE/NTP SET
z TIME ZONE z SYNC.WITH NTP SERVER
z NTP SERVER ADDRESS z TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE
z RENEWAL OF MANUAL OPERATION
P.203
*
OTHER
P.197
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z MASK z TIME PERIOD zCH zMAIN MONITOR zMON.2 zNETWORK
NETWORK
OPERATION
1. SEQUENCE SET
5. POWER
LOSS/
USED TIME
8. ADVANCED
MENU SET
NETWORK
CONTROL
3. NORMAL REC MODE SET
z NETWORK CONTROL z NETWORK STATUS z OPERATION
8. NETWORK CONTROL SET AUTHORITY
z COPY/DOWNLOAD z CAMERA CONTROL
4. SCREEN
SET
P.182
SETTINGS
3. GENERAL
SET
OPERATION
P.179
2. RECORDING CONDITIONS z RECORDING AREA OVERWRITE z ARCHIVE AREA MODE
SET
z REMAINING DISK WARNING z AUTO DELETE
2. RECORD
SET
Reference
page
z CLOCK SET
2. SUMMER TIME SET/
1. INITIAL SET
EXT.CLOCK SET
INTRODUCTION
Menu structure
indicates the display of information only.
178
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 179 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
INITIAL SET
2. SUMMER TIME SET/EXT. CLOCK
SET
INITIAL SET
Setting the summer time
1. CLOCK SET
2. SUMMER TIME SET/EXT. CLOCK SET
3. HOLIDAY SET
1
Click the
button on the operation panel.
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
1. CLOCK SET
Click “1. INITIAL SET”.
The “INITIAL SET” screen is displayed.
Use the following procedure to set the time and date of the
digital video recorder. Be sure that the date and time are set
correctly at this time.
3
1
The “SUMMER TIME SET/EXT. CLOCK SET” screen is
displayed.
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
Click “2. SUMMER TIME SET/EXT.
CLOCK SET”.
SUMMER TIME SET/EXT. CLOCK SET
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “1. INITIAL SET”.
The “INITIAL SET” screen is displayed.
3
SUMMER TIME SET
MODE : USE
WEEK
4
5
6
Click “1. CLOCK SET”.
8
TIME
- SUN
03
02
: 00
OFF : LST
- SUN
10
02
: 00
EXT. CLOCK SET
ADJUST TIME
7
The “CLOCK SET” screen is displayed.
MONTH
ON : LST
: 01:00
SAVE
CLOCK SET
4
26
- 10
- 2005
WED
00
4
: 00
Set “MODE” to “USE”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
SET
Setting
5
NO USE
‹USE
4
5
Set the month, day, year and time.
The day of the week is set automatically based on the date.
5
6
Click [SET].
The clock is set.
Description
Time is not automatically adjusted to summer
time.
Time is automatically adjusted to summer time.
For “ON”, set the date/time at which to
switch from standard time to summer
time.
For “OFF”, set the date/time at which to
switch from summer time to standard
time.
Setting the external clock
z Recording mode may not operate if the clock is not set. In
this case, when the
button or
button is clicked,
the warning message “PLEASE SET THE CLOCK” is
displayed.
Synchronized operations cannot be performed when the
clocks on the digital video recorder and the connected
peripheral devices differ. By setting the external clock as
described here, all devices connected to the clock adjust
terminal can be synchronized to the same time.
7
For “ADJUST TIME”, set the time at
which the clocks are to be
synchronized.
Each day at the specified time, a signal is output to adjust the
clocks on the connected devices.
(Default setting: 01:00)
English
179
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 180 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
INITIAL SET
8
Click [SAVE].
z If “DLY” is set using timer settings, timer recording on the
above-mentioned holidays is also performed in accordance
with daily settings. In other words, “DLY” includes Sundays
and is given priority over other settings.
z If a day is selected in February, April, June, September or
November that does not exist (see table below), this is
changed automatically to the last day of the month. No
distinction is made between leap years and normal
calendar years.
3. HOLIDAY SET
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
Month
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “1. INITIAL SET”.
Non-existent day
OPERATION
Use the following procedure to set specific days as holidays.
When a day is specified as a holiday, timer recording for that
day is performed as if it were a Sunday.
Dates such as national holidays and company holidays can be
set as holidays when you want those dates to have the same
security as Sundays.
1
INTRODUCTION
The setting is saved.
Day changed to
(last day of the
month)
2
30, 31
29
4, 6, 9, 11
31
30
The “INITIAL SET” screen is displayed.
SETTINGS
3
Click “3. HOLIDAY SET”.
The “HOLIDAY SET” screen is displayed.
HOLIDAY SET
4
-
5
:
12
:
13
:
14
:
15
:
16
:
17
:
18
:
19
:
20
:
SAVE
Specify the days to be treated as
holidays.
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
11
NETWORK
CONTROL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Left column: Day, Right column: Month
A maximum of 20 different days can be specified as holidays.
5
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
180
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 181 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
RECORD SET
3
The “RECORDING AREA SET” screen is displayed.
RECORD SET
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click “1. RECORDING AREA SET”.
RECORDING AREA SET
RECORDING AREA SET
RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
NORMAL REC MODE SET
PROGRAM REC SET
TIMER SET
ALARM REC MODE SET
(1)
(2)
TOTAL CAPACITY
: 600 GB
INTERNAL HDD
: 300 GB
EXTERNAL HDD
: 300 GB
RECORDING AREA
1. RECORDING AREA SET
ARCHIVE AREA
The unit’s hard disk is separated into two independent
recording areas. Furthermore, five different recording modes
can be used for these two areas.
The memory capacity for each area is allocated as a
percentage. (Setting units: 1%)
Recording
area
Recording
mode
: 80%
AREA FULL RESET
: 20%
AREA FULL RESET
(3)
(1) Total capacity display
Displays the total capacity of the hard disk and the capacity of
all internal and expansion hard disks.
Recording method
Recording is performed by
manual operation of the
button on the operation panel.
Recording is performed
automatically for the time
Timer
Automatic
period set with “2-5. TIMER
recording
SET”.
Recording is performed
Recording Alarm
automatically when an alarm
Automatic
area
is detected, as set with “2-6.
recording
ALARM REC MODE SET”.
Automatic recording of images
before an alarm occurs, as set
with “PRE-ALARM RECORDING”
Pre-alarm
Automatic in “2-6. ALARM REC MODE
recording
SET”.
This function is used together
with alarm recording.
The required images are
copied from another recording
Archive
area and stored by manual
Copy
Manual
area
operation of the
button on
the operation panel.
Normal
Manual
recording
1
Click the
panel.
z A maximum of six hard disks can be installed.
(2) Area-specific capacity display
Displays the capacity set by the unit for each recording area
as a percentage of the total capacity.
z Setting and modification of recording area capacities
cannot be made from a PC.
(3) Recording area reset
If the overwrite setting is “OFF”, recording automatically stops
when the corresponding recording area becomes full. In this
case, click [AREA FULL RESET] to overwrite from the
beginning of each area. (Jstep 4)
Reset is not required in the following cases and, therefore,
[AREA FULL RESET] is not displayed.
z When the overwrite setting is “ON”.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “2. RECORD SET”.
The “RECORD SET” screen is displayed.
English
181
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 182 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
RECORD SET
4
If “OVERWRITE” is set to “OFF” for recording conditions,
recording automatically stops when the recording areas
become full. In this case, AREA FULL RESET can be used to
overwrite previous recordings.
Set “OVERWRITE” for the “RECORDING
AREA” to “ON” or “OFF”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
OFF
4
INTRODUCTION
AREA FULL RESET
Click [AREA FULL RESET] under
“RECORDING AREA”.
‹ON
When a recording area becomes full, overwriting
from the beginning of this area starts
automatically.
OPERATION
To perform AREA FULL RESET for the archive area, click
[AREA FULL RESET] under “ARCHIVE AREA”.
Description
Recording stops when a recording area becomes
full.
Setting the remaining-space warning level
When the overwrite setting for a recording area is “OFF”, the
unit can issue a warning as soon as the remaining space
reaches a specific level. (JP.189)
Use the following procedure to set the level at which the
warning is issued.
z When AREA FULL RESET is performed for “RECORDING
AREA”, the recordings in the recording area are
overwritten.
z When AREA FULL RESET is performed for “ARCHIVE
AREA”, the recordings in the archive area are overwritten.
Use the following procedure to set the permission for
overwriting to recording areas or the remaining-space warning
level.
Set “REMAINING DISK WARNING” to
the desired remaining-space warning
level.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Setting overwriting permission for recording
areas
‹1 - 10
Click the
panel.
Remaining-space warning level can be set from
1% to 10%.
Setting AUTO DELETE
Use the following procedure to set the storage period for
recorded data. When the set period expires, the
corresponding data is automatically deleted.
button on the operation
6
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
Click “2. RECORD SET”.
Set “AUTO DELETE” to the desired
storage period.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
The “RECORD SET” screen is displayed.
Setting
3
Click “2. RECORDING CONDITIONS
SET”.
‹OFF
1 - 99
DAYS
The “RECORDING CONDITIONS SET” screen is displayed.
4
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
5
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1
6
AUTO DELETE
%
: OFF
SAVE
OTHER
7
Set the storage period for recorded data from “1
DAY” to “99 DAYS” (full days).
NETWORK
SETTINGS
7
RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
Description
Auto delete is disabled.
NETWORK
OPERATION
2
Description
NETWORK
CONTROL
When the recording areas become full, this setting dictates
whether recording stops or continues by overwriting the
recorded images currently stored on the hard disk.
1
SETTINGS
5
2. RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
182
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 183 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
RECORD SET
(2) Set the picture quality for each camera.
On the DSR-5009P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
(3) Set “AUDIO RECORDING”, “REC RATE” and “REC
PROGRAM GROUP” (Jsteps 5 to 7).
(4) Click [SAVE].
3. NORMAL REC MODE SET
Use the following procedures to set conditions for normal
recording and timer recording.
Setting the picture quality for recording
Setting audio recording
Use the following procedure to set the picture quality for
normal recording.
1
Click the
panel.
Audio can be recorded together with images during normal
recording.
Note, however, that since this audio data is also stored in the
recording area, the recording time for this area decreases.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
5
2
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Click “2. RECORD SET”.
Set “AUDIO RECORDING” to “ON” or
“OFF”.
The “RECORD SET” screen is displayed.
3
Setting
Audio is not recorded.
‹OFF
Click “3. NORMAL REC MODE SET”.
ON
The “NORMAL REC MODE SET” screen is displayed.
Description
Audio is recorded.
NORMAL REC MODE SET
Setting the recording rate
4
PICTURE QUALITY
5
6
7
Use the following procedure to set the recording rate for
normal recording.
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE
: A 12.5 FPS
6
( 166H )
REC PROGRAM GROUP : OFF
8
Set “REC RATE” to the desired
recording rate.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
SAVE
Setting
4
Set “PICTURE QUALITY”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
BASIC
Basic
NORMAL
Normal
Enhanced
‹ENHANCED
Description
A100, A50, A25, A16.67,
‹A12.5, A8.333, A6.25,
A5, A4.167, A3.571,
A3.125, A2.778, A2.5,
A2.273, A1.923, A1.667,
A1.471, A1.316, A1.19,
A1.087, A1
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
(Audio can be recorded.)
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit: FPS).
(Audio cannot be recorded.)
Recording rate is not set.
FINE
Fine
0.5, 0.333, 0.25, 0.2, 0.1,
0.05, 0.033
SUPER FINE
Super Fine
***
INDIV.
Picture quality is set for each camera.
The letter “A” is displayed in front of recording rates that can
be set for audio recording.
„ Setting the picture quality for each camera
(1) Set “PICTURE QUALITY” to “INDIV.”.
The “NORMAL REC MODE SET” screen is displayed.
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 or 100 FPS are set.
z When two or more cameras are connected and 50 or 100
FPS is set, the actual recording rate is roughly the
recording rate divided by the number of cameras.
(Example: When 8 cameras are connected and the
recording rate setting is 100 FPS, the actual recording rate
is 12.5 FPS)
NORMAL REC MODE SET
(1)
(2)
(3)
PICTURE QUALITY
: INDIV.
01
EN
02
EN
03
EN
04
EN
05
EN
06
EN
07
EN
08
EN
09
EN
10
EN
11
EN
12
EN
13
EN
14
EN
15
EN
16
EN
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
REC RATE
: A 12.5 FPS
( 166H )
REC PROGRAM GROUP : OFF
(4)
English
SAVE
183
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 184 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
RECORD SET
3
Click “4. PROGRAM REC SET”.
The “PROGRAM REC SET” screen is displayed.
PROGRAM REC SET
4
5
PROGRAM
7 : 1
8 : 1
11 : 1
12 : 1
13 : 1
14 : 1
15 : 1
16 : 1
OPERATION
6 : 1
10 : 1
NORMAL REC : 317H
Set “REC PROGRAM GROUP” to the
desired program group.
Setting
‹OFF
4
Description
Program No. 1
P-2
Program No. 2
P-3
Program No. 3
P-4
Program No. 4
Setting
Description
P-1
Program No. 1
P-2
Program No. 2
P-3
Program No. 3
P-4
Program No. 4
5
The setting is saved.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
4. PROGRAM REC SET
button on the operation
Description
OFF
Recording rate is not set.
25, 12.5, 6.25, 3.125, 1.563,
‹1, 0.5, 0.333, 0.25, 0.2,
0.1, 0.05, 0.033
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit:
FPS).
NETWORK
OPERATION
When monitoring a number of cameras connected to this
digital video recorder, a separate recording rate can be set for
each camera. In addition, video recorded from each camera
and the corresponding recording rates can be set in programs
with up to four patterns, thus facilitating the simple
specification of programs for TIMER SET and NORMAL REC
MODE SET menus.
z When the set recording rate total exceeds 25 FPS, the
actual recording rate is restricted to 25 FPS.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
NETWORK
CONTROL
For “SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA
RATE (FPS)”, set the recording rate for
each camera.
Set the recording rate for the cameras from which video is to
be recorded.
Click [SAVE].
Click the
panel.
Set “PROGRAM” to the desired
program group.
SETTINGS
P-1
SAVE
[Settings]
No program group is set.
z Settings for program groups should be made separately on
the “PROGRAM REC SET” screen. (JP.184)
1
5 : 1
9 : 1
6
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
8
: P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
1 : 1
2 : 1
3 : 1
4 : 1
z The recording rate for timer recording should be set
separately using the “TIMER SET” screen. (JP.185)
7
INTRODUCTION
Selecting setting values
Image resolution is determined by the product of picture
quality and recording rate.
The higher the picture quality and the faster the recording
rate, the better the image resolution; however, as higher
resolution requires more storage capacity, the recording time
decreases accordingly.
z The recording rates listed in pull-down menus vary
according to the connected channels.
Click “2. RECORD SET”.
The “RECORD SET” screen is displayed.
6
Click [SAVE].
z Set values are lost if a different window is selected without
clicking [SAVE].
184
English
OTHER
When the setting is completed, the normal recording time
associated with the setting is displayed for reference
purposes.
Use the above procedure to set up to four program patterns.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 185 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
RECORD SET
5. TIMER SET
Use the following procedure to set timer operation duration and timer recording conditions on a day-specific basis.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6)
TIMER SET
WEEK
(7)
(8)
START
Click the
panel.
PROGRAM
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
MON
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
TUE
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
WED
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
THU
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
FRI
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
SAT
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
DLY
--
: --
--
: --
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
OFF
A 12.5 FPS
OFF
EXT
**
*
**
**
*
**
OVER 24H
For setting timer
recording spanning
more than 24 hours
SAVE
button on the operation
(8) EXT
Displays details set by an external timer. (These are not start
and stop time settings.)
Click “2. RECORD SET”.
z If “DLY” is set for any other day, all rows use this setting.
The “RECORD SET” screen is displayed.
3
SET
: --
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
FPS
--
5
1
STOP
SUN
5
Click “5. TIMER SET”.
Click [SAVE].
The “TIMER SET” screen is displayed.
The setting is saved.
4
„ Performing timer recording
Set timer recording conditions for
different days of the week.
Click the
(1) WEEK
Specifies the days of the week for timer recording. By using
multiple setting rows, it is possible to set up timer recording for
a number of different times during a single day.
(2) START
Specifies the time at which to start timer recording.
(3) STOP
Specifies the time at which to stop timer recording.
(4) PROGRAM
Specifies the program (P-1 through P-4) for program
recording. (JP.184)
(5) FPS
Specifies the recording rate. (JP.183)
Set to “***” for program recording.
“***” is displayed automatically when program recording is set
and [SAVE] is clicked.
(6) SET
Set to “ON” to enable timer recording.
Set to “OFF” to disable timer recording.
(7) DLY
Set the start and stop times, program, and recording rate and
set “SET” to “ON” to enable timer recording over the same
period each day.
English
button on the operation panel. (JP.159)
„ Overlapping of timer reservation times
z If timer settings overlap, recording is performed in the
following priority order.
Individual reservations
“DLY”
“EXT”
(High)
Priority
(Low)
z If a reservation for a particular day or a daily reservation
overlaps with each other, priority is given to that with the
earliest start time. If both have the same start time, priority
is given to that with the highest setting position in the
menu.
„ Setting a timer for over 24-hours continuous
recording
The bottom two lines (SAT, DLY) of the TIMER SET screen
are used to make settings for this type of recording.
(1) Click [OVER 24H] to switch the setting format.
(2) Set the day and time for the start of recording in the top
row.
(3) Set the day, time, program and recording rate for the end
of recording in the bottom row.
(4) Select “ON” for “SET” on the bottom row to specify timer
recording extending for over 24 hours.
185
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 186 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
RECORD SET
6. ALARM REC MODE SET
Use the following procedure to set the picture quality for alarm
recording.
Use the following procedure to set the recording conditions for
alarm recording.
5
Setting alarm recording
Setting
button on the operation
Click “2. RECORD SET”.
The “RECORD SET” screen is displayed.
3
Basic
NORMAL
Normal
Enhanced
‹ENHANCED
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Description
BASIC
Click “6. ALARM REC MODE SET”.
OPERATION
Click the
panel.
Set “PICTURE QUALITY”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Set the operation patterns and recording conditions to perform
alarm recording.
1
INTRODUCTION
Setting the picture quality for recording
FINE
Fine
SUPER FINE
Super Fine
INDIV.
Picture quality is set for each camera.
„ Setting the picture quality for each camera
SETTINGS
The “ALARM REC MODE SET” screen is displayed.
(1) Set “PICTURE QUALITY” to “INDIV.”.
The “ALARM REC MODE SET” screen is displayed.
ALARM REC MODE SET
ALARM REC MODE SET
ALARM RECORDING
:
OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
:
ENHANCED
6
7
8
10
11
AUDIO RECORDING
:
OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
:
ONLY
REC RATE :
REC RATE :
A 12.5 FPS
(2)
, DURATION:
:
20 SEC
9
5 SEC
12
***
, DURATION:
(3)
=>(813 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
13
ALARM RECORDING
:
ENABLED
PICTURE QUALITY
:
INDIV.
05
EN
13
EN
01
EN
09
EN
02
EN
10
EN
03
EN
11
EN
04
EN
12
EN
AUDIO RECORDING
:
OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
:
ONLY
REC RATE :
A 12.5 FPS
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
14
SAVE
REC RATE :
(4)
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹OFF
Alarm recording is disabled.
Alarm recording is performed only
during timer recording.
AL-REC OFF TIMER
Alarm recording is performed only
during recording other than timer
recording.
OLY AL-RC ON TMR
Alarm recording is performed only in
the period set for timer recording
without timer recording actually
being performed.
, DURATION:
5 SEC
SAVE
OTHER
AL-REC ON TIMER
20 SEC
***
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Alarm recording is always
performed regardless of timer
recording or timer settings.
:
08
EN
16
EN
(2) Set the picture quality for each camera.
(3) Set “AUDIO RECORDING”, “ALARM INTERLEAVE”,
“REC RATE”, “DURATION”, “PRE-ALARM
RECORDING”, “REC RATE”, “DURATION” and “ALARM
TRIGGER” (Jsteps 6 to 13).
(4) Click [SAVE].
Description
ENABLED
, DURATION:
07
EN
15
EN
=>(981 ALARMS CAN BE RECORDED)
ALARM TRIGGER
:: ALARM
Set “ALARM RECORDING” to the
desired recording mode.
Setting
A 12.5 FPS
06
EN
14
EN
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
A 12.5 FPS
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
(1)
NETWORK
CONTROL
4
5
186
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 187 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
RECORD SET
9
Setting audio recording
Audio can be recorded together with images during alarm
recording. Note, however, that since this audio data is also
stored in the recording area, the recording time for this area
decreases.
6
Set “DURATION” to the desired alarm
recording duration.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Set “AUDIO RECORDING”.
Records for the set duration for
each alarm.
CC
Records while an alarm is
activated (Recording continues
for five seconds even if less than
five seconds).
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
Audio is not recorded.
‹OFF
ON
Description
5SEC, 10SEC, ‹20SEC,
40SEC, 1MIN, 2MIN, 3MIN,
4MIN, 5MIN, 10MIN, 15MIN
Audio is recorded.
Setting pre-alarm recording.
Use the following procedure to set the recording conditions to
be used for pre-alarm. (JP.162)
z Audio recording can be enabled when the recording rate is
between A50 and A1 FPS.
10 Set “PRE-ALARM RECORDING” to
“ON” or “OFF”.
Setting the alarm interleave
7
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Set “ALARM INTERLEAVE” to the
desired recording pattern.
Setting
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
‹ONLY
Video is recorded only from cameras with an alarm
occurring.
SW
Recording is switched between video from a
camera for which an alarm has occurred and video
from all connected cameras.
8
Pre-alarm recording is enabled.
recording rate.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Description
Setting
A50, A25, A16.67, ‹A12.5,
A8.333, A6.25, A5, A4.167,
Recording is performed at the
A3.571, A3.125, A2.778,
selected recording rate (unit:
A2.5, A2.273, A1.923,
FPS). (Audio can be recorded.)
A1.667, A1.471, A1.316,
A1.19, A1.087, A1
A100, A50, A25, A16.67,
‹A12.5, A8.333, A6.25,
A5, A4.167, A3.571,
A3.125, A2.778, A2.5,
A2.273, A1.923, A1.667,
A1.471, A1.316, A1.19,
A1.087, A1
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit:
FPS). (Audio cannot be recorded.)
Description
Recording is performed at the
selected recording rate (unit:
FPS).
The letter “A” is displayed in front of recording rates that can
be set for audio recording.
The letter “A” is displayed in front of recording rates that can
be set for audio recording.
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 FPS is set.
z When two or more cameras are connected and 50 FPS is
set, the actual recording rate is roughly the recording rate
divided by the number of cameras. (Example: When 4
cameras are connected and the recording rate setting is 50
FPS, the actual recording rate is 12.5 FPS)
English
Pre-alarm recording is disabled.
ON
11 Set “REC RATE” to the desired
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
0.5, 0.333, 0.25, 0.2, 0.1,
0.05, 0.033
‹OFF
z If “ALARM RECORDING” is set to “OFF”, the PRE-ALARM
RECORDING setting is displayed as “**” and cannot be
set.
Set “REC RATE” to the desired
recording rate.
Setting
Description
187
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 188 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
RECORD SET
INTRODUCTION
OPERATION
z 100 FPS cannot be selected when mirroring is set
(JP.119).
z When only one camera is connected, recording is
performed at 25 FPS even if 50 or 100 FPS are set.
z When two or more cameras are connected and 50 or 100
FPS is set, the actual recording rate is roughly the
recording rate divided by the number of cameras.
(Example: When 8 cameras are connected and the
recording rate setting is 100 FPS, the actual recording rate
is 12.5 FPS)
12 Set “DURATION” to the desired prealarm recording duration.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
SETTINGS
5SEC, 10SEC, 20SEC,
40SEC, ‹1MIN, 2MIN,
3MIN, 4MIN, 5MIN, 10MIN,
15MIN
Description
Records for the set duration.
Setting alarm triggers
NETWORK
CONTROL
Use the following procedure to set the alarm triggers (i.e.,
launch signals), which function as operation conditions for
alarm recording.
13 Set “ALARM TRIGGER” to the desired
launch signal for alarm recording.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹ALARM
Starts recording when a motion sensor is
activated.
NETWORK
OPERATION
SENSOR
Description
Starts recording when an external alarm is
activated.
Starts recording when both an external alarm
ALARM AND
and a motion sensor are activated
SENSOR
simultaneously.
ALARM OR
SENSOR
Starts recording when an external alarm or a
motion sensor is activated independent of the
other.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
z External alarm detection:
This is used to describe input of an external detection
signal from a door switch or the like to the unit’s ALARM IN
terminal.
z Motion sensor detection:
This refers to detection of motion on the monitor in
accordance with motion sensor settings.
z The motion sensor settings are made on the digital video
recorder.
14 Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
188
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 189 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
GENERAL SET
5
GENERAL SET
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
DISPLAY SET
BUZZER SET
SECURITY LOCK SET
USER ID SET
RS-232C/RS-485 SET
HDD SET
NETWORK SET
NETWORK CONTROL SET
z These settings apply to information displayed on the
monitor connected to the unit, not to information displayed
on the PC monitor.
2. BUZZER SET
Use the following procedure to set a warning buzzer that
sounds when an alarm occurs or when the hard disk space
reaches remaining-space warning level.
1. DISPLAY SET
Set conditions for the display of data on the unit’s monitor by
selecting “ON” or “OFF” for each item.
1
1
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
2
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
3
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
Click “1. DISPLAY SET”.
:
ON
(2)
:
QUALITY
:
AUDIO
:
ALARM COUNT :
ALARM TYPE :
TITLE
:
ON
TIME
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
5
4
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
4
ON
DISK ERROR
: ON
LOCK WARNING : ON
KEY IN
: OFF
NON REC
: OFF
SAVE
Select “ON” or “OFF” for each display
item.
(1) ALARM
Default
setting
Displays the current date or
recording date.
(2) TIME
ON
Displays the current time or
recording time.
ON
Displays the picture quality for
recording or playback.
ON
Displays the audio status during
recording or playback.
ON
Displays the number of recorded
alarms.
ALARM
(6)
TYPE
ON
Displays the alarm recording type.
z For alarm recording:
“ALARM” is displayed.
z For pre-alarm recording:
“PRE” is displayed.
(7) TITLE
ON
Sounds a buzzer when an alarm is
detected.
(2)
DISK
FULL
ON
Sounds a buzzer when the amount
of data stored in each of the hard
disk recording areas reaches the
remaining-space warning level
(JP.182).
(3)
DISK
ERROR
ON
Sounds a buzzer when a hard-disk
error occurs.
ON
Sounds a buzzer when a restricted
operation button is pressed during
security lock.
Specifically, the buzzer sounds
twice with an interval of
approximately 0.5 seconds.
OFF
Buzzer emits a key-operation sound
each time a button is pressed.
OFF
Sounds a buzzer when recording is
stopped.
(4)
LOCK
WARNING
(5) KEY IN
(6)
Displays the camera title.
189
Description
OFF
Description
ON
ALARM
(5)
COUNT
: ON
ON
(1) DATE
(4) AUDIO
: OFF
DISK FULL
ON
Select “ON” or “OFF” for each display
item.
(3) QUALITY
ALARM
5
ON
Item
Default
setting
BUZZER SET
ON
SAVE
Item
English
Click “2. BUZZER SET”.
(1)
(2)
DISPLAY SET
DATE
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
The “BUZZER SET” screen is displayed.
The “DISPLAY SET” screen is displayed.
(1)
button on the operation
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
3
Click the
panel.
NON
REC
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 190 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
5
GENERAL SET
Click [SAVE].
INTRODUCTION
3. SECURITY LOCK SET
The setting is saved.
User level functions can be displayed.
1
z These settings apply to the buzzer on the digital video
recorder. To sound a buzzer on the PC, refer to NOTE.
z Different settings cannot be used for the recorder and the
PC.
z When a buzzer sounds, press any button on the digital
video recorder to stop the buzzer.
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
3
To sound a buzzer on the PC
z Create a folder named “BUZZER” within the root directory
of the PC’s C drive.
z Within this folder, save the sound to be used as a buzzer in
.wav format and with the name “BUZZER.WAV”.
Example: C:\BUZZER\BUZZER.WAV
Once these settings have been made, whenever an alarm
occurs, the PC provides notification by playing the saved .wav
file.
* Only the first second of the saved audio file is played, and
for this reason, it is advisable to choose a file with suitable
audio in the first second. The use of large audio files is
discouraged.
* The PC buzzer only sounds when an alarm occurs. It does
not sound for errors such as disk full warning, disk error or
recording stop.
OPERATION
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
Click “3. SECURITY LOCK SET”.
The “SECURITY LOCK SET” screen is displayed.
SECURITY LOCK SET
LOCK MODE
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: NO
: NORMAL
COPY
: LV2, 3, 4
CAMERA CONTROL
: LV2, 3, 4
Description
LOCK MODE
Displays the currently set lock mode (KEY/
PASSWORD/NETWORK)
FREE
ACCESS
LEVEL
Displays user levels that cannot use
password lock (NO/LV1/LV1,2/LV1,2,3)
when “LOCK MODE” is set for
“PASSWORD”
OPERATION
AUTHORITY
Displays whether default values are used
for user authorization, and whether to
change the authorization for copying to
external media or camera control
COPY
Displays user levels that have permission
to copy to external media when
“OPERATION AUTHORITY” is set for
“CHANGE”
CAMERA
CONTROL
Displays user levels with camera control
permission when “OPERATION
AUTHORITY” is set to “CHANGE”
NETWORK
OPERATION
Setting
NETWORK
CONTROL
To cancel the buzzer setting on the PC
z Delete the folder or file created in the above-mentioned
process, change the name of the audio file, or move it to a
different location on the hard disk.
z Press the
(Stop) button on the PLAYBACK area on
the operation panel to stop the buzzer on the PC.
: KEY
SETTINGS
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
190
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 191 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
GENERAL SET
4
5
6
4. USER ID SET
Set a user ID and password to restrict operation of the digital
video recorder directly or through the network.
„ User levels and privileges
Select from the following four user levels.
Operation
privilege
LV1
Level
Monitoring
LV2
LV3
*1
7
Menu operation
Monitor control
3 users
16 users*2
16 users including a user for the DVR (1 user
for the DVR)
Level 2
3
Level 3
4
Level 4
Click [SAVE].
z The “LV” setting registered on line 1 cannot be changed
from “4”. To change the level, register a separate user on a
different line.
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
Click “4. USER ID SET”.
The “USER ID SET” screen is displayed.
USER ID SET
USER ID PASSWORD LV
4444
1 ID4
4
USER ID PASSWORD LV
9
--
2 ID3
3333
3
10
--
3 ID2
2222
2
11
--
4 ID1
1111
1
12
--
5
--
13
--
6
--
14
--
7
--
15
--
8
--
16
--
SAVE
English
Level 1
2
1 user at LV3 or LV4
Use the following procedure to set the user ID, password and
level.
The user ID must be between one and eight alphanumeric
characters, and the password between four and eight
alphanumeric characters.
Characters that can be entered: 0 to 9, A to Z
6
5
4
1
3 users at LV2, LV3 and LV4
Registering a user
3
Description
The setting is saved.
*1 Masked video cannot be monitored.
*2 However, the maximum number may not be possible
depending on the NET conditions and the number of
screens displayed.
2
Set user level for “LV”.
Setting
LV4
Recording
1
Set “PASSWORD”.
[Settings]
Playback/
searching
Concurrent
connection
restriction
Set user ID for “USER ID”.
191
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 192 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
GENERAL SET
6. HDD SET
This screen displays information regarding the hard disk.
This screen displays settings relevant to the unit’s interfaces.
Settings cannot be changed.
1
Click the
panel.
1
button on the operation
2
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
button on the operation
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
3
Click “5. RS-232C/RS-485 SET”.
OPERATION
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
3
Click the
panel.
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
INTRODUCTION
5. RS-232C/RS-485 SET
Click “6. HDD SET”.
The “HDD SET” screen is displayed.
The “RS-232C/RS-485 SET” screen is displayed.
HDD SET
RS-232C/RS-485 SET
(1)
(1)
DISK 2
: 82 GB
(2)
(3)
MIRRORING
: ON
PLAYBACK DRIVE : MASTER
(5)
SAVE
(1) Hard disk capacity
Displays the total capacity of the hard disk.
If the hard disk is expanded, the capacity is displayed for each
disk.
(2) MIRRORING
Displays settings relevant to mirroring-type recording on the
digital video recorder.
Description
CONTROL
Displays the type of interface.
(2)
DATA SPEED
Displays the communication speed.
STATUS INFO
Displays whether or not status
information is transmitted during
RS-232C/RS-485 communication.
(4)
ALARM INFO
Displays whether or not alarm
information is transmitted during
RS-232C/RS-485 communication.
(5)
ADDRESS
Displays the address.
Setting
Description
ON
Mirroring recording enabled.
OFF
Mirroring recording disabled.
(3) PLAYBACK DRIVE
This item indicates which of the hard drives is used to provide
video for playback when mirroring is turned on.
Setting
***
Description
NETWORK
SETTINGS
z Mirroring:
When the hard disk is expanded, the same video can be
recorded to both hard disks in a process known as
“mirroring”. Even if a problem occurs in the writing of video
data to one of the disks, it is possible to extract normal data
from the other disk when this function is turned on.
NETWORK
OPERATION
(1)
NETWORK
CONTROL
Item
(3)
: 80 GB
EX - DISK 2 : 80 GB
EX - DISK 4 : 80 GB
SETTINGS
(2)
(3)
(4)
DISK 1
EX - DISK 1 : 82 GB
EX - DISK 3 : 82 GB
CONTROL
: RS-485
DATA SPEED : 19200
STATUS INFO : OFF
ALARM INFO : OFF
ADDRESS
: 001
Mirroring is disabled.
MASTER Playback data is read from master disk.
192
Playback data is read from slave disk.
OTHER
SLAVE
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 193 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
GENERAL SET
4
Item
Description
Set from the digital video recorder
whether the IP address is automatically
acquired from the DHCP server or
manually set. Set “ON” when using an IP
(1) DHCP
address acquired automatically from an
Internet service provider or a DHCP
server on a LAN, and set “OFF” when
using a fixed IP.
Select “OFF” for “DHCP” to set. Generally,
a private IP address is used when a fixed
IP address is set in a LAN (example:
(2) IP ADDRESS
192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255).
Be sure not to duplicate IP addresses
from other devices.
SUBNET
Select “OFF” for “DHCP” to set. The same
(3)
MASK
value is set throughout the LAN.
Select “OFF” for “DHCP” to set. Specifies
the IP address of the device (on the LAN
(4) GATEWAY
side) when linking a LAN to a WAN or
another type of network.
(5) PORT
Sets open port. Default value is “80”.
NETWORK
Sets restrictions for traffic in the LAN.
(6)
SPEED
Normally, this is set to “NO LIMIT”.
Set whether the DNS server IP address is
automatically acquired or manually set.
Generally this setting is “AUTO” when
DNS
“ON” is selected for “DHCP”. When the
(7)
SERVER
DNS server address is specified by
network administrator or Internet service
provider, select “MANUAL” and set
“PRIMARY” and “SECONDARY” below.
Set the primary address and the
secondary address.
PRIMARY
Set when “DNS SERVER” is set to
(8)
SECONDARY “MANUAL”. Set the DNS server address
specified by the network administrator or
Internet service provider.
(9) HOST NAME Set the host name.
DOMAIN
Set when specified by an Internet service
(10)
SUFFIX
provider.
z “***” is displayed and “PLAYBACK DRIVE” cannot be set
when only one hard disk is being used or when
“MIRRORING” is set to “OFF”.
z When this setting is made after expanding the hard disk,
the hard disks are initialized and all recorded video is lost.
If any important recordings are stored on the hard disks,
they should also be stored on a separate data storage
device before making this setting.
7. NETWORK SET
Network settings must be made in advance on the unit
whenever it is to be controlled via a network. Once this is
done, settings can then be changed from the controlling PC.
z Changing network-related settings
When these settings are modified, the connection is
cancelled and control rights are returned to the unit. To
reestablish the connection, reset the network settings on
the PC to match the modified settings on the unit.
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
3
Click “7. NETWORK SET”.
The “NETWORK SET” screen is displayed.
(1)
(4)
(6)
(8)
(3)
(5)
(7)
(9)
(10)
5
English
NETWORK SET
DHCP
(2)
: ON
IP ADDRESS
:
192
. 168
. 0
. 1
SUBNET MASK
:
255
. 255
. 255
. 0
GATEWAY
:
0
. 0
. 0
. 0
PORT
:
80
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SERVER
: AUTO
PRIMARY
:
0
. 0
. 0
. 0
SECONDARY
:
0
. 0
. 0
. 0
HOST NAME
:
DOMAIN SUFFIX
:
MAC ADDRESS
: 08-00-7B-81-22-4C
Change the settings as required.
Contact the network administrator for more details on setting
values.
SAVE
193
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 194 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
GENERAL SET
INTRODUCTION
8. NETWORK CONTROL SET
z If settings are changed during network control, the
connection is terminated.
z If settings are changed during network control, the
connection is terminated.
5
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
OPERATION
z If a value other than “80” is set as the default value for the
port, when specifying the URL, enter a colon (:) and then
the port number after the IP address.
For example, if the port number is set as “60001”, enter
http://192.168.0.1:60001/
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
Click [SAVE].
2
The setting is saved.
Click “3. GENERAL SET”.
The “GENERAL SET” screen is displayed.
3
Click “8. NETWORK CONTROL SET”.
The “NETWORK CONTROL SET” screen is displayed.
SETTINGS
NETWORK CONTROL SET
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
4
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
5
OPERATION AUTHORITY
: CHANGE
COPY/DOWNLOAD
8
4
: LV3, 4
: LV2, 3, 4
CAMERA CONTROL
SAVE
Set “NETWORK STATUS” to “ON” or
“OFF”.
NETWORK
CONTROL
6
7
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
During network connection, the message
“NETWORK CONTROL” is displayed on the
monitor connected to the digital video recorder.
‹ON
OFF
The message “NETWORK CONTROL” is not
displayed on the monitor connected to the digital
video recorder even during network connection.
Set “OPERATION AUTHORITY” to
“NORMAL” or “CHANGE”.
If no changes are to be made to user privileges, select
“NORMAL” and go to step 8.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹NORMAL
194
Description
User privileges remain at the default
setting.
OTHER
CHANGE
NETWORK
SETTINGS
5
Description
NETWORK
OPERATION
Setting
Allows changes to user privileges.
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 195 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
6
GENERAL SET
If “OPERATION AUTHORITY” is set to
“CHANGE”, set the level for “COPY/
DOWNLOAD”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
‹LV3, 4
Allows users at Level 3 or higher to
download live images.
LV4
Allows users at Level 4 or higher to
download live images.
7
If “OPERATION AUTHORITY” is set to
“CHANGE”, set the level for “CAMERA
CONTROL”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
‹LV2, 3, 4
Allows users at Level 2 or higher to control
cameras from the PC.
LV3, 4
Allows users at Level 3 or higher to control
cameras from the PC.
LV4
Allows Level 4 users to control cameras
from the PC.
8
Click [SAVE].
The settings are saved.
English
195
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 196 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
SCREEN SET
6
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
Switching the main monitor and monitor 2
displays at a set time period
1. SEQUENCE SET
2. MASK SET
1
1. SEQUENCE SET
Set “FULL” to “INDIV.” on the
“SEQUENCE SET” screen.
Click the
panel.
SEQUENCE SET
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
The “SCREEN SET” screen is displayed.
Click “1. SEQUENCE SET”.
: 1S
3
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
TIME PERIOD : T1 ( 00:00 - 00:00 )
CH
01
02
03
1S
1S
MAIN MONITOR 1S
1S
1S
1S
MON.2
2
SAVE
07
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
11
12
13
14
15
16
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
1S
Set “QUAD” to the desired quad-screen
display interval.
Set “TIME PERIOD” to the desired time
period.
Time period T1
T2
Time period T2
T3
Time period T3
T4
Time period T4
Select the switching interval for each
camera on the main monitor.
Display changes at a 1 second interval.
On the DSR-5009P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
2S - 30S
Display changes at a 2 to 30 second interval.
INDIV.
Set the period for each camera.
5
On the DSR-5009P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
6
z The screen changes if “INDIV.” is selected. See “Switching
the main monitor and monitor 2 displays at a set time
period” (following) for the next operations.
5
Set “QUAD” to the desired quad-screen
display interval.
‹1S
2S - 30S
OTHER
z The time period for “T1” through “T4” changes to that of
“TIME PERIOD A” or “TIME PERIOD B” on the <TIME
PERIOD SET> screen (JP.69).
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
Select the switching interval for each
camera on monitor 2.
NETWORK
OPERATION
Description
Description
‹T1
4
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹1S
08
1S
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Set “FULL” to the desired full-screen
display interval.
Setting
06
1S
1S
Setting
4
05
1S
SAVE
3
6
10
04
1S
NETWORK
CONTROL
: 1S
QUAD
: 1S
6
SEQUENCE SET
FULL
: INDIV.
QUAD
CH
09
MAIN MONITOR 1S
1S
MON.2
The “SEQUENCE SET” screen is displayed.
4
5
FULL
4
5
Click “4. SCREEN SET”.
3
1
2
SETTINGS
2
OPERATION
Use the following procedure to scroll through video from all
cameras at a specified interval.
The interval for automatic selection can only be set for full
screen and quad display.
1
INTRODUCTION
SCREEN SET
Description
Display changes at a 1 second interval.
Display changes at a 2 to 30 second interval.
196
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 197 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
5
SCREEN SET
2. MASK SET
Use the following procedure to mask unneeded video on the
monitor screen with a gray pattern.
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “4. SCREEN SET”.
The “SCREEN SET” screen is displayed.
3
Click “2. MASK SET”.
The “MASK SET“ screen is displayed.
On the DSR-5009P, cameras No. 01-09 are displayed.
MASK SET
(1)
MASK
:
OFF
(2)
TIME PERIOD
:
T1 ( 00:00 - 00:00 )
(3)
CH
01
MAIN MONITOR OFF
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MON.2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NETWORK
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CH
09
MAIN MONITOR OFF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MON.2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NETWORK
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
5
4
SAVE
Set the following functions as required.
Item
Description
(1) MASK
Turns masking on or off.
(2) TIME PERIOD
Select a time period, from T1 to T4.
(3) CH
Turns masking on or off for each channel
on the main monitor, monitor 2 and
network video.
5
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
z Network mask settings are valid only for the user
connecting to the network with LV1. Users connecting with
LV2, LV3 and LV4 are able to display all channels.
English
197
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 198 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
6
POWER LOSS/USED TIME
INTRODUCTION
1. POWER LOSS/USED TIME
Use the following procedure to check date and time of power
losses, the amount of power-on time, and time of use for hard
disk.
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
OPERATION
2
Click “5. POWER LOSS/USED TIME”.
The “POWER LOSS/USED TIME” screen is displayed.
POWER LOSS/USED TIME
(1)
LOSS
20 - 10
19 - 10
19 - 10
19 - 10
19 - 10
19 - 10
19 - 10
01 - 01
(2)
INTERNAL HDD
DISK1 USE
DISK2 USE
POWER
(3)
FIRMWARE VER
:
:
:
00023H
00023H
00023H
S : 00.21-02
C : 00.00-09
Description
(2) INTERNAL HDD
Displays the power usage duration for
each disk.
FIRMWARE
VER
NETWORK
OPERATION
(1) POWER
Displays the number of power losses
(#007) and the date and time of
occurrence and recovery for the eight
most recent power losses.
(3)
NETWORK
CONTROL
M : 0.12-00
Item
RECOVER
20 - 10 19 : 53
20 - 10 09 : 09
20 - 10 09 : 09
19 - 10 21 : 36
19 - 10 20 : 48
19 - 10 20 : 38
19 - 10 20 : 26
12 - 08 12 : 35
19 : 51
23 : 48
23 : 48
21 : 36
20 : 47
20 : 35
20 : 26
00 : 00
SETTINGS
POWER
#007
Displays the firmware version.
z The maximum number of power losses displayed is “999”.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
198
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 199 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
7
INITIALIZATION LOG
INITIALIZATION LOG
Use the following procedure to check the records for hard-disk
initialization and area resetting.
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “6. INITIALIZATION LOG”.
The “INITIALIZATION LOG” screen is displayed.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
INITIALIZATION LOG
DATE
04 - 06
04 - 06
04 - 06
26 - 05
-- - --- - --- - --- - --
Item
TIME
17 : 01
17 : 00
17 : 00
11 : 24
-- : --- : --- : --- : --
AREA
ACTION
RECORD(INIT.)
RECORD(RESET)
ARCHIVE(INIT.)
ARCHIVE(RESET)
-------------(----------)
-------------(----------)
-------------(----------)
-------------(----------)
USER
ID4
ID4
ID4
ID4
-----------------------------
Description
(1) DATE
Displays the date of initialization and
area resetting.
(2) TIME
Displays the time of initialization and
area resetting.
(3) AREA, ACTION
Displays the area in question and the
corresponding operation content.
(4) USER
Displays the user ID of the user that
performed initialization and area
resetting.
z The eight most recent records for initialization and area
resetting are displayed.
English
199
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 200 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
8
COPY MENU SETTINGS
LOADING MENU SETTINGS
Use the following procedure to save menu settings to a PC.
1
Click the
panel.
INTRODUCTION
SAVING MENU SETTINGS
Load menu settings saved on a computer to the digital video
recorder.
Also set whether to load user ID settings (JP.191) or network
settings (JP.193).
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “7. COPY MENU SETTINGS”.
The “COPY MENU SETTINGS” screen is displayed.
1
COPY MENU SETTINGS
DVR TYPE VER.
: SA16-04.00
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
SAVE MENUS TO PC
3
Click the
panel.
OPERATION
z Recording area settings (JP.78) can also be loaded but
hard disk initialization is required.
2
SAVE
:
COPY USER ID SETTINGS
: NO
Click “7. COPY MENU SETTINGS”.
The “COPY MENU SETTINGS” screen is displayed.
SETTINGS
LOAD MENUS FROM PC
LOAD FILE
BROWSE
COPY MENU SETTINGS
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
COPY NETWORK SETTINGS
: NO
DVR TYPE VER.
LOAD
3
: SA16-04.00
SAVE MENUS TO PC
SAVE
Click [SAVE].
:
4
COPY USER ID SETTINGS
: NO
BROWSE
Specify the save destination folder and
save.
3
NETWORK
CONTROL
The save confirmation dialog is displayed.
LOAD MENUS FROM PC
LOAD FILE
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
COPY NETWORK SETTINGS
: NO
LOAD
3
5
6
Select whether to load user ID settings
with “COPY USER ID SETTINGS”.
Select whether to load network settings
with “COPY NETWORK SETTINGS”.
NETWORK
OPERATION
4
Click the [BROWSE] button and specify
the file that the menu is saved in.
Click [LOAD].
NETWORK
SETTINGS
The loading process begins.
The network is disconnected and the digital video recorder
restarts.
OTHER
200
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 201 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
9
ADVANCED MENU SET
6
ADVANCED MENU SET
1.
2.
3.
4.
7
ALARM NOTICE SET
CAMERA CONTROL SET
PPP SET
TIME ZONE/NTP SET
Set “USER MAIL ADDRESS” to the email address from which notifications
are sent.
Set “USE” in the unset column of
“SEND MAIL ADDRESS” to “ON” or
“OFF”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
1. ALARM NOTICE SET
Use the following procedure to receive notification by e-mail
when an alarm event or device malfunction occurs while the
digital video recorder is connected to a network. To set this
function, make the necessary e-mail settings.
1
Click the
panel.
Click “8. ADVANCED MENU SET”.
3
ON
ALARM NOTICE
5
11
12
13
14
15
11 Set “SUBJECT” to the subject of the
: OFF
notification e-mail.
:
SEND MAIL ADDRESS
USE
:
1 OFF
MAIL ADDRESS
IMAGE
OFF
3 OFF
OFF
4 OFF
OFF
5 OFF
OFF
6 OFF
OFF
7 OFF
OFF
8 OFF
OFF
SUBJECT
:
AUTHENTICATION
: NO USE
12 Set “AUTHENTICATION” to select
OFF
2 OFF
whether authentication is to be
performed.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹NO USE
POP3 SERVER ADDRESS :
16
USER ID
:
PASSWORD
:
SAVE
TEST
ON
Alarm notification is enabled.
POP3
POP3 (POP before SMTP) authentication is
performed.
SMTP
SMTP authentication is performed.
14 Set the user ID for “USER ID” when
Description
Alarm notification is disabled.
User authentication is not performed.
SERVER ADDRESS” when
“AUTHENTICATION” is set to “POP3”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
‹OFF
Description
13 Set the POP3 server address for “POP3
Set “ALARM NOTICE” to “ON”.
Setting
An alarm image is attached to the e-mail.
Up to eight recipient e-mail addresses can be set.
USER MAIL ADDRESS
9
An alarm image is not attached to the e-mail.
mail addresses of other e-mail
recipients.
SMTP SERVER ADDRESS :
7
Description
10 Use the same procedure to set the e-
Click “1. ALARM NOTICE SET”.
ALARM NOTICE SET
5
Set “IMAGE” to “ON” or “OFF”.
‹OFF
The “ALARM NOTICE SET” screen is displayed.
4
Enter the recipient’s e-mail address
under “MAIL ADDRESS”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
The “ADVANCED MENU SET” screen is displayed.
8
Alarm notification is enabled.
Setting
2
6
ON
9
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
4
Alarm notification is disabled.
8
button on the operation
Description
‹OFF
“AUTHENTICATION” is set to “POP3” or
“SMTP”.
15 Set the password for “PASSWORD”
Set “SMTP SERVER ADDRESS”.
when “AUTHENTICATION” is set to
“POP3” or “SMTP”.
16 Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
English
201
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 202 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
9
ADVANCED MENU SET
4
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
No protocol
‹OFF
2. CAMERA CONTROL SET
Click the
panel.
SANYO COAX
SANYO RS485
SANYO RS485
BBV COAX
BBV COAX
PELCO COAX
PELCO COAX
2ND RS-485/422
2ND RS-485/422
SANYO COAX2
SANYO COAX (High speed)
5
The address (000 to 127) is displayed in
“ADD”.
6
Use the same procedure to set the other
channels.
7
8
button on the operation
SETTINGS
Set when cameras with remote operation capability are
connected.
Perform the following connections and set camera control to
use in full screen display.
Connections necessary for remote operation:
z Connect coaxial control cameras to the VIDEO terminal.
z Connect the Sanyo RS-485 control camera to the RS-485
terminal (RJ-11).
z Connect the other companies’ RS485/422 control camera
to the 2ND RS485/422 terminal.
SANYO COAX1
OPERATION
z For the digital video recorder to perform authentication, the
provider must have authentication settings made. Make the
authentication settings after confirming the type of
authentication supported by the connected provider.
1
INTRODUCTION
z The digital video recorder supports the following SMTP
authentication:
• CRAM-MD5 • LOGIN
Set “PROTOCOL” to the protocol
corresponding to the dome camera.
Set “2ND RS-485/422 PROTOCOL”.
Click [SAVE].
The setting is saved.
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
3. PPP SET
Click “8. ADVANCED MENU SET”.
This setting is required to connect to the provider.
The “ADVANCED MENU SET” screen is displayed.
3
1
Click “2. CAMERA CONTROL SET”.
The “CAMERA CONTROL SET” screen is displayed.
The DSR-5009P displays only nine channels.
2
Click “8. ADVANCED MENU SET”.
The “ADVANCED MENU SET” screen is displayed.
OFF
----
3
10
OFF
----
The “PPP SET” screen is displayed.
----
11
OFF
----
----
12
OFF
----
OFF
----
13
OFF
----
6
OFF
----
14
OFF
----
7
OFF
----
15
OFF
----
8
OFF
----
16
OFF
----
PROTOCOL
ADD.
OFF
----
CH
9
2
OFF
----
3
OFF
4
OFF
5
2ND RS-485/422 PROTOCOL :
PROTOCOL
ADD.
Click “3. PPP SET”.
PPP SET
4
6
8
OFF
SAVE
9
11
13
17
19
202
7
DIAL UP
: OFF
PROVIDER TEL. NO.
:
PASSWORD
:
AUTHENTICATION
: AUTO
AUTO IP ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
DIAL IN
10
12
14
: OFF
LOGIN ID
:
PASSWORD
:
AUTHENTICATION
: AUTO
IP ADDRESS
: 192
. 168
. 250
. 250
CLIENT IP ADDRESS
: 192
. 168
. 250
. 251
CIRCUIT TYPE
16
20
: TONE
MODEM INITI. COMMAND :
BAUD RATE : 115200
18
:
LOGIN ID
OTHER
15
5
NETWORK
SETTINGS
8
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
CAMERA CONTROL SET
CH
1
7
button on the operation
NETWORK
OPERATION
5
4
Click the
panel.
NETWORK
CONTROL
2
PARITY
: NONE
bps,
,
DATA SIZE : 8 bits
STOP BIT : 1
SAVE
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 203 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
9
ADVANCED MENU SET
12 Set “AUTHENTICATION” under “DIAL
IN” to an authentication protocol.
z The IP address automatically allocated by the Internet
service provider is displayed after a dial-up connection for
“AUTO IP ADDRESS”.
4
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹AUTO
Set “DIAL UP” to “ON” or “OFF”.
If no dial-up connection is to be used, select “OFF” and go to
step 9.
If a dial-up connection is to be used, select “ON” and perform
steps 5 to 8.
Dial-up connection is disabled.
ON
Dial-up connection is enabled.
5
6
7
8
phone line connected to the modem.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
‹DTMF
PULSE
Set “AUTHENTICATION” under “DIAL
UP” to an authentication protocol.
AT command.
9
Description
CHAP authentication is used.
Touch-tone line
Rotary dial line
Enter an AT command to control the modem. Enter a
command that begins with “AT” and specifies the modem
manufacturer and then a command that switches flow control
to software control.
PAP or CHAP authentication is detected
automatically.
PAP authentication is used.
Description
16 Set “MODEM INITI. COMMAND” to an
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
CHAP
CHAP authentication is used.
15 Set “CIRCUIT TYPE” to the type of
Set “PASSWORD” under “DIAL UP”.
PAP
CHAP
IN” to the IP address of the PC.
Set “LOGIN ID” under “DIAL UP”.
‹AUTO
PAP authentication is used.
14 Set “CLIENT IP ADDRESS” under “DIAL
Enter the telephone number of the
provider in “PROVIDER TEL. NO.”
under “DIAL UP”.
Setting
PAP
the IP address of the digital video
recorder.
Description
‹OFF
PAP or CHAP authentication is detected
automatically.
13 Set “IP ADDRESS” under “DIAL IN” to
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
17 Set “BAUD RATE”.
Set “DIAL IN” to “ON” or “OFF”.
If no dial-in connection is to be used, select “OFF” and go to
step 15.
If a dial-in connection is to be used, select “ON” and perform
steps 10 to 14.
z Use the DATA SPEED of the connected modem.
18 Set “PARITY”.
19 Set “STOP BIT”.
20 Click [SAVE].
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Setting
Description
‹OFF
Dial-in connection is disabled.
ON
Dial-in connection is enabled.
The setting is saved.
10 Set “LOGIN ID” under “DIAL IN”.
11 Set “PASSWORD” under “DIAL IN”.
4. NTP SET
Use the following procedure to synchronize the time using the
Internet or an NTP server on a LAN.
1
Click the
panel.
button on the operation
The “MAIN MENU” is displayed.
2
Click “8. ADVANCED MENU SET”.
The “ADVANCED MENU SET” screen is displayed.
English
203
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 204 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
9
3
ADVANCED MENU SET
Click “4. TIME ZONE/NTP SET”.
Setting
TIME ZONE/NTP SET
TIME ZONE
5
6
7
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS0
:
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE
: 01
. 0
0
. 0
. 0
: 00
RENEWAL
8
SAVE
Set “TIME ZONE”.
[Settings] (‹ indicates default setting)
Description
Greenwich Mean Time +5
hours 30 minutes, Mumbai,
Kolkata
GMT+06 Almaty, Dhaka
Greenwich Mean Time +6
hours, Almaty, Dhaka
GMT+07 Bangkok, Hanoi,
Jakarta
Greenwich Mean Time +7
hours, Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta
GMT+08 Beijing, Hong
Kong
Greenwich Mean Time +8
hours, Beijing, Hong Kong
GMT+09 Osaka, Sapporo,
Tokyo
Greenwich Mean Time +9
hours, Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo
GMT+10 Canberra, Sydney
Greenwich Mean Time +10
hours, Canberra, Sydney
GMT+11 Magadan,
Solomon Is.
Greenwich Mean Time +11
hours, Magadan, Solomon Is.
GMT+12 Auckland,
Wellington
Greenwich Mean Time +12
hours, Auckland, Wellington
GMT-11 Midway Island,
Samoa
Greenwich Mean Time -11
hours, Midway Island, Samoa
GMT+12 Fiji, Marshall Is.
Greenwich Mean Time +12
hours, Fiji, Marshall Is.
GMT-10 Hawaii
Greenwich Mean Time -10
hours, Hawaii
GMT-09 Alaska
Greenwich Mean Time -9
hours, Alaska
GMT-08 Pacific Time
Greenwich Mean Time -8
hours, Pacific Time
GMT-07 Arizona, Mountain
Time
Greenwich Mean Time -7
hours, Arizona
GMT-06 Central Time
Greenwich Mean Time -6
hours, Central Time
GMT-05 Eastern Time
Greenwich Mean Time -5
hours, Eastern Time
GMT-04 Atlantic Time
(Canada)
Greenwich Mean Time -4
hours, Atlantic Time (Canada)
GMT-03:30 Newfoundland
Greenwich Mean Time -3 hours
30 minutes, Newfoundland
GMT-03 Brasilia
Greenwich Mean Time -3
hours, Brasilia
GMT-02 Mid-Atlantic
Greenwich Mean Time -2
hours, Mid-Atlantic
5
6
7
8
GMT+03 Moscow,
Baghdad, Riyadh
Greenwich Mean Time +3
hours, Moscow, Baghdad,
Riyadh
GMT+03:30 Tehran
Greenwich Mean Time +3
hours 30 minutes, Tehran
GMT+04 Kabul, Baku,
Tbilisi
Greenwich Mean Time +4
hours, Kabul, Baku, Tbilisi
OTHER
Greenwich Mean Time +2
hours, Athens, Istanbul, Minsk
Click [SAVE].
NETWORK
SETTINGS
GMT+02 Athens, Istanbul,
Minsk
Set the synchronization time with “TIME
TO SYNCHRONIZE”. (10 minute
intervals)
z Click [RENEWAL] to manually update the time.
Greenwich Mean Time, Dublin,
Lisbon, London
Greenwich Mean Time +1 hour,
Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome
Set “NTP SERVER ADDRESS”.
The setting is saved.
GMT-01 Azores, Cap Verde Greenwich Mean Time -1 hour,
Is.
Azores
GMT+01 Amsterdam,
Berlin, Rome
Set “SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER” to
“ON”.
NETWORK
OPERATION
Greenwich Mean Time -12
hours, Eniwetok, Kwajalein
NETWORK
CONTROL
GMT-12 Eniwetok,
Kwajalein
‹GMT Dublin, Lisbon,
London
GMT+05:30 Mumbai,
Kolkata
SETTINGS
Setting
Greenwich Mean Time +5
hours, Islamabad, Tashkent
: GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
RENEWAL OF MANUAL OPERATION
4
GMT+05 Islamabad,
Tashkent
OPERATION
4
Description
INTRODUCTION
The “TIME ZONE/NTP SET” screen is displayed.
204
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 205 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
DVR VIEWER2
DVR Viewer2 is a program designed specifically for use with
the digital video recorder. It can be used to play back image
and audio data that have been copied onto storage media
such as a computer hard disk drive or CompactFlash card.
DVR Viewer2 can be downloaded from the Sanyo website at
the URL provided below.
Installing DVR Viewer2
Use the following procedure to install DVR Viewer2.
1
Sanyo website URL:
http://www.sanyosecurity.com
Decompress the downloaded DVR
Viewer2 and double-click the installer
icon.
The installation wizard starts.
z Do not recopy “Viewer2” from a CompactFlash card or disk
for use on a computer.
Operating environment
The following operating environment is required in order to
use the DVR Viewer2.
z Applicable operating system: Windows 98 SE, Me, 2000,
XP
z CPU: Pentium (R) 4 (2 GHz) or better
z Memory: 256 MB minimum
2
z If an older version of DVR Viewer2 or ActiveX is installed,
remove these programs with [Control Panel] J [Add or
Remove Programs] in advance.
z DVR Viewer2 supports JPEG2000.
English
205
The setup wizard is displayed. Perform
operations following the messages
displayed on the screen.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 206 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
DVR VIEWER2
Opening and closing DVR Viewer2
1
Opening DVR Viewer2
1
From the Start menu, select [Programs]
J [SANYO] J [DVR Viewer2] in order to
start the program.
INTRODUCTION
Closing DVR Viewer2
To close DVR Viewer, click the Close
button (X) in the top-right corner of the
window or select [Exit(X)] from the
[File(F)] menu.
DVR Viewer2 closes.
DVR Viewer2 starts up.
OPERATION
SETTINGS
When DVR Viewer2 starts up, the following window appears.
NETWORK
CONTROL
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
206
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 207 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
DVR VIEWER2
Menu structure
Opening files
The basic menus for DVR Viewer2 are located on the menu
bar and tool bar in the upper-left of the window. Click a
command to open the corresponding menu.
Use the following procedure to open files saved on the hard
disk or on a disk.
1
Menu bar
Alternatively, click the
This is the basic menu for DVR Viewer2. Click a command to
view the details for that command.
(1)
Click [Open(O)] on the [File(F)] menu.
(2)
icon on the toolbar.
The [Open] dialog box is displayed.
2
(3)
Click [Browse...] to display the folder
tree.
Specify the drive and folder to be viewed and then click [OK].
To display thumbnail images, check [Show Thumbnails].
(1) File(F)
Open(O): Opens saved images.
Print(P): Prints the specified image.
Title Input(T): Enter titles for printed images.
Exit(X): Closes DVR Viewer2.
(2) View(V)
Toolbar(T): Displays and hides the toolbar.
Status bar(S): Displays and hides the status bar at the bottom
of the window.
Separate(P): Allows the border to be moved up and down.
Date Display Format(D): Sets the date display format.
(3) Help(H)
Displays the version information of DVR Viewer2.
z To play back audio, be sure to specify a folder that
contains “MP3” files.
z When data was saved on a CD-R using a previous model
SANYO DVR, folders may not be displayed when
[Browse…] is clicked. In this case, set [Open images on
DISC] to ON and specify the drive.
Toolbar
3
This contains commands that are most often used.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Corresponds to the [Open(O)] command on the [File(F)]
menu.
(2) Corresponds to the [Print(P)] command on the [File(F)]
menu.
(3) Corresponds to the [Help(H)] command.
English
207
Click [OK].
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 208 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
DVR VIEWER2
INTRODUCTION
Viewing images
When image files are opened, the images that have been loaded appear. The display window consists of a main window and
a thumbnail window, and various operations on this window can be used during slideshow playback of images.
OPERATION
(1)
Time
stamp
SETTINGS
01/ 01/ 2005 10:15:10
(3)
01/01/2005 10:15:10
000001.jpg
000002.jpg
000003.jpg
000005.jpg
NETWORK
OPERATION
(1) Main window
When a thumbnail image is double-clicked, the image
appears larger in the main window.
When files are opened, the image whose file name has the
smallest number is displayed.
(2) Thumbnail window
When “Show Thumbnails” in the [Open] dialog box is
checked, thumbnail images are displayed in ascending order
of filename number. Thumbnail images that cannot fit in the
window can be viewed using the scroll bar.
(3) Operation panel (JP.209)
000004.jpg
NETWORK
CONTROL
(2)
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
208
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 209 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
DVR VIEWER2
(3) Operation panel
This is used for playback operations in the main window and to adjust the images.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
01/01/2005 10:15:10
(11)
(12)
(13)
(1) [TOP]
Displays the first image.
(2) [PREV]
Displays the previous image.
(3) [RPLAY]
Starts playback of the slideshow in the reverse direction.
Skips through the number of images specified in “SKIP”.
(4) [STOP]
When pressed during playback, the slideshow stops.
(5) [PLAY]
Displays one image at a time. (Slideshow)
Skips through the number of images specified in “SKIP”.
(6) [NEXT]
Displays the next image.
(7) [END]
Displays the last image.
(8) SKIP (Default setting: 1)
Sets the number of images that are skipped when playing and
reverse playing slideshows.
When using the default setting (1), all images are played back
one at a time.
For example, if “5” is set, 1→6→11… are displayed.
Setting values: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 100, 200
(9) IMAGE SIZE (Default setting: 1)
The display size for images in the main window can be set to
one of five sizes.
To display a large image, select higher values.
English
1
400 x 300
4
1,024 x 768
2
640 x 480
5
1,280 x 960
3
800 x 600
(14)
(10) PLAY SPEED (Default setting: 3)
The playback speed for slideshows can be set to one of five
speeds.
1
1 sec
4
0.1 sec
2
0.5 sec
5
0.02 sec
3
0.2 sec
z The actual playback speed may vary depending on the
computer’s performance.
(11) IMAGE NUMBER
Displays “Current image number/Total number of images”.
(12) TIME
Displays the recording time for the displayed image.
z The order of the day, month and year is defined by the
settings of the computer.
(13) TIME POSITION (Default setting: LOWER RIGHT)
Specifies the display position for the recording time.
Available settings: LOWER RIGHT, UPPER RIGHT, UPPER
LEFT, LOWER LEFT
(14) PLAYBACK AUDIO (Default setting: OFF)
Select the channel recorded the image file with audio to be
played back.
OFF
209
Audio is not played.
AUDIO1
Audio recorded with a device connected to the
AUDIO1 IN terminal on the rear panel is
played back.
AUDIO2
Audio recorded with a device connected to the
AUDIO2 IN terminal on the rear panel is
played back.
AUDIO1,2
Audio from both the AUDIO1 IN and AUDIO2
IN terminals on the rear panel are played back.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 210 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
1
DVR VIEWER2
Printing images
1
Specified images can be printed as full screens together with
date and time information.
Printing the image in the main window.
1
Hold down the [Ctrl] key and click on
the thumbnail images to be printed in
the thumbnail window.
Clicked images are selected.
Click [Print(P)] on the [File(F)] menu or
click the
icon on the toolbar.
Make the necessary settings, such as
selecting the printer and the number of
copies, and then click [OK].
The image in the main window is printed with an embedded
time stamp.
2
OPERATION
z Consecutive images can be collectively selected.
Click on the first image and then click on the last image
while holding the [SHIFT] key.
Click on the first image and then click on an image on the
next row (or previous row) while holding the [SHIFT] key to
select in boxes.
The Windows print dialog box is displayed.
2
INTRODUCTION
Printing several images all at once
SETTINGS
Perform the above procedure for
printing the image in the main window.
Selected images are printed one at a time.
Entering titles for printed images
1
Click [Title Input(T)] on the [File(F)]
menu.
The dialog box for entering titles is displayed.
NETWORK
CONTROL
Printing thumbnail images
1
Click the thumbnail image to be printed.
The image is highlighted in blue.
2
NETWORK
OPERATION
Perform the above procedure for
printing the image in the main window.
01/01/2005 10:15:10
NETWORK
SETTINGS
2
Enter the title, and then click [OK].
210
English
OTHER
z The entered title is printed at the bottom of the image.
z Up to ten titles can be saved. Click [
] in the [Input print
title] field to display the list and select.
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 211 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
2
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
RS-485 specifications
Data format
Mode
Asynchronous
Character length
8 bits
Data transmission
speed
2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200 bps
Parity check
None
Stop bit
1 bit
Communication protocol
A proprietary Sanyo protocol (SSP: Security Serial Protocol)
is used. Use of a special controller for operation is
recommended. To obtain this controller, contact a Sanyo
service center.
RS-232C specifications
Data format
Mode
Asynchronous
Character length
8 bits
Data transmission
speed
2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200 bps
Parity check
None
Stop bit
1 bit
Communication protocol
Communications performed in 1-bit units. The PC sends 1 bit,
waits for a response from the digital video recorder and then
sends the next bit.
Command table (JP.212)
English
211
e15_l8hbd_xe_7.fm Page 212 Wednesday, April 6, 2005 6:36 PM
2
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
INTRODUCTION
DVR/VCR command table
The table below shows the commands supported by the digital video recorder.
Left digit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Right digit
0
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
6
7
8
7
8
9
9
ACK
B
C
NAK
PLAY
SHIFTI
SHIFTK
SHIFTJ
SHIFTL
SHIFT+
/RP UP
SHIFT/RP DOWN
MENU
SECURITY
LOCK ON
SECURITY
LOCK OFF
REV PLAY/
SEARCH (DVR)
SETTINGS
A
TIMER
ON/OFF
OPERATION
0
GROUP SET*1
GROUP
CHECK*1
GROUP
CLEAR*1
D
E
F
STILL
B
C
NETWORK
CONTROL
STOP
Left digit
8
9
A
D
E
F
Right digit
0
1
5
MULTI (MPX)
QUAD (MPX)
PlUS 1 (MPX)
ZOOM
(MPX/DVR)
6
7
8
ALARM SCAN
REC CHECK
FULL 3
FULL 4
FULL 5
MPX STATUS
SENSE
FULL 6
CONTROL
START*2
CONTROL
STOP*2
STATUS
SENSE
FULL 8
FULL 9
CLOCK
DOWNLOAD
FULL 10
ALARM RESET
FULL 11
FULL 12
FF/ALARM F
C
FULL 13
REW/ALARM R
COPY
FULL 14
E
OSD/EXIT
FULL 15
FULL 16
CAMERA
CONTROL
(MPX)
CAMERA
SWITCH
REC/DUB
REQUEST
REC
AUX ON
AUX OFF
STATUS
LOG2*1
STATUS
LOG1*1
RS-485
SEND START*1
RS-485
RCV CMF.*1
REC STOP
Use only when controlling with RS-485.
Use only when controlling with RS-232C.
212
English
OTHER
D
NETWORK
SETTINGS
SEQUENCE
(MPX)
MONITOR2
(MPX)
B
F
*1
*2
FULL 2
CLOCK
ADJUST
MENU
RESET
FULL 7
9
A
ALARM
SEARCH
NETWORK
OPERATION
2
3
4
FULL 1
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 213 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
Specifications
Specifications
Product name
Product number
Hard disk capacity
Television system
Image compression
Picture resolution
Recording type
Picture quality
Recording rate
Recording areas
Magnification
Search modes
Date/clock settings
Date and time positions
Camera title display
Memory backup
Video input terminal
Video output terminal
Main monitor output terminal
Main monitor S-VIDEO output
Monitor 2 output terminal
Audio input terminal
Audio output terminal
Microphone input terminal
CompactFlash card slot
LAN terminal
Terminals
RS-485/422 terminal
RS-232C terminal
USB terminal
Remote control input terminal
Alarm input terminals
Alarm output terminal
Sensor alarm output terminals
Alarm reset input terminal
Non rec out terminal
Clock adjust input terminal
Clock adjust output terminal
Warning output terminal
Normal recording area disk full
warning output terminal
Archive area disk full warning
output terminal
External timer input terminal
Expandable slot
External storage unit
Power supply voltage
Current consumption
Allowable operating temperature
Allowable operating humidity
Dimensions
Weight
Accessories
Digital video recorder with multiplexer function
DSR-5016P (16 channels), DSR-5009P (9 channels)
Can be expanded using 80, 160, 250 or 300 GB hard disk (sold separately)
Conforms to PAL format
M-JPEG
720 x 288 (fields)
Field recording
5 levels (Basic, Normal, Enhanced, Fine, Super Fine)
28 levels (100 to 0.033 FPS)
Recording area, Archive area
x2 digital zoom using the [ZOOM] button
Alarm log search, Time/date search, Alarm search, Alarm thumbnail search,
Archive area search, Motion detection search
Day, Month, Year (last two digits), Hours, Minutes, Seconds
2 position; upper and lower (display may also be turned off)
Each channel; up to 10 alphanumeric characters and symbols (display may also be turned off)
Approximately 30 days (for 48 hours of electrification)
VBS/VS 1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω, BNC (DSR-5016P: x16, DSR-5009P: x9)
Through output of each video input, BNC (DSR-5016P: x16, DSR-5009P: x9)
VBS 1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω, BNC (x1)
S-terminal
VBS/VS 1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω, BNC (x1)
−8 dBs, 27 kΩ, unbalanced RCA (x2)
−8 dBs, 600 Ω, unbalanced RCA (x1)
−60 dBs, 10 kΩ, unbalanced 3.5 mm pin jack (x1)
CompactFlash Type 2 (front panel) (x1)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, RJ-45 (x1)
Compatible protocol: UDP, TCP/IP, HTTP server, NTP, SMTP, DHCP, PPP
RJ-11 (x2) (with a termination switch)
Dsub-9 pin
Internal USB 2.0 x 2 (front terminal prioritized)
Two-wire voltage control (x2)
No-volt contacts (with a pulse width of 100 ms or more) (DSR-5016P: x16, DSR-5009P: x9)
Active Low, Open collector Max. 500 mA (x1)
Open collector, Low level active (Max. 25 mA) (DSR-5016P: x16, DSR-5009P: x9)
No-volt contacts (with a pulse width of 100 ms or more) (x1)
Normal 5V DC, Low level active (x1)
No-volt contacts (with a pulse width of 100 ms or more) (x1)
Normal 5V DC, Low level active (x1)
Normal 5V DC, Low level active (x1)
Normal 5V DC, Low level active (x1)
Normal 5V DC, Low level active (x1)
No-volt contacts (with a pulse width of 100 ms or more) (x1)
Option SCSI board (Ultra 160 SCSI)
External storage unit connection terminal x 4
120 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
680 mA
5 – 40ºC
10 – 80%
420 (W) x 86 (H) x 364.5 (D) mm (Not including protruding areas or rubber pads)
6 kg without HDD, 6.6 kg with HDD, 7.2 kg with 2 HDDs
Power cord (x1), Core clamp x4 (large), x2 (small), Power cord tie (x1)
Note that product appearance and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
English
213
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 214 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
Specifications
INTRODUCTION
Dimensions
Units: mm
DSR-5016P
364.5
420
364.5
10
86
OPERATION
420
DSR-5009P
NETWORK
CONTROL
10
86
SETTINGS
NETWORK
OPERATION
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
214
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 215 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
Specifications
Table of recording rates and times
The recording time can be changed by modifying the recording rate and the recording picture quality.
The following table provides reference values for picture quality and recording rate when video is recorded to the recording area of the
hard disk.
z The recording time may change for different recording picture qualities.
„ Example: Recording to a 160 GB hard disk; internal HDD 160GB*1 (99%-usage)
Recording rate
FPS (field/sec)
100
50
25
16.67
12.5
8.333
6.25
5
4.167
3.571
3.125
2.778
2.5
2.273
1.923
1.667
1.471
1.316
1.19
1.087
1
0.5
0.333
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.033
BASIC
8 KB
1.3
2.7
5.4
8.1
10.7
16.1
21.5
26.8
32.2
37.6
43.0
48.3
53.7
59.1
69.8
80.5
91.3
102.0
112.8
123.5
134.2
268.5
403.1
537.0
671.2
1342.4
2684.9
4068.0
Recording time
ENHANCED
24 KB
0.6
1.2
2.3
3.5
4.6
6.9
9.2
11.5
13.8
16.1
18.4
20.7
23.0
25.3
29.9
34.5
39.1
43.7
48.3
52.9
57.5
115.1
172.8
230.1
287.7
575.3
1150.7
1743.4
NORMAL
16 KB
0.8
1.6
3.2
4.8
6.4
9.7
12.9
16.1
19.3
22.6
25.8
29.0
32.2
35.4
41.9
48.3
54.8
61.2
67.7
74.1
80.5
161.1
241.9
322.2
402.7
805.5
1610.9
2440.8
FINE
32 KB
0.4
0.9
1.8
2.7
3.6
5.4
7.2
8.9
10.7
12.5
14.3
16.1
17.9
19.7
23.3
26.8
30.4
34.0
37.6
41.2
44.7
89.5
134.4
179.0
223.7
447.5
895.0
1356.0
„ Example: Recording to a 300 GB hard disk; internal HDD 300GB*1 (99%-usage)
Recording rate
FPS (field/sec)
100
50
25
16.67
12.5
8.333
6.25
5
4.167
3.571
3.125
2.778
2.5
2.273
1.923
1.667
1.471
1.316
1.19
1.087
1
0.5
0.333
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.033
BASIC
8 KB
NORMAL
16 KB
Recording time
ENHANCED
24 KB
2.6
5.2
10.5
15.7
21.0
31.5
41.9
52.4
62.9
73.4
83.9
94.4
104.8
115.3
136.3
157.2
178.2
199.2
220.3
241.1
262.1
524.2
787.1
1048.5
1310.6
2621.1
5242.3
7942.9
1.4
2.8
5.6
8.3
11.1
16.7
22.2
27.8
33.3
38.9
44.4
50.0
55.5
61.0
72.2
83.2
94.3
105.4
116.6
127.7
138.8
277.5
416.7
555.1
693.8
1387.7
2775.3
4205.0
0.9
1.9
3.8
5.7
7.5
11.3
15.1
18.9
22.6
26.4
30.2
34.0
37.7
41.5
49.1
56.6
64.1
71.7
79.3
86.8
94.4
188.7
283.4
377.4
471.8
943.6
1887.2
2859.4
(Unit: day)
SUPER FINE
40 KB
0.4
0.7
1.5
2.2
2.9
4.4
5.9
7.3
8.8
10.3
11.7
13.2
14.6
16.1
19.0
22.0
24.9
27.8
30.8
33.7
36.6
73.2
109.9
146.4
183.1
366.1
732.2
1109.5
(Unit: day)
FINE
32 KB
SUPER FINE
40 KB
0.7
1.4
2.9
4.3
5.7
8.6
11.4
14.3
17.2
20.0
22.9
25.7
28.6
31.4
37.2
42.9
48.6
54.3
60.1
65.8
71.5
143.0
214.7
285.9
357.4
714.9
1429.7
2166.2
0.6
1.2
2.3
3.5
4.6
6.9
9.2
11.5
13.8
16.1
18.4
20.7
23.0
25.3
29.9
34.5
39.1
43.7
48.4
52.9
57.5
115.1
172.8
230.1
287.7
575.4
1150.7
1743.6
: Area where audio recording is possible (when recording audio, the recording time is shorter than that shown above.)
English
215
e15_l8hbd_xe_7.fm Page 216 Wednesday, April 6, 2005 6:37 PM
3
Specifications
„ Example: Recording to 1600 GB hard disks; internal HDD 300GB*2 + external HDD 250GB*4 (99%-usage)
Recording rate
FPS (field/sec)
7.7
15.3
30.7
46.0
61.4
92.1
122.8
153.5
184.2
214.9
245.6
276.2
306.9
337.6
399.0
460.3
521.7
583.1
644.8
706.0
767.4
1534.7
2304.4
3069.5
3836.8
7673.7
15347.4
23253.6
5.2
10.4
20.9
31.3
41.7
62.6
83.5
104.4
125.2
146.1
167.0
187.8
208.7
229.6
271.4
313.0
354.7
396.5
438.5
480.0
521.8
1043.6
1567.0
2087.2
2609.1
5218.1
10436.2
15812.4
SUPER FINE
40 KB
4.0
7.9
15.8
23.7
31.6
47.4
63.2
79.1
94.9
110.7
126.5
142.3
158.1
173.9
205.6
237.1
268.7
300.4
332.2
363.7
395.3
790.6
1187.1
1581.2
1976.6
3953.1
7906.2
11979.1
3.2
6.4
12.7
19.1
25.5
38.2
50.9
63.6
76.4
89.1
101.8
114.5
127.3
140.0
165.5
190.9
216.3
241.8
267.4
292.7
318.2
636.4
955.5
1272.7
1590.9
3181.8
6363.5
9641.7
„ Example: Recording to 2200 GB hard disks; internal HDD 300GB*2 + external HDD 400GB*4 (99%-usage)
(Unit: day)
Recording rate
FPS (field/sec)
10.6
21.1
42.3
63.4
84.6
126.9
169.2
211.5
253.8
296.1
338.4
380.7
423.0
465.2
549.9
634.4
718.9
803.6
888.6
972.9
1057.5
2115.0
3175.7
4230.0
5287.5
10574.9
21149.8
32045.2
7.2
14.4
28.8
43.1
57.5
86.3
115.1
143.8
172.6
201.4
230.1
258.9
287.6
316.4
373.9
431.4
488.8
546.4
604.3
661.5
719.1
1438.2
2159.4
2876.4
3595.5
7190.9
14381.9
21790.7
SUPER FINE
40 KB
5.4
10.9
21.8
32.7
43.6
65.4
87.2
109.0
130.7
152.6
174.3
196.1
217.9
239.7
283.3
326.8
370.3
414.0
457.8
501.2
544.8
1089.5
1635.9
2179.1
2723.8
5447.7
10895.4
16508.1
4.4
8.8
17.5
26.3
35.1
52.6
70.2
87.7
105.2
122.8
140.3
157.8
175.4
192.9
228.0
263.0
298.1
333.2
368.5
403.4
438.5
876.9
1316.7
1753.9
2192.4
4384.7
8769.4
13287.0
OTHER
20.0
39.9
79.9
119.8
159.8
239.7
319.6
399.5
479.4
559.4
639.2
719.0
799.0
878.8
1038.7
1198.3
1357.9
1517.8
1678.6
1837.6
1997.5
3995.0
5998.5
7989.9
9987.4
19974.8
39949.7
60529.8
FINE
32 KB
NETWORK
SETTINGS
NORMAL
16 KB
NETWORK
OPERATION
100
50
25
16.67
12.5
8.333
6.25
5
4.167
3.571
3.125
2.778
2.5
2.273
1.923
1.667
1.471
1.316
1.19
1.087
1
0.5
0.333
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.033
BASIC
8 KB
Recording time
ENHANCED
24 KB
NETWORK
CONTROL
14.5
29.0
58.0
87.0
116.0
173.9
231.9
289.9
347.8
405.9
463.8
521.8
579.8
637.7
753.8
869.5
985.4
1101.4
1218.0
1333.5
1449.5
2898.9
4352.8
5797.9
7247.4
14494.7
28989.5
43923.4
FINE
32 KB
SETTINGS
NORMAL
16 KB
OPERATION
100
50
25
16.67
12.5
8.333
6.25
5
4.167
3.571
3.125
2.778
2.5
2.273
1.923
1.667
1.471
1.316
1.19
1.087
1
0.5
0.333
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.033
BASIC
8 KB
INTRODUCTION
(Unit: day)
Recording time
ENHANCED
24 KB
: Area where audio recording is possible (when recording audio, the recording time is shorter than that shown above.)
216
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 217 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
Specifications
Table of recording rate settings
This table indicates recording times for pre-alarm recording, and it should be used when this type of recording is being carried out.
Recording rate FPS
(field/sec)
100
50
25
16.67
12.5
8.333
6.25
5
4.167
3.571
3.125
2.778
2.5
2.273
1.923
1.667
1.471
1.316
1.19
1.087
1
0.5
0.333
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.033
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
Normal recording rate
(Note1)
(Note3)
(Note3)
Alarm recording rate
(Note3)
Pre-alarm recording rate
(Note2)
(Note3)
(Note3)
When mirroring or pre-alarm recording is set to “ON”, recording rates that can be set are limited.
When mirroring is set to “ON”, recording rates that can be set are limited.
Cannot be set when only one camera is connected.
Recording rate FPS
(field/sec)
25
12.5
6.25
3.125
1.563
1
0.5
0.333
0.25
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.033
OFF
Program recording rate
(Note4)
(Note 4)
(Note)
When mirroring or pre-alarm recording is set to “ON”, recording rates that can be set are limited.
For program recording, set recording rate per channel. Recording rates that can be set per channel are automatically
calculated.
Recording rates that cannot be selected
English
217
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 218 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
Specifications
Recording rate
FPS (field/sec)
5s
(5s)
10 s
(10s)
Recording time (Display of time on menu screens s: seconds m: minutes)
20 s
40 s
60 s
120 s
180 s
240 s
300 s
500 s
(20s)
(40s)
(1 m)
(2 m)
(3 m)
(4 m)
(5 m)
(10 m)
INTRODUCTION
Table of pre-alarm recording times
900 s
(15 m)
100
50
25
OPERATION
16.67
12.5
8.333
6.25
5
4.167
3.571
SETTINGS
3.125
2.778
2.5
2.273
1.923
1.667
1.563
NETWORK
CONTROL
1.471
1.316
1.19
1.087
1
Default setting, Recording rate: 12.5 FPS, Recording time: 1 min.
NETWORK
OPERATION
When setting alarm durations using a menu, settings are restricted to those available for the selected recording rate.
Similarly, when setting recording rates, the setting range is restricted to that available for the selected duration. For example, if the
alarm duration is set to 5 seconds, the recording rate can be set between 100 FPS and 12.5 FPS.
When setting fast recording rates, it may be necessary to first of all change the alarm duration setting.
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
218
English
e15_l8hbd_xe_7.fm Page 219 Wednesday, April 6, 2005 6:38 PM
3
Specifications
Terminal board specifications
Input/output terminals
Signal level
Input/output circuit
5V
Alarm input
[No-volt contacts]
Open
ground
input
100k
10k
Terminal
0V
IC
74HC597
100ms or more
Open
Sensor alarm output
[Open collector/1kΩ, Low
level active (max: 25mA)]
1k
IC
BU209
0V
Detect motion
sensor
Terminal
Stop alarm
recording
+5V
4.7k
CTL4,5 Remote control input
(JP.17)
[Two-wire voltage control]
Remote
control
terminal
1k
Sub micro
processor
5V
CTL6 Clock adjust input
[No-volt contacts]
Open
ground
input
100k
10k
1k
Terminal
0V
IC
74HC597
100ms or more
CTL7 Clock adjust output
[Normal 5V/5.7kΩ, Low level
active]
5V
5V
4.7k
0V
Approx. 1 second
CTL8 External timer input
[No-volt contacts]
1k
IC
BU209
Terminal
5V
Open
ground
input
100k
10k
1k
Terminal
0V
IC
74HC597
100ms or more
Open
CTL9 Alarm output
[Open collector/1kΩ, Low
level active (max: 500mA)]
0V
Start alarm Finish alarm
recording
recording
English
219
IC
BU209
5V
12V
4.7k
4.7k
Terminal
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 220 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
3
Specifications
Input/output terminals
Signal level
Input/output circuit
INTRODUCTION
5V
CTL10 Alarm reset input
[No-volt contacts]
Open
ground
input
100k
10k
1k
Terminal
0V
IC
74HC597
100ms or more
OPERATION
5V
5V
4.7k
CTL11 Non rec output
[DC5V/5.7kΩ, Active Low]
1k
IC
BU209
0V
Terminal
Stop recording
CTL12 Warning output
[DC5V/5.7kΩ, Active Low]
SETTINGS
5V
5V
4.7k
0V
1k
IC
BU209
Terminal
Warning conditions established
(HDD error, FAN error detected)
CTL13 Normal recording
area disk full warning output
[DC5V/5.7kΩ, Active Low]
4.7k
0V
1k
IC
BU209
Terminal
Warning conditions established
(no space in normal recording area)
5V
5V
4.7k
0V
IC
BU209
Warning conditions established
(no space in archive area)
1k
Terminal
NETWORK
OPERATION
CTL14 Archive area disk full
warning output terminal
[DC5V/5.7kΩ, Active Low]
NETWORK
CONTROL
5V
5V
NETWORK
SETTINGS
OTHER
220
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 221 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
MENU SETTING SEQUENCE
INITIAL SET (→P.61)
<INITIAL SET>
1.LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET
2.CAMERA DETECT
3.TITLE SET
4.HOLIDAY SET
5.TIME PERIOD SET
MOVE:JOG
RECORD SET (→P.71)
<RECORD SET>
1.NORMAL REC EASY SET
2.RECORDING AREA SET
3.RECORDING CONDITIONS SET
4.NORMAL REC MODE SET
5.PROGRAM REC SET
6.TIMER SET
7.ALARM REC MODE SET
8.ALARM OPERATION SET
->
->
->
->
->
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
LANGUAGE/CLOCK SET (→P.19)
<LANGUAGE/LANGUE/SPRACHE/IDIOMA>
ENGLISH
<CLOCK SET>
01-01-2005 SAT 00:00:00
<SUMMER TIME SET>
MODE
:
USE
WEEK MONTH TIME
ON LST-SUN
03
02:00
OFF LST-SUN
10
02:00
<EXT.CLOCK SET>
ADJUST. TIME
01:00
CAMERA DETECT (→P.64)
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
MOVE:JOG
SELECT:SHUTTLE
NORMAL REC EASY SET (→P.72)
RECORDING DURATION BASE
->
REC RATE BASE
->
CAMERA DETECT
CONTINUE?
NO
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
G
1.DISPLAY
2.BUZZER
3.SECURIT
4.RS-232C
5.HDD SET
6.NETWORK
7.NETWORK
MOVE:J
RECORDING DURATION BASE (→P.72)
D
<RECORDING DURATION BASE>
RECORDING DURATION : -- DAYS
TIMER RECORDING(DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
<NORMAL REC EASY SET>
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
REC RATE
CAUTION !
CONNECT CAMERA AND SET TIME
BEFORE SETUP
:2
: ---- FPS/CAM
REC RATE BASE (→P.74)
RECORDING AREA SET (→P.77)
<RECORDING AREA SET>
TOTAL CAPACITY
:
INTERNAL HDD
:
EXTERNAL HDD
:
RECORDING AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
ARCHIVE AREA
:
AREA FULL RESET ->
<WARNING>
<MAIN MENU>
1.INITIAL SET
2.RECORD SET
3.GENERAL SET
4.SCREEN SET
5.POWER LOSS/USED TIME
6.INITIALIZATION LOG
7.COPY MENU SETTINGS
8.ADVANCED MENU SET
B
<REC RATE BASE>
REC RATE
: ---- FPS/CAM
TIMER RECORDING (DLY) : OFF
START --:-- STOP --:-PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
1200GB
500GB
700GB
80 %
20 %
NUMBER OF CAMERAS
RECORDING DURATION
:1
: ---- DAYS
CAUTION: WHEN THE AREA SETTING IS CHANGED,
THE WHOLE AREA WILL BE INITIALIZED !
TITLE SET (→P.65)
SE
RECORDING CONDITIONS SET (→P.80)
<TITLE SET>
<RECORDING CONDITIONS SET>
RECORDING AREA
OVERWRITE
: ON
ARCHIVE AREA
MODE
: MANUAL COPY
CAMERA NO.01 ________01
REMAINING DISK WARNING : 1%
AUTO DELETE
HOLIDAY SET (→P.66)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
<HOLIDAY
-----------------------------------------
SET>
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
-----------------------------------------
TIME PERIOD SET (→P.67)
<TIME PERIOD SET>
TIME PERIOD
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
TIME PERIOD A 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
TIME PERIOD B 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
SELECT TIME PERIOD
SEQUENCE
MASK
MOTION/ROI SENSOR
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
TIME PERIOD A
: OFF
RS
NORMAL REC MODE SET (→P.83)
<NORMAL REC MODE
PICTURE QUALITY
PICTURE QUALITY SET
AUDIO RECORDING
REC RATE : 12.5 FPS
REC PROGRAM GROUP
SET>
: ENHANCED
->
: OFF
( 166H)
: OFF
H
PROGRAM REC SET (→P.85)
<PROGRAM REC SET>
D
E
E
PROGRAM : P-1
SELECT INDIVIDUAL CAMERA RATE (FPS)
01:1
02:1
03:1
04:1
05:1
06:1
07:1
08:1
09:1
10:1
11:1
12:1
13:1
14:1
15:1
16:1
NORMAL REC :
57H
TIMER SET (→P.87)
WEEK
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THU
FRI
SAT
DLY
EXT
START
--:---:---:---:---:---:---:---:-*****
<TIMER SET>
STOP PROGRAM
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
--:-OFF
*****
OFF
FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
12.5 FPS
ALARM REC MODE SET (→P.93)
<ALARM REC MODE SET>
ALARM RECORDING
: OFF
PICTURE QUALITY
: ENHANCED
PICTURE QUALITY SET
->
AUDIO RECORDING
: OFF
ALARM INTERLEAVE
: ONLY
REC RATE: 12.5FPS, DURATION: 20SEC
PRE-ALARM RECORDING
: ***
REC RATE: ***** FPS, DURATION: *****
ALARM TRIGGER
: ALARM
MOTION SENSOR
->
SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ALARM OPERATION SET (→P.102)
PICTURE QUALITY SET (→P.94)
CHANNEL
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
NORMAL REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ALARM REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
CHANNEL
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NORMAL REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
ALARM REC EN EN EN EN EN EN EN EN
MOTION SENSOR SET (→P.99)
<ALARM OPERATION SET>
ALARM RETRIGGER
: OFF
MAIN MON. DISPLAY
ALARM PRIORITY
MON.2 DISPLAY
: FULL
: LAST
: NC
CH01
English
221
NE
<PICTURE QUALITY SET>
T-1
LEVEL : OFF
MODE : A
NE
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 222 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
MENU SETTING SEQUENCE
Continued
MOVE:JOG
SCREEN SET (→P.126)
<SCREEN SET>
1.MULTI SCREEN
: CHANGE
QUAD POSITION SET
->
MULTI 9 POSITION SET
->
MULTI 16 POSITION SET
->
2.SEQUENCE SET
FULL : 1S
QUAD : 1S
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET
->
3.MASK
: OFF
MASK SET
->
4.COLOR LEVEL SET
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
POWER LOSS/USED TIME (→ P.133)
POWER
#001
<POWER LOSS/USED
LOSS
03-02 00:05
----- --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:-USED TIME
TIME>
RECOVER
03-02 06:37
----- --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:------ --:-->
OPERATION
QUAD POSITION SET (→P.126)
DISPLAY SET (→P.107)
<DISPLAY SET>
DATE
: ON
TIME
: ON
QUALITY
: ON
AUDIO
: ON
ALARM COUNT
: ON
ALARM TYPE
: ON
TITLE
: ON
VIDEO LOSS
INTRODUCTION
GENERAL SET (→P.106)
<GENERAL SET>
1.DISPLAY SET
2.BUZZER SET
3.SECURITY LOCK SET
4.RS-232C/RS-485 SET
5.HDD SET
6.NETWORK SET
7.NETWORK CONTROL SET
MAIN MON.
QUAD1
01 02
03 04
QUAD2
05 06
QUAD3
09 10
11 12
07 08
QUAD4
13 14
15 16
MON.2
QUAD1
QUAD2
QUAD3
QUAD4
01 02
05 06
09 10
13 14
03 04
07 08
11 12
15 16
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
: ON
BUZZER SET (→P.109)
MULTI 9 POSITION SET (→P.126)
MAIN MON.
SETTINGS
<BUZZER SET>
ALARM
: OFF
DISK FULL
: ON
DISK ERROR
: ON
LOCK WARNING : ON
KEY IN
: OFF
NON REC
: OFF
MON. 2
03
01
02
03
01
02
04
05
06
04
05
06
07
08
09
07
08
09
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
SECURITY LOCK SET (→P.110)
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV2,3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
USER ID SET (→P.112)
<USER
USER ID PASSWORD LV
ID4----- 4444---- 4
ID3----- 3333---- 3
ID2----- 2222---- 2
ID1----- 1111---- 1
-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY,
ID SET>
| USER ID PASSWORD LV
| -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- | -------- -------- LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
RS-232C/RS-485 SET (→P.115)
MAIN MON.
MON. 2
01
02
03
04
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
CHECK THE MAIN MON.SCREEN ->
CHECK THE MON.2 SCREEN ->
MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET (→P.128)
SET>
RS-485
19200
OFF
OFF
001
<MAIN/MON.2 MONITOR SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00 CH
01 02 03 04 05 06
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
12:00)
07 08
1S 1S
1S 1S
CH
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MAIN MON. 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
MON. 2
1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S 1S
HDD SET (→P.117)
<HDD SET>
DISK 1
: 250GB <- DISK 2
EX-DISK 1 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 2
EX-DISK 3 : 250GB <- EX-DISK 4
DISK INITIALIZE
CAUTION : ALL RECORDING WILL BE
MIRRORING
: OFF
PLAYBACK DRIVE : ***
08
EN
EN
16
EN
EN
<MASK SET>
TIME PERIOD : T-1 (09:00
CH
01 02 03 04 05
MAIN MON. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
MON. 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
NETWORK
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
- 12:00)
06 07 08
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
CH
MAIN MON.
MON. 2
NETWORK
14
OFF
OFF
OFF
11
OFF
OFF
OFF
12
OFF
OFF
OFF
13
OFF
OFF
OFF
<COLOR LEVEL SET>
<NETWORK SET>
DHCP
: OFF
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168. 0. 1
SUBNET MASK
: 255.255.255. 0
GATEWAY
: 0. 0. 0. 0
HTTP PORT
: 00080
NETWORK SPEED
: NO LIMIT
DNS SET
->
15
OFF
OFF
OFF
16
OFF
OFF
OFF
:08-00-7B-81-22-4C
COLOR LEVEL :
5
OTHER
CH01
→P.99)
10
OFF
OFF
OFF
COLOR LEVEL SET (→P.132)
NETWORK SET (→P.120)
MAC ADDRESS
09
OFF
OFF
OFF
NETWORK
SETTINGS
→P.94)
MASK SET (→P.130)
: 250GB
: 250GB
: 250GB
->
ERASED!
NETWORK
OPERATION
<RS-232C/RS-485
CONTROL
:
DATA SPEED
:
STATUS INFO
:
ALARM INFO
:
ADDRESS
:
MULTI 16 POSITION SET (→P.126)
NETWORK
CONTROL
<SECURITY LOCK SET>
LOCKMODE
: KEY
FREE ACCESS LEVEL
: NO
NETWORK CONTROL SET (→P.123)
<NETWORK CONTROL SET>
NETWORK CONTROL
: ON
NETWORK STATUS
: ON
A
OPERATION AUTHORITY
COPY/DOWNLOAD
CAMERA CONTROL
: NORMAL
: LV3,4
: LV2,3,4
USER ID SET
->
LV1:LIVE, LV2:PLAY, LV3:REC, LV4:MENU SET
222
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 223 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
4
MENU SETTING SEQUENCE
INITIALIZATION LOG (→P.134)
DATE
-------------------------------------
< INITIALIZATION LOG
TIME AREA
ACTION
--:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( -------:-- ------- ( ------
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
COPY MENU SETTINGS (→P.135)
<COPY MENU SETTINGS>
>
USER
----------------------------------------------------------------
<ADVANCED MENU SET>
1.ROI SET
2.ALARM NOTICE SET
3.CAMERA CONTROL SET
4.PPP SET
5.TIME ZONE/NTP SET
DVR TYPE VER. SA16-04.00
SAVE MENUS TO CF
ADVANCED MENU SET (→P.138)
->
LOAD MENUS FROM CF
->
COPY USER ID SETTINGS
: NO
COPY RECORDING AREA SETTINGS : NO
*IF YOU CHOOSE ^YES^ FOR ^AREA SETTINGS^,
HARD DISK WILL BE INITIALIZED !
MOVE:JOG
->
->
->
->
->
SELECT:SHUTTLE
ROI SET (→P.139)
CH-01
STATIC
STATIC
STATIC
<ROI SET>
QUALITY
AREA 1 : OFF
AREA 2 : OFF
AREA 3 : OFF
ACTIVE ROI
OFF
OFF
OFF
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET (→P.142)
2
1
EFFECTIVE REC MODE : NORMAL REC
3
AREA/SENSITIVITY SET ---->
CH-01
T-1
LEVEL: OFF
TIME LAG: OFF
ALARM NOTICE SET (→P.144) SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET (→P.144)
<ALARM NOTICE SET>
ALARM NOTICE
: OFF
SMTP SERVER ADDRESS :
USER MAIL ADDRESS :
SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET ->
SUBJECT :
AUTHENTICATION
POP3 SERVER ADDRESS
USER ID
PASSWORD
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
: NO USE
:
:
:
<SEND MAIL ADDRESS SET>
USE MAIL ADDRESS
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
IMAGE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CAMERA CONTROL SET (→P.145)
CH
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
<CAMERA CONTROL SET>
PROTOCOL
ADD | CH PROTOCOL
OFF
--- | 09 OFF
OFF
--- | 10 OFF
OFF
--- | 11 OFF
OFF
--- | 12 OFF
OFF
--- | 13 OFF
OFF
--- | 14 OFF
OFF
--- | 15 OFF
OFF
--- | 16 OFF
2ND RS485/422 PROTOCOL : OFF
ADD
-----------------
PPP SET (→P.147)
<PPP SET>
DIAL UP
: OFF
DIAL UP SET
->
DIAL IN
: OFF
DIAL IN SET
->
CIRCUIT TYPE
: DTMF
MODEM INI. COMMAND
:
BAUD RATE
: 115200 bps
DATA SIZE
: 8 bits
PARITY
: NONE
STOP BIT
:1
TIME ZONE/NTP SET (→P.149)
<TIME ZONE SET>
TIME ZONE
GMT Dublin, Lisbon, London
<NTP SET>
SYNC. WITH NTP SERVER : OFF
NTP SERVER ADDRESS
: 0. 0. 0. 0
TIME TO SYNCHRONIZE : 01:00
English
223
DIAL UP SET (→P.148)
<DIAL UP SET>
PROVIDER TEL NO :
LOGIN ID
:
PASSWORD
:
AUTHENTICATION
: AUTO
AUTO IP ADDRESS : 0. 0. 0. 0
DIAL IN SET (→P.148)
<DIAL IN SET>
LOGIN ID
:
PASSWORD
:
AUTHENTICATION
: AUTO
IP ADDRESS
: 192.168.250.250
CLIENT IP ADDRESS : 192.168.250.251
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 224 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
INDEX
Symbols
L
[0] through [9] buttons ..................................................113
LOAD MENUS FROM CF ........................................... 200
A
M
Alarm is cancelled ........................................................105
ALARM LOG SEARCH ................................................170
Alarm log search ............................................................36
ALARM NOTICE SET ..................................................201
ALARM REC MODE SET ............................................186
Alarm recording .................................................... 30, 162
ALARM SEARCH ........................................................171
Alarm search ..................................................................37
ALARM THUMBNAIL SEARCH ...................................171
Alarm thumbnail search .................................................40
Alarm triggers ................................................................98
Archive area ...................................................................21
ARCHIVE AREA SEARCH ..........................................172
AUTO DELETE ..............................................................82
Automatic camera selection ...........................................25
Making network control settings .................................. 123
Making NTP settings ................................................... 149
Making PPP settings ................................................... 147
MASK SET .................................................................. 197
MIRRORING ............................................................... 192
Monitor 2 ....................................................................... 26
MONITORING VIDEO FROM A CAMERA ................. 163
MOTION DETECTION SEARCH ................................ 173
Motion detection search ................................................ 45
N
NETWORK CONTROL ............................................... 156
NETWORK SET .......................................................... 193
Network settings .......................................................... 120
NORMAL REC MODE SET ........................................ 183
Normal recording ........................................................... 29
Normal recording easy setup ........................................ 72
B
Basic connections ..........................................................13
BUZZER SET ..............................................................189
O
Operating display .......................................................... 18
overwrite permission ..................................................... 79
C
CAMERA CONTROL SET ...........................................202
Camera control settings ...............................................145
Changing recording areas .............................................78
CLOCK SET ................................................................179
COPY MENU SETTINGS ............................................200
Copying to a CD-R/RW or DVD±R/±RW .......................54
Copying to a CompactFlash card ..................................51
Copying to the archive area .........................................174
Copying video to the archive area .................................50
P
Playing enlarged video .................................................. 34
Playing on multi 9 or multi 16 screens .......................... 34
Playing video on a full screen ....................................... 31
Playing video on quad screens ..................................... 33
POWER LOSS/USED TIME ....................................... 133
Pre-alarm recording ..............................................30, 162
PRECAUTION ................................................................. 1
PROGRAM REC SET ................................................. 184
D
Detecting cameras .........................................................64
DISPLAY SET ..............................................................189
Downloading to a PC ...................................................175
DVR VIEWER2 ............................................................205
R
RECORD SET ............................................................... 71
Recording area .............................................................. 21
RECORDING AREA SET ........................................... 181
RECORDING CONDITIONS SET ............................... 182
Recording pattern .......................................................... 95
Resetting menu items ................................................... 59
E
Enlarging video ..............................................................24
EXT. CLOCK SET setting ............................................179
External clock setting .....................................................63
S
Saving user settings .................................................... 135
Searching within the archive area ................................. 44
SEQUENCE SET ........................................................ 196
Setting alarm notification ............................................. 144
Setting alarm recording ................................................. 93
Setting camera titles ...................................................... 65
Setting data display ..................................................... 107
Setting display for video loss ....................................... 108
Setting holidays ............................................................. 66
Setting masks .............................................................. 130
Setting normal recording ............................................... 83
Setting program recording ............................................. 85
Setting recording conditions .......................................... 80
G
GENERAL SET ............................................................106
H
HDD SET .....................................................................192
HOLIDAY SET .............................................................180
I
INITIALIZATION LOG ..................................................134
Initializing the hard disk ...............................................117
224
English
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 225 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
INDEX
Setting ROI ..................................................................139
Setting RS-232C and RS-485 ......................................115
Setting the buzzer ........................................................109
Setting the color level ..................................................132
Setting the interval and monitors for automatic screen
selection .......................................................................128
Setting the language ......................................................19
Setting the security lock ...............................................110
Setting the summer time ................................................62
Setting the time ..............................................................20
Setting time periods .......................................................67
Setting user ID .............................................................112
SUMMER TIME SET ...................................................179
T
TIME/DATE SEARCH ..................................................172
Time/date search ...........................................................42
TIMER ............................................................................29
Timer recording ............................................................162
TIMER SET ..................................................................185
Timer settings ................................................................87
U
USER ID SET ..............................................................191
User level ................................................... 112, 125, 191
V
Viewing on a full screen .................................................22
Viewing on multi 9 or multi 16 screens ..........................24
Viewing on quad screens ...............................................23
Viewing still images .......................................................33
English
225
e00_l8hbd_xe_7.book Page 226 Tuesday, April 5, 2005 11:41 AM
SANYO Electric Co., Ltd.
Printed on recycled paper
1AC6P1P2809-L8HBD/XE, L8HBF/XE (0405TR-SY)
Printed in Japan
Download PDF
Similar pages